JP6857953B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, a lottery is performed based on whether or not a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device so that the symbol is stopped and displayed according to the lottery result. There is known a gaming machine that stops and displays a jackpot symbol on a display device to generate a jackpot gaming state when the result is a jackpot. In this big hit game state, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time by opening the big prize opening as a winning opening that is normally closed and letting the big winning opening win a prize one after another. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-66799

In the above-mentioned game machine, a general game is performed in which a game ball is won at the starting port and a big hit game state is generated to aim for the prize ball, but such a monotonous game is repeated. There was a risk that the game would be less enjoyable if it was used alone. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in Yu technique interest.

(Solution 1)
After the start condition is satisfied, a lottery means to draw a lot based on the start condition is satisfied, and
A display control means that starts fluctuation control of the display means based on the establishment of the start condition and derives and displays a display result according to the lottery result.
A specific state giving means that gives a specific state that can give a game value to a player when the displayed result is a specific result, and
The Grant advantageous particularly advantageous conditions in a different player starts at the specific state of the fluctuation control based on the establishment of the starting conditions winning a special result lottery by the lottery unit, wherein from the start of the variation control special result display results continuously applied the special advantage until determined in accordance with, comprising a beneficial and applying means, to terminate the application of the special favorable state when the display result is determined in accordance with the special results,
Wherein in a state where Ri by the advantageous application means the particularly advantageous state is granted, depending on the particular results of the kind elected by the lottery, second being different from the first embodiment displays a first aspect the display Any one of a plurality of mode displays is performed, including the mode display of .
The particularly advantageous condition being the applied Ri by the advantageous application means, gaming value and is capable enjoyed are made different depending Uchikata of the player,
At the start of the variation control based on the establishment of the start condition in which the special result is won in the lottery by the lottery means, the special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player different from the specific state is given, and from the start of the variation control. and the advantageous grant means that the special result displays the results to continue the grant of or in front Symbol particularly advantageous state to determine in accordance with, to end the special result the grant of special advantageous state and the display result is determined in accordance with the, The lottery means for executing the lottery is controlled by the main control means among the main control means for controlling the progress of the game and the sub-control means for controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control means.
Game value the player is capable enjoyed by the advantageous application means by Ri the particularly advantageous state is applied to Rukoto is greater than gaming value the specific state is capable enjoyed if granted A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention , since the special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is given at the start of the fluctuation control that is won by the lottery, the player is suddenly in the special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player at the start of the fluctuation control. It is possible to give surprise and surprise, and to pay attention to the start of fluctuation control while expecting the occurrence of a special advantageous state, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a plan view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is sectional drawing of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is sectional drawing which cut at the part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. It is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame which shows the state which provided the antistatic mechanism is seen from the back. It is a rear view of the main part of the door frame which shows the state which provided the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 56. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of the ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit removed from the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front, and (D). Is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which shows by cutting the door frame substantially in the center in the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the substrate unit. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 in the vertical direction. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the security structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in a pachinko machine is opened. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the rear by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal audio signal blocking board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the abnormal audio signal cutoff board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process of this embodiment executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-off occurrence of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st variation start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st variation pattern setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the 1st variation of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving function setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variation start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd variation pattern setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the 2nd variation of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking setting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the example of the ordinary control processing of this embodiment executed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the gate passing processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol normal processing of this embodiment. This is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of this embodiment. This is an example of a timing chart for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation control of the present embodiment. This is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure about an example of the sub-main processing of this embodiment executed by a peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing which is executed every 16ms in the sub-main processing. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural view of the attacker device, (B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit, and (C) is an enlarged front view of the 7-segment display. This is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous fluctuation control structure of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st variation start processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd variation start processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hit game processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of right-handed penalty setting processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st variation start processing in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st variation in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd variation start processing in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination processing in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd variation in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the forced loss effect additional processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, and (B) is a special symbol variation when the additional loss notification effect is set in the forced loss effect additional process. This is a timing chart of the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the resumption effect change processing in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the effect example after resumption in the resumption effect change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 2nd variation in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the reset setting in the reset control pattern of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control structure in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st special symbol control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st variation pattern setting process in 3rd Embodiment. This is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second separate symbol of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 3rd Embodiment. This is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the third embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table selected in the rush preparation mode. This is an example of a timing chart showing the contents of the effect executed when the start timing of the rush mode is changed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st variation pattern setting process in 4th Embodiment. This is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second separate symbol of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state (game mode) of 4th Embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table selected in the rush mode of the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 6th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of 6th Embodiment from the back. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of the sixth embodiment disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of the sixth embodiment disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component member and the front unit in the game board of 6th Embodiment in substantially the center of the game area in the front-rear direction. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side unit of the front unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the sixth embodiment. It is a perspective view. It is a perspective view which looked at the center accessory of the table unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the center accessory of the front unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the right-hand flow path in the center accessory of 6th Embodiment in the cross section. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line FF in (a). It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of 6th Embodiment from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit of 6th Embodiment for each main structure and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board of the sixth embodiment seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like of the sixth embodiment seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back-bottom-back movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-bottom-back movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from behind. Is. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear-back movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is the back-bottom-rear movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled for each main structure and was seen afterwards. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit of the back lower back movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment, and looked at from the front together with the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from behind together with the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower second decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-and-back movable effect unit of 6th Embodiment from the front. (A) is a front view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-bottom rear-first from the normal state of the sixth embodiment. (2) is a front view of a state in which the second decorative surface of the second decorative body is turned to the front by rotating the two decorative bodies together, and (c) is the state of (b). It is a front view of a state in which the second decorative body is moved to the moving end on the left side of the front view. In (d), in the state of FIG. 224 (c), the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom are rotated together so that the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back bottom faces the front. It is a front view of the state, (e) is the state of (d), the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated to open the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom, and after the back bottom. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the first decorative body and the second decorative surface of the second decorative body after the lower back are facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper left movable production unit of 6th Embodiment and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment in a normal state, and (b) is the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left movable effect unit in the back upper left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is a front view showing a state in which the back upper left second decorative body is moved to the position of the right end of the front view, and (c) is the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second from the state of (b). It is a front view which shows the decorative body in an unfolded state. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the back. .. (A) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment in a normal state, and (b) is a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment is projected. It is a front view shown by. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the back. Is. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is the back-up and middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling each main configuration. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is the back upper middle decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment seen from the back. It is a seen perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up middle decoration unit of the sixth embodiment from the front, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). (A) is a front view of the back-up middle decoration unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a pair of back-up middle first decoration units of the back-up middle decoration unit of the sixth embodiment. Is a front view showing a state in which is half-opened outward, and (c) is a state in which a pair of back-up-middle first decorative bodies of the back-up-middle-decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment are completely opened outward. It is a front view which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from behind. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is the main back-up middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling each configuration. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is the back of the back-up middle drive unit of the sixth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper middle rotation unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up middle movable production unit of 6th Embodiment roughly from the front. (A) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in the normal state of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the back-up middle decoration unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment. It is a front view which shows in the state. (A) is a perspective view of the back-bottom front movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-bottom front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the back. Is. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front by disassembling other than the lower back front decorative body unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from behind by disassembling other than the lower back front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front decorative body unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom front decorative body unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is a front view which shows outline of the elevating mechanism in the back lower front movable production unit of 6th Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the back lower front decorative body unit of the sixth embodiment is raised, and (b) is a portion of the unit elevating pin in (a). Is an enlarged explanatory view, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). (A) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit of the sixth embodiment in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). In the back-bottom-rear movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment, the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-lower rear second decorative body are rotated together in a normal position so that the second decorative surface faces the front. It is a front view of the game board shown by. The first decorative body after the back of the back unit and the second decorative body after the back of the back unit of the sixth embodiment are closed, and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back is turned to the front. In this state, slide it to the center of the game area in the left-right direction, and move the back-up left first decorative body and the back-up left second decorative body of the back-up left movable production unit to the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which slide moves. From the state shown in FIG. 253, the rear lower rear movable production unit is hinged and opened to open the second decorative surface of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body. At the same time, rotate the hinge rotation of the back top left second decorative member of the back top left movable production unit to open it, and open the back top left first decoration body fixed decoration member and the back top left second decoration body second decoration member. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing the front. From the state shown in FIG. 253, the rear lower rear movable production unit is hinged and opened to open the second decorative surface of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower rear second decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state facing. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back left movable ornament body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit of 6th Embodiment is moved to the appearance position of the right end of the front view. In the back unit of the sixth embodiment, the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back upper middle decorative body unit is obliquely extended in the front view downward to the left. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state rotated in the clockwise direction. FIG. 5 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 257 and slid to a position in a half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 5 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to a position in a fully open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back bottom front decoration unit unit of the back bottom front movable effect unit of the back unit of the sixth embodiment is positioned at the rising end. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the front lower back first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 260 and is raised above the lower back lower front second decorative body. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control structure of the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the effect pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for the type details of the pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for the lottery process for the jackpot of the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a reach determination table used for the lottery process for the reach of the sixth embodiment. ) Is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the types of jackpots of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms steady process executed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the advance notice determination processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the variation effect start processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the variation effect end processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of 6th Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the production content of the specific notice production of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the monochrome advance notice execution processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of 7th Embodiment. This is an area occupancy pattern determination table used for determining an area occupancy pattern in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect of the seventh embodiment. This is an example showing an area in which the advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect of the seventh embodiment. This is an example of the effect when the monochrome advance notice effect of the seventh embodiment is executed. This is an example of the effect when the monochrome advance notice effect of the seventh embodiment is executed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, the main body frame, and the game board constituting the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A player has a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven into the main body frame 3, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, respectively, in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail, various winning openings, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 are used to connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch portion 15 is provided which penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A projecting portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 112). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending in the vertical direction, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be used, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. A decorative cover 23 and a decorative cover 23 are provided. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the lock member 27 can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, so that the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portion 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the lock device 1000, which is attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The leading space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the leading space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to form the stopper portion 27a. A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment for rotating the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the projecting piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 67) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, by pushing the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, FIG. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of (aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left and right direction. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 14, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 10, each Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, for example) It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It includes a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both the lower left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. It includes a bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 or the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when attaching or detaching the side speaker 130. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is such that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194 and door frame base 194, which are arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192, etc. The door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the board 194, and the wiring 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. 28). A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the above) is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (shaft support) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of (side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 are used. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and the ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116 which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the rear. From the arrangement of the board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 projecting rearward to mount the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101, and the glass unit 590. A glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can be brought into contact with the glass unit, and two locking members for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190 projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. The unit 110b and the like are further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c that protrudes rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, in the door frame base main body 110, a mounting boss portion 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 338 (see FIG. 18 and the like) are appropriately positioned. It is formed in each.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g and the foul cover unit 540 in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300, which will be described later, are located. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the upper side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole is made from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 by a thin drill or the like, which is made of metal. It can be prevented by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at the position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction from the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment boss portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is formed on the rear surface on the rear side in the vertical direction. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the step portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 can be moved. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined binding band in the holding holes 197a paired up and down with the wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring 196 can be held by inserting the 198 and tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. Will be pushed forward and rotate in the direction of approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is a free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so that the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. A part of the wiring 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction while being rotatably supported on the rear surface. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring 196, disconnection of connection connector, etc.) from occurring.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts through the wiring 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring holding member 197 moves up and down. It is possible to prevent the wiring from blurring in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be reliably folded in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a defect.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes a state in which a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as wiring and the door frame 5 from being unable to be closed, and the main control board 4100, peripheral control unit 4140, payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side. There is a problem with the wiring 196 that connects each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as electrical equipment. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, it is a conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-23675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, as described above, the wiring 196 is provided by the wiring holding member 197. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from hanging when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft. The door frame 5 and the door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent activities can be used.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least toward the side along which the wiring 196 is aligned, wiring is performed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. The wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197 by surrounding the wiring 196 on three sides. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Therefore, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to substantially the same length as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since a pantograph-shaped link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, and the opening / closing work can be facilitated. At the same time, the application of an unreasonable force to the wiring 196, etc. is reduced, and problems such as disconnection occur. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compactly organized, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 on which the wiring holding member 197 is pivotally supported is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring holding member 197 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compactly organized, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held with respect to the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, which is described above. It is possible to surely produce the desired action and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size, and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the attention of the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The 143 and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 are provided. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 by a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the diagonally inclined handle mounting portion 114, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is mounted so as to extend toward the right side (open side) as it faces forward in the front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted at an angle.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction is provided at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open side outer bent projecting pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open-side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open-side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open-side outerly bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. See 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 112), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the shape of the ends. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer circumference of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the security rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is the front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

As a result, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between the doors, the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering and cheating. It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety against the above.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, the shaft is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29 (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed later.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210. On the rear side of the side inner lens 212, the decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which is arranged from approximately the center to the upper side in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and the side inner on the lower side. The rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and the right side upper decorative substrate 214 which are arranged from substantially the center to the lower side of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and have a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the side so as to cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a lens 210 and a decorative substrate cover 220 on the lower right side that is attached to the side outer cover 202.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged with a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, in front of the side lens 210 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and is an abbreviation for the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. It includes an inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to 212, and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the upper side inner lens 206.

In the right side decorative unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. The 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer circumference on the right side of the door. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a that are divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 210b made of the prism surface of the above. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend above the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and are formed from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed in a state of being recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

Further, the side lens 210 is provided with a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusion lens portion 210c can widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted inside the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 can diffusely refract and reflect light by the wrinkled portion and a plurality of small diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, it is possible to make the perspective look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. As the LEDs 214a and 216a, those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A lens having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is a red and green LED in this example.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion extending diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and is provided on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the upper side inner lens 206, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Similar to the side inner lens 212, the front side of the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed in a wrinkled shape, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses allow light to be diffusely refracted and diffusely reflected.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can produce a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decorative unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emitting mode of the left side decorative unit with a photograph.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the right side is the game window 101. Along with the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrically formed with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and the large window frames 242a having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a which are continuously arranged on the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and a large window frame 244a. It includes a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side with respect to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250. An inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and having a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. It is provided with a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It includes a left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is a transparent transparent unit 240 that supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view and the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. It is provided with an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the upper left side decorative substrate cover 258, and the lower left side decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the inner The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, the small windows on both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed so as to penetrate to the side surfaces of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through the 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is diffusely refracted by the diffuser portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. are not clearly visible from the player side.

Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. The decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example has a form extending in the vertical direction along the left outer circumference of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is made of synthetic resin. It is formed.

In the side lower decorative frame 242, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

Further, the side upper decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in front view, which is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the side open. The decorative frame 244 on the side has two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame arranged between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with 244b and an opening frame 244c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

In the side upper decorative frame 244, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. The 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the decorative frame 244 on the side can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and visible.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side of the center on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 and the peripheral lens portion 250a are recessed to the rear side. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 250b formed on the front side and a side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radial lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer circumference of the game window 101 and concentrically centered on the center of the game window 101 in the width direction thereof. Multiple are provided. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner band-shaped lens is arranged in the extending direction on the front side. It intersects (substantially orthogonally) with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a of the decorative member 251.

In the side inner lens 252, the diffuser portion 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, the light is diffusely refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffuser portion 252a, so that the light is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the large side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are mounted. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used on the side. The LEDs 254b, arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. As 256b, a lens having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in the front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous or breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 and inserting an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player, and is less likely to be noisy than other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the surface of the side lens 250 having a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and is curved, and is arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metal gloss plating layer and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged behind the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a composed of a plurality of strip-shaped lenses, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 irradiates the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be light-emittingly decorated.

By the way, the light radiated to the front (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is radiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a toward the inner decorative member 251 is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At (front), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side) converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused. The indirect light reflected from the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected in a striped manner with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the direction (approximately orthogonal). Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 extends in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a, which is longer than the width of the slit 251a, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminescent decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extending frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c that extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a plate-shaped diffuser lens 285 arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. , An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is arranged on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and has substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light-shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the tubular portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged behind the light-shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a. It is provided with an upper central decorative substrate 288 in which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the front are mounted on the front surface.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of upper decorative units 280 arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and on the front surface. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a of the above is mounted, the board cover 291 which covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and the board cover 291 which is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. The lower side of the mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large amount of translucency and are predetermined. It is provided with a top and bottom decorative cover 294 that is shaped into a shape.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a whose rear end side is open in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 and shaped into a predetermined shape. ..

In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 shines with light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing into the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c facing the frame of the lower extension frame 281c are provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and the axial core of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, light can be diffusely refracted by the plurality of prisms and band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 is formed in a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed, and light can be diffusely refracted, so that the rear side is clear. It is invisible to the lens.

Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper center lens 284 can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, in the upper side decorative substrate 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c in the front decoration member 281. It is arranged at the position corresponding to each of the frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can illuminate the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a.

[Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example is a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit base 310. The front end of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are both front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and covers the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the center on the left and right to the right side, and is attached to the plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface and the lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. It is provided with an upper plate decorative substrate 322 on which a plurality of LEDs 322a are mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312 to open the upper side and the rear side, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower plate body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate body 324 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, are located on a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends to the right in front view. The lower plate cover 328 having the lock hole 328a facing the lower plate cover 328, and the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position on the left and right center left side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328. It includes a lower plate side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending diagonally to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. The lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, and the protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate from the rear side to allow sound to pass through, and protection. It is provided with a frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are designed. Side speaker cover 338 and side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a that is formed in a shape that is continuous with the side speaker and has an opening 338a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100. A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disk shape that is gently curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge toward the front side is provided.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It can be protected as much as possible. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface thereof. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It includes a ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is prepared. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), and has a horizontally long rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and projecting forward and having the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size capable of passing a game ball.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference of is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to linearly exit the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls. The direction changes, and the guide is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right when viewed from the front, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply trough 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch portion 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is used in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 313 is electrically grounded so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting the operation unit 400, which will be described later, is formed in a stepped shape at the center in the left-right direction in front of the upper plate main body 312 and further lowered from the decorative mounting portion 314b. There is.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by the plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be diffusely refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, in the assembled state of the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318, the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, whereas the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is uncertain.

The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape, similar to the portion on the right side of the front decorative member 316 of the upper plate. It is formed in an integral shape with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), so that light can be diffusely refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. There is. The upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to spread forward in a fan shape in a plan view, a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction, and a substantially center of the upper surface to be the lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored and metallic plating layer (a matte state as if sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 includes a plate-shaped portion that forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 that extends rearward from the lower end. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and are formed in the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the upper left side cover 332 of the lower plate is provided with a plating layer which is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. Further, the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and is one of the bottom surfaces of the plate unit 300 extending rearward from the lower end. It has a plate-shaped part that forms a part. The opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the lower speaker 821 (speaker for bass) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the player can hear the sound from the lower speaker 821. It is designed to be transparent to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in the metal plate to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted inside. ..

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 except for the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left side cover of the lower plate are closed. The bottom surface between the 334 and the lower plate is closed by the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, which will be described later.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is designed for the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 are operably supported and the plate unit base 310. A contact piece that slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided with 343a and arranged behind the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 are slidably supported in the vertical direction and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310. It is provided with a punching base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a and the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper plate ball removal base 344 downward and then guides the game ball backward. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c in which the game ball can roll.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guidance flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball removing flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball removing port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are sent from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guidance flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball extraction port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 or the like can absorb the impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is arranged between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324, and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 that is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the ball removing base 351 and the lower plate ball removing base 351 and can open / close the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal slide 353 that is moved and supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removal button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slide 353. ing.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball extraction base 351 are urged by a coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with an abutting pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removing slide 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removing slide 353. The lower plate ball removal slide 353 rotates the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b so as to move rearward, and the urging force of the coil spring 356 slides the lower plate ball removal slide 353 forward. You can do it.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. In order to hold the lower plate ball removing slide 353 in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slide 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. There is a state in which the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slide 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slide 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. Matching with 324b, the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball removal slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower plate ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removal slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slide 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the drawing hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removing button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball punching hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of the cash you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount and the prepaid card will be returned. There is. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a transparent ball rental unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the rental balance display unit 363 and a rental balance display unit 363 that is arranged behind the ball rental unit front cover 365. The ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch that is operated by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. It includes a rear cover 367 that is attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m on which the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 face and the button openings 310m. It is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and a protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward, and is transparent to close the display opening 310n. The rental balance display unit 363 arranged on the rear side through the front cover 365 of the ball rental unit can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and is in front of the plate unit 360. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, in the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (on the player side) from the outer circumference of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his / her hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, and the ball lending button can be noticed. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be reminiscent of the machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), it is possible to reduce the anxiety given to the player and make it an easy-to-select pachinko machine 1 It has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that the player can press. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation according to the game state and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, so that the player can not only drive the game ball but also operate the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit that is connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416, and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. The base is mounted so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface while being arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed into a predetermined shape. It includes an inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427. The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass through, and the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A dial decorative substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the annulus of the above, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. It includes a 432b, a pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by the substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and an inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in a ring shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the dial operation unit 401 is locked by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is further provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface abuts on the lower surface of the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection piece 410c and the rotation detection piece 410c are of each other. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotationally drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in small steps by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410 and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d that penetrates the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction and allows the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 to pass through, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. The opening 416e desired from above by the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks the button body 406. It is further provided with a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower concave portion 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in the vertical direction, and the operating portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a of the above can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and which is recessed downward so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. It has. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the lower side. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions on the outside of the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to and dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper part The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference in one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (front side in the pachinko machine 1), and the lower end protrudes outward in a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, the locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from below with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer circumference of the upper cover 422. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420e. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper ends of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b are provided with the engaging portions 424b. By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass through in the vertical direction in the center, and an operation unit mounting of the dish unit 300 extending outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. It includes a fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer circumference of the opening 426a.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so as to be slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is mounted. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the cover body is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the operation unit 400 is attached. The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating the rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operating unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. it can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit is also hit. The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward from the positions supporting the operation units 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 receives an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged directly under the impact, so that the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The portion supporting the above is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) so that the impact from the operating units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 deviates from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the production by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly engaged with the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a, the dial operation unit 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can come into contact with the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent the depression from being lower than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the above.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 can be frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 can be rotationally driven. Even if the amount of heat generated increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven by the motor 414. The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive motor 414 can be operated. With the pachinko machine 1 that can withstand a high load, can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive motor 414 as described above, and entertain the player. can do.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the above, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. Is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 repeatedly rotates forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate the dial operation unit 401, thereby vibrating the dial operation unit 401 via the step portion 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling to the pressing operation unit 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's attention to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axial center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. The roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and the guide to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The characters "PUSH" are not rotated or tilted significantly, and can be easily read from the player side, so that the player can be surely recognized that the pressing operation unit 405 is to perform the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be improved through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate and the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 in the operating unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which of the dial operating unit 401 is in the circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer circumference from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 come into contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, there is a case where the contact portion is not inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially dispersed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance of the operation unit 400. It is possible to surely improve the load resistance and impact resistance, and also to improve the durability of the operation unit 400, which reduces the occurrence of defects during the game as much as possible and reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment passes through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. On the front of the handle base 502, which is fixed and cylindrical and whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the handle body 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle body 504. It is provided with a front end cover 506 that is arranged and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end of the handle device 500 are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with the 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. It is provided with a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is viewed clockwise from the front view via the transmission gear 511. With respect to the auxiliary spring 514 for urging, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the launch stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate the launch stop switch 518, one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is placed in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). It is provided with a handle return spring 522 for urging the wheel to return to the rotating end in the direction of (1).

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a form having a rear end portion that is cylindrically extended rearward from a front end portion that is open on the front side and bulges rearward. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape of the above. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. When locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 on one end side.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) to form a door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 reaches the right side area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side area is reached. Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes smaller than the predetermined value, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 flows down the left side area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. In this way, it is possible to hit the game ball into the right side area and the left side area by the operation of the player. The ball velocity of the game ball flowing down the right region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is relatively faster than the ball velocity of the game ball flowing down the left region on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A game ball that flows down the right side region at a relatively high ball speed can win a prize at the second starting port 2102, which will be described later, and a game ball that flows down the left side region at a relatively slow ball speed will be described later. It is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 2101.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 506 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is driven. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotary drive can be stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before the single-shot button 520 is operated. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are doord like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the links are released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the gaming ball.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 (launching solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 game balls are sequentially launched at regular intervals per minute. It is driven so that the launch speed (pace) is reached. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), the game balls are driven into the game area 1100 one after another at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[Fal cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball entrance 542a, which is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the first ball entrance 542a. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542, and the second ball entrance that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. It is provided with a second ball passage 542d that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the second ball entrance 542c. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d by communicating with the foul ball entrance 542e arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opening upward and the foul ball entrance 542e. It is provided with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operating piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball entrance 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544a to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball entrance 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. If the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it can be received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and can be swung by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side when viewed from the front. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And can remove static electricity generated by the rolling resistance caused by the rolling of the game ball.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, at the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball rolls to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770. It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. A person is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Anti-static measures for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and 53) has a second ball passage 542d and a game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. The accommodation space 546 is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the aisle wall surface. Therefore, static electricity is generated by rubbing the game ball and the resin, and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal earth rail 554 for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by the rolling resistance due to the rolling of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate is provided. There is. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped ground fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground fitting 556 at the left end can be conductive to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and 53). The ground fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the earth rail 554 as described above, but the electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and it may reach 10 kV. There is (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain due to the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only in the immediate vicinity even if it is grounded, and most of it remains. Then, due to electrostatic induction by this electric charge, there is a risk that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity thereof may malfunction.

In the game machine, a ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to, for example, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and even if the ground is not taken, electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. The present invention relates to an invention relating to an antistatic mechanism that shields a door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and further prevents static electricity released to the metal plate for shielding from jumping to surrounding conductors. Is.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism when viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of a main part of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. Further, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a thin metal (brilliant) plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so that the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction. It is composed of a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and which insulates the charge transferred to the shield plate 562 so as not to transfer to the surrounding conductor. It is configured to include an insulating sheet 570.

The shield plate 562 has a flat conductive portion 563 that is conductively contacted by abutting the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 on the upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent in the left-right direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 located below and behind the conductive portion 563 and arranged over substantially the entire back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And have.

A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Has been drilled.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from the surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by sticking.

In FIGS. 55 to 57, as described above, the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the antistatic mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire back surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562 in the radial direction. Then, the conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5, so that the conductive contact is made to release static electricity.

The mounting boss portions 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are projected at appropriate positions on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base main body 110). Further, at appropriate locations on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the ground fitting 556 to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 so as to release static electricity. 154c is provided (see FIG. 56).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110 g into the insertion hole 566, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion hole 154a of the mounting hole 567 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 is arranged with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. Further, a screw is inserted into the mounting portion of the ground metal fitting 556, and a screw is inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. By screwing the screw, static electricity is applied to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so that it can escape.

The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached by being fastened together with the attachment boss portion 110 g by screws. Further, the ground wire (not shown) is fastened together with the ground metal fitting 556 by screws to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154.

[Action of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so that electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

Further, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge transferred to the shield plate 562 is transferred from the corners and end faces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. FIG. 58 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 60 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 61A is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, FIG. 61B is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 61C is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover, which are box-shaped and have a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launching device 650. A ball pulling member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that separates the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 and the ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in the front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. Have been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b in front view. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning between the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting from the partition portion 583a to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. It comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583. It includes a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in the above.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction, and the ball feed member The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives the ball feed member 584. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 583d rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating paddle 583c of the ball pulling member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, so that the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be moved. The partition portion 583a can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right when the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is viewed from the rear. At the same time, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the entire outer diameter in the rear view, and is on the opposite side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending by a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) of the above. A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 (rearward) so as to move away from each other. It includes a character-shaped cutting portion 588d, and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 has a cut portion 588d by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed like this.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become like. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the figure, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. The portion corresponding to the portion where the ball is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, is formed in a form of communicating with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is supplied to the game board 4 by the hitting ball launching device 650. When the ball is driven into the 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launcher 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempts to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement locus of the illegal game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting with the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction (upper right direction in the rear view). Then, in order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back view of the ball supply port 582a, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the back view of the ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left when viewed from the front) at the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. In this state, friction and shearing force act on the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire rod Iw (see FIG. 61 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw is attenuated due to friction acting on the wire rod Iw or the like, it is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without invading the game area 1100. It will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent game ball I with the wire rod Iw in the game area 1100. It is designed to prevent it from being damaged. Even if the fraudulent game ball I invades the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588 as described above, so that the fraudulent act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the invasion of the inside, it is possible to prevent cheating.

As described above, according to this example, after storing the game balls in the upper plate 301 and supplying the game balls to the ball feed unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is operated. The game will be performed in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized via the door frame base unit 100, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 and ball feed solenoid 585) is placed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 equipped with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball launching device 650 are possible. The number of game balls remaining on the ball feed member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball pulling member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the upper plate 301 from becoming full with the game balls at an early stage by the operation. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player and suppress the decrease in interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game can be relatively played. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball feeding member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are separately compared with the ball feeding member 583. The 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and problems occur in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the one in which the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is consumed early and malfunctions or is damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be ejected from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game ball from the plate, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition portion 583a also moves in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member). The durability of 583) can be increased. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to repel even if it collides with the partition portion 583a, and the repellent of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are communicated with each other, and the gaming medium in the storage dish is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being done, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is interesting to move it to the pachinko machine 1 without the problem. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating paddle portion 583b in the ball pulling member 583, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent by the rotating paddle portion. By dispersing by 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating paddle portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball pulling member 583 can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 are discharged when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged. The movement in the direction can be minimized, the passage of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 is improved, and the game ball can be discharged satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cut portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. By pulling the wire rod Iw quickly (strongly) with respect to the above, the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent the wire rod Iw from entering the game area 1100. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by the fraudulent game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 provided with the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The rear-bent upper piece 588b can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 injures the operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent rearward across the dividing wire 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. As a result, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost related to the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. It can be suppressed from increasing.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It includes a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a arranged in the upper parts on both the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Modeling decoration on the door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. On the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to.

The appearance of the door frame 5 on both sides of the game window 101 is significantly different, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side is a metallic sharp and artificial appearance due to the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 has a different amount of protrusion forward between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front When viewed from the side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which can give a different impression depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become like. That is, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like a different model of pachinko machine. It is possible to increase the appealing power to the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical to the left and right, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island equipment feels flat and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, etc., so that the game window 101 emits light. It is possible to illuminate and decorate with any luminescent color so as to surround the door. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 can be turned on and off to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately causing each LED to emit light, the game window 101 It is possible to decorate the outer circumference of the window with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer circumference of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the above is formed by one smooth and loosely curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is said to be an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214,216,254,256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from each of the emitting LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. to the player side by the substrate, the side lens 210, 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper center lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper center lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. It is provided with four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side of the front view is covered with the upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. Includes an extension frame lens portion 282c and an upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged behind the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decorative substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, which is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In this plate unit 300, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged behind the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery of the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be light-emittingly decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 63 and 64), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103, the game window 101 is substantially concentric so as to surround the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decoration. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 63 and 64) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring-shaped by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The luminescent decoration can be luminescent so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is designated as a notification group 105, and by appropriately emitting light of the LED 214c, a game is played. Various information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is said that the upper center group 106 is used to illuminate and decorate the upper center of the lens. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration that becomes a point. Further, the LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits light and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged under the game window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light and decorate. It is said to be dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the plate unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 press the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation group 109 for luminescent decoration. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be played. It is possible to inform people.

The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a provided in the door frame 5 will be described in more detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204, 246 (radiant lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front-rear and left-right directions. Further, in the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 in between, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b are arranged as a set. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c to which the 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, it is tripled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs having high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As a light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward centering on the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light with the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided on the game board 4 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first ring group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 The LED of the second ring group 103 located on the outside makes it possible to produce a more expressive light emission, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and entertain the player. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light of each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light moves toward the central lens 284, or the light moves along the outer circumference of the game window 101 from the upper central lens 284. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer circumference of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is produced, or the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, the radial group 104 emits light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

Further, by emitting light of the upper center group 106 and the upper center side group 105, a chance has arrived for the player and a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probability change game state, a time saving game state, a probability change time reduction game state). , Etc.) can be suggested.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating and decorating the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation can be performed. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce a rich light emission.

[Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. , The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650, which is attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 to drive the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the prize ball unit 700 for the purpose and the door frame 5 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 are opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is equipped with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be achieved. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward from the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602) to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is attached with metal fittings for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 102, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, and to the left. A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 on the upper side of the opening 614. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axial center that is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the fixing piece 690a. It includes an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is axially supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in the front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction on the inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are lined up in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. The main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is provided so that the game ball can be rolled by hanging from the middle of the vertical direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and although details will be described later, a game ball that has rolled the ball pulling passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Is supposed to roll.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It includes a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) that regulates the edges. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b, and a door frame shaft support hole 634 into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view of the 642b and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state where the front extension portion 644b is separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The door is positioned coaxially with the metal fitting 642c, and the door is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Slide the door frame downward once so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap each other, and then slide the shaft pin 155 upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Striking ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball striking device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. Hammer tip of ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a paddle portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the paddle portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 102, when the ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the rail 1111 and the lower end. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 to hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball-striking launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball-feeding solenoid 585 of the ball-feeding unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a rolling passage of the ball in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. The pachinko machine 1 is paid out to the upper plate 301 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island equipment side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It mainly includes a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so as to be along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. And is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to pass through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b in the front-rear direction, and the back surface. It is provided with a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721 and the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only on the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. The eaves 724 extending to the eaves, the rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in a plan view, and the prize balls formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both ends of the front side of the outer peripheral wall 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 on the prize ball base 710 is provided.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, so that the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. In a plan view, the right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 78), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that is capable of advancing and retreating into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap between the ball holding plate 734 and the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer circumference, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. When the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734b into the tank rail 731. By inserting it into, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. The 741a, the distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are connected to each other and bent in a substantially square shape for rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support that is arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side of the 747 so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of detection slits 749a (three in this example) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. It has.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage capable of contacting the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 with the ground fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743 sandwiched between them, and the screw 758 for connecting the payout motor 744 to the ground and the back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. It is provided with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the rearwardly bulging position in the supply passage 741a, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. The switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, the sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the sensor mounting portion 741f below the prize ball passage 741c so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the ball-out switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball out switch 750 (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. A ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and a button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 for supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply passage ground fitting 757. You can do it.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and has a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed one by one in the recess 748a and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is rotated. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 on the front side, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. Together with the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 747 are fixed. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770 described later, the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear side and the outside through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79, and 83. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the plate unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a which is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has rolled the normal passage 773 is released forward and at the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view, and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball from a position far to the right side of the rear view from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side (FIG. 83). (See), and a full-tank ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has rolled in the full-tank passage 775 forward and opens to the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end of the front end of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball received by the extraction port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has rolled the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball exit 774 at the left end of the front view. And a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position rearward from the full tank outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is designed to communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is connected to the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. The game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in a normal state. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and enters the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot come out from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 could not enter the normal passage 773, and started to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moved laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775 and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 776 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the plate 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the game ball to be paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by the 650, and the stored amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be made to play a game. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide game area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (first). Even if there is only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole for changing the door frame 5 can be dealt with. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage plate. Even if it is exchanged for, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates. ..

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to concentrate the player on the driving operation of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls by deepening the storage plate, so that the player does not have to worry about the storage amount frequently. And it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 equipped with a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with a game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. If the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, even if the storage plate is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. Since the position where the full passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full passage 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased to the limit, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to roll the game balls in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls staying (stored) in the full tank branch unit 770. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the actual storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At that time, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be resolved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The opening / closing shutter 792 is held so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 are raised via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the opening / closing shutter 792 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembling the substrate unit. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 91 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 93 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 mounted on the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 870 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main relay terminal board 880 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It is provided with a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a form that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in the front-view direction. A plurality of vertically long slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). ) The upper rear surface is provided with a box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. As a result, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deeper bass with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above into a storage recess formed by the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 67).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is the heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not installed on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is easy. By doing so, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 extremely easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as a game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared with the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, since the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the gaming board holding port 601 that holds the gaming board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristics can be changed. Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to make it difficult to commit fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831, and by making it difficult to commit fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to prevent a player who is frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraudulent operation is performed. It can be eliminated, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person in the game.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. , When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the firing power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the driving characteristics, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be replaced with a new game. It can be considered to match the board 4. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for the island equipment such as the game hall when replacing the launch power supply board 831. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for replacement, and it is possible to replace in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) is removable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the circuit board, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the hall side and the like.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced. It is possible to eliminate the problem, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from diminishing.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding port 601 in order to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is intruded through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the substrate box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply substrate box 830 and exerts the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 tends to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, the problem can be solved early, and the game is interrupted. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 and the discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 which is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

In this power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed, and after the substrate unit base 810 is rolled through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 by rolling the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down to the side and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 91, the power supply board box 850 has a vertical wall portion 850b slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal with the extended wiring cord is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force that pushes the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided on both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b to the wiring cord 854. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the front-rear direction dimensions in the assembled state are substantially the same as the front-rear direction dimensions of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810. When attached to, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially identical to each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such as disconnecting from the 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. It is easy to remove the connector and maintenance such as replacement of the board can be easily performed.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, etc., which cause problems from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted. Electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and the defense against fraudulent activities can be enhanced. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853 from being subjected to a shearing force, and the lead portion can be prevented from acting. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and to cause a power failure due to breakage, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned action and effect are exhibited, and after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplify the work process related to assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it is not possible to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 without cutting the separation cutting portion 863, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. On the board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a and a CR unit connection terminal 874a which faces rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a substrate box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to the frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island equipment side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. The terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal board 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. You can do it.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the rear in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and can be inserted into the substrate cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the substrate base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a to the front (board base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d are in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It includes a pair of hook-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked into the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. It is provided with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of board holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be held detachably. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is formed by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island equipment side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the substrate box cover 875 of the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the substrate base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871 g, a through-hole 875b that corresponds to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b that is forward from both left and right ends. It includes an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective contact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 92, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the above, and the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c exist respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 is a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the substrate box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. An impact wall 875c having a length straddling between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to cheat and deters. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrodes, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are arranged from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridges 871e, the outer piece, and 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. For example, even if you try to invade an illegal tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal plate Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are reliably prevented. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of capable.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through-hole 875b corresponding to the above to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported by the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection terminal board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the cover from being distorted and to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to cheat and making it highly deterrent.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, it can be dealt with. Since the rear side of the opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode into the gap of the connector body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and it has high security capability. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent acts, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It can be kept protected by, and it is not possible to cheat on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like itself replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activities, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activities. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are the door frame together with the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 67, the front side of the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is covered with the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 94 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923a in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 and the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side to form a main body 902. The fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and the guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and is supported along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 projects the fastening member 924 to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, so that the back cover 900 is not screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b and the fastening member 924 is rotated, so that the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve maintainability.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the front view of the connection notch 910. A 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in the front view are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and is passed through the connection notch 910 to the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. are designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the back cover 900 is used for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, and the like of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at positions slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the front, which are wide and elongated in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 are the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second in the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252, and the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like is satisfactorily generated. It can be exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4 while the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3 because the game board 4 is held so as to be playable. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from the fastening in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is tilted with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a is surely in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 against the guide member 923 so as to be playable is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented from coming off. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, a storage recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that other members come into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, and the occurrence of defects is reduced. You can do it and make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-bonded to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 3, even if the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is rotatably supported. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side security board]
Next, the side surface security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. As shown in the figure, the side surface security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front view right from the front end of the side piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the side piece 952a from the rear end to the front. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right-viewing direction (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side of the front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for cheating from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. (See FIG. 112). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a, and the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, assuming that the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the shaft support side U shape. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the shape projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 in contact with the door frame 5, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped open. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame are increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, and the side security plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (shaft support side) is made of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost related to the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by three door frame hooks 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from widening even if the door frame 5 is scooped out by a simple tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly scooped out.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the flexural rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the side security plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating. ..

Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extrusion mold material, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and at the same time, defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are caused as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The number can be reduced as much as possible, and the side security plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 97 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. , FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. 72. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 that are attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the size of the lock device 1000 in the left-right direction can be made as thin as possible, and the size of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be made relatively large in the left-right direction. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped base 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult for fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. It is provided with a locking projection 1004 and the like.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screw fixing portion 1003 is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the screw device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008, which will be described later, and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with a screw while being inserted into the 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed in close contact with the main body frame 3.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame housed, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 98. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is adapted to advance and retreat. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally use a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 99, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by the lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 101 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored, respectively, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be rotatably connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to the hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending operation of the rivet 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide projecting piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 comes into contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 behind the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and contact portions 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivets, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated in the lower hook member 1052, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. For the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame while passing the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in a superposed state. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 100 (A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 100 (B). The tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 100A), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up and ascends the door frame sliding rod 1040 against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a lowered state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 100A), but the door frame. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 101. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engaging notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise rotation direction shown around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 101 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 101 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. , A piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside, and other fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. It is extremely simple because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed together. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole that penetrates the piece 1008 and is screwed may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a peripheral wall portion 605. It may have a structure for storing, and can exhibit the same function and effect as the lock device 1000 described above.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall of the prize ball base 710. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the 710b and the game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is abbreviated as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged on the same surface, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. With the pachinko machine 1 that can visually recognize the rear side surface and can easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be visually recognized. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the front side to 601 even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they should be removed from the outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. It is possible to facilitate the mounting work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or in contact with other members in the island equipment to be installed. It can be prevented to prevent a problem from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, it is possible to use a cushioning material having a simple shape when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) of the pachinko machine. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side and the like of No. 4 can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent the heat from being accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the control of the game from becoming unstable due to the heat and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin from causing problems. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, the slit 916 or the like is passed through. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball.

[Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. 102 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is a game in which FIG. 107 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a game board viewed from the rear of FIG. 110. It is an exploded perspective view of.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game ball is driven is divided by the player operating the handle device 500, and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front surface. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses the main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is provided with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 is further described with a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 102 to 109 will be omitted and details will be described later. (See FIGS. 113, 116, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Previous component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates in the clockwise direction of the front view and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. A backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown), is provided.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 102 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on the extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 and the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000, which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. When it falls, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. At the same time, the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side when viewed from the front), the illegal tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The rear projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite side of the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even with the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the security rear projection piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in the same direction, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and an arc-shaped upper side formed in an arc shape, A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, in the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110, with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is viewed from the front. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 formed thinly, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed in the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping them around each other and fastening them together, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The notch 1152 for the ball passage having the same shape as the notch 1122 for the ball passage of the front component 1110 and the rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed in the vicinity of the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side being opened downward (see FIG. 105). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is notched so as to penetrate from the right end of the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is divided by the front component 1110, and is within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the table unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharge unit 1161. The out-ball ejection unit 1161 is located directly above the ejection ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends at both the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are mounted so that the tips thereof are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520 and then fitted with the rear ends of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion 1163 in which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. A matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1172 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end portion of the substrate base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and from the fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160 and the right end of the rear view of the substrate cover 1172. It includes an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end of the rear view, two at the top and two at the bottom with the elastic fixing piece 1175 sandwiched between them, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealing seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a sealing seal affixed across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. , Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly worked, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high security performance. You can do it.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and the display unit 1181 and the front constituent member 1110 which are arranged so as to be visible from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106 (A), the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end of the front view. The game status indicator 1183, which consists of one LED, and the game status indicator 1183, which consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side, displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. The first special symbol memory display 1184 for the purpose and the lottery result of the first special symbol placed on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (first) The first special symbol display 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the first special symbol display 1185 arranged diagonally to the right and to the second starting port 2102. The second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball of the game ball as the second special symbol, and the first (Ii) It consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the special symbol display 1186, and is equipped with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102. ing.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations related to the passage of the normal drawing gate 2301 by the game ball. The normal symbol 1188, which consists of four LEDs for displaying, and the normal symbol lottery result, which is arranged under the normal symbol storage display and the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 2301, is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189, which consists of one LED for displaying as, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit (condition device). It is equipped with a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2103 at the time of "operation)".

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the emission color of the emission and the lighting / blinking of the emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability change time reduction game state, jackpot game state, etc.) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, at least the probability fluctuation state, the time reduction state, and the right-handed game state can be displayed. In particular, in the present embodiment, a game state in which a player is advantageous if a game ball is launched into the game area 1100 on the left side of the center character 2500 (so-called “left-handed”) and a game on the right side of the center character 2500. If a game ball is launched into the area 1100 (so-called "right-handed"), a gaming state that is advantageous for the player is mixed, so that the player is clearly notified of the timing of "right-handed". As a result, even a beginner in the game can smoothly switch the hitting method (driving operation) as the game state shifts without making a mistake between "left-handed" and "right-handed".

The game status display 1183 is not limited to one composed of one color LED, but may be composed of a plurality of LED groups or seven-segment LEDs. When the player shifts his / her line of sight to the game state display 1183 during the game, the current game state, particularly the game state in which right-handed hitting is sufficient, may be easily grasped.

Further, the function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and this control signal is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later to be transmitted to the player in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is preferable to notify "right-handed". Normally, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in the front view (beyond the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 notifies "right-handed", the line of sight is set to the left end of the front view. The player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (driving operation) without moving.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned off. When the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both lit. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first is based on the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The result of the special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color to emit light and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 2301. As with the special symbol, the display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the result of the ordinary lottery after the display is varied for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 starts the variable display when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of held (stored) ordinary symbols held (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By turning on ~ 1188d in sequence, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and by lighting these indicator lamps, the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed. It has become like.

As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the function display board (not shown). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured to consist of eight LED groups. Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit 1180, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting itself to movable production and production images.

[Second Embodiment of Game Panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. It is formed. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engaging step portion 1213 is formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214, the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150, etc. are provided from the front side with respect to the openings 1215. The unit to be held is inserted and fixed.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the above-mentioned wooden board (in this example, about about the same thickness). It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a thickness of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged in the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (the amount of the depression). The depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of the (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as shown in the figure, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c on the front surface of the back box 3010 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the lightening portion 1230 reduces the weight of the panel holder 1220. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, in the predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to the predetermined height, and are within the predetermined range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650. However, it is guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, there is an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a lower end that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the front view and downwards. A ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. , The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply exchanging only the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[Second Embodiment of Pre-Component]
Next, the front component 1110A having a form different from that of the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. In the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. 107 to 109. The configuration is the same as that of the examples of FIGS. 107 to 109 except that the above is different from the above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above front component 1110 in a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the pre-component 1110, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). It is prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending clockwise from the out port guide surface 1115 to the abutting portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed to be the same as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the abutting portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arc shape is formed from the abutting portion 1114 to directly above the certificate stamp affixing portion 1125 on the right side arranged directly under the abutting portion 1114, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line inclined so as to be lowered toward the out port guide surface 1115.

In the front component 1110A of this example, the game area 1100 can be secured wider than the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. You can do it.

[Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is housed.

First, as shown in FIG. 112, the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side (left side in front view). It is composed of a metal side security plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side surface piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending substantially perpendicular to the inside (open side) from the front end of the side surface piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of gap between the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side surface piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch portion 156 and the lower shaft branch portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is used as the shaft support. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame are increased, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a on the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be inserted into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side frame plate 12 so as to cover the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island equipment for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the middle piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. In addition, since it is possible to easily find an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device, and it is possible to enhance the deterrent against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance or model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. 114 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the special winning opening of the game board is opened. Further, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each of the main members constituting the game board (however, the center accessory 2500 is not shown) from diagonally rearward. It is a seen perspective view.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated by a player operating the handle device 500. It includes a frame-shaped front component 1110A for partitioning the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven in, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

The game panel 1200 of this example is a transparent panel plate 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110A and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component 1110A. A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A is provided. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. The function display unit 1180 is arranged so that it can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1. A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) that is visibly attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. As described above, the board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in the game area 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle of the game area 1100. A center accessory 2500 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center accessory 2500.

Further, behind the center accessory 2500, there is provided an effect display device 1900 that displays an effect with a large area in front view so as to attract the attention of the player. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by synthesizing decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

Further, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a display area smaller than that of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information obtained by synthesizing decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

On the other hand, from the right side region to the lower region of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, the normal drawing gate 2301, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker device 2100, the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and the second A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided in the left side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Further, in the lower region of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, a constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 is provided.

Here, the first starting port 2101 is a constant winning opening 2101a in the game area 1100, which is substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, and a game ball can always win a prize below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the game area 1100. It is configured to have a special winning opening 2101b in which a game ball can be won only when the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 operates on the right side. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b), the game ball is entered (winning) by the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later. ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the attacker described later will be described based on a random number for the first special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). The first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time. To. Then, when a hit is won, after the fluctuation display is completed, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which is configured to have a solenoid or the like, is performed, whereby the attacker device 2100 opens and closes. It will be operated. After the attacker device 2100 is opened and closed in this way, it is possible to control the transition to the time-saving gaming state described later, which improves the ease of winning the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101. ..

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and by starting the change of the second special symbol. It is not possible to put the symbol change according to the result of the first special symbol lottery in the fluctuation start waiting state.

Further, the Fuzu Gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow a game ball driven into the right region of the center accessory 2500 to pass through. Then, when the game ball is accepted (passed) by the normal figure gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) described later that the game ball is accepted.

At this time, if a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normal) is based on a random number for a normal symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). The determination process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary hit that triggers the operation of the electric accessory) 2111 is performed, and the ordinary symbol dynamically displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal hit is won, after the fluctuation display is completed, the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118), which is configured to have a solenoid or the like, is performed. By this drive control, the movable piece 2111 is allowed to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 through the opening operation in which the upper end is rotated clockwise around the lower end. ..

That is, the special winning opening 2101b is opened only when the movable piece 2111 opens (the upper end of the movable piece 2111 is rotated around the lower end) according to the winning of the normal hit. Ball) It is provided so that a prize can be won. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 has a mode in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (a ball refusal mode) and a mode in which the same ball can be entered (permission). It can be said that the ball can be operated so as to switch between the ball mode and the ball mode, and is maintained in the ball refusal mode unless the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), the winning of the game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), so that the ease of accepting the game ball is improved. The playability centered on the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening 2101b will be realized.

Further, the second starting port 2102 is provided below the special winning opening 2101b, and is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500, and the special winning opening 2103 and the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker device 2100 are specially won. A game ball that is not accepted by the mouth 2101b is configured to be able to enter. Then, when the game ball is entered into the second start opening 2102, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by the second start opening sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the attacker described later will be described based on a random number for the second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). The second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time. To. Then, when a hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is completed, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which is configured to have a solenoid or the like, is performed, thereby performing the attacker device 2100. Will be opened and closed.

Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to be able to accept a game ball to be driven into the right side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 when it is in the open state. Has been done.

The attacker device 2100 is composed of a large winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 that can operate between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) that drives the opening / closing member 2106 to open / close. Normally, the opening / closing member 2106 closes the large winning opening 2103 so that the game ball cannot be accepted.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the large winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of a special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2101 (first special). When the big winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 (the winning game on the symbol side), The number of balls that can be accepted by the game balls is adjusted by changing the control mode for opening them.

That is, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a judgment result of either the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the attacker device 2100 opens the big winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. As a result, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 2101 (first start port sensor 3131) or the second start port 2102 (second start port sensor 3132), three game balls are paid out. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2103 (count sensor 2122a) used to execute the big hit game state or the small hit game state, 15 game balls are paid out. When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), 10 game balls are paid out.

By the way, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode in the present embodiment), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2111 is in the open state after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (special winning opening 2101b). The time maintained at the right rotation side position where the game ball can win a prize is "5.5 seconds". That is, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 2301, the game ball is always won, and the time (0) is shorter than the time until the passing game ball reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2111. By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol at (.08 seconds), the game ball that triggered the winning of the normal hit can be directly won in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from winning in the second starting port 2102, which is provided further below the special winning opening 2101b and can accept the flowing game ball, in the time-saving game state. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state in which the execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b is preferred.

After the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (position where the game ball can be accepted in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", the game ball is in the closed state (the game ball is in the special winning opening 2101b). It operates so that it is in an unacceptable position).

Therefore, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is positioned on the right rotation side for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by hitting right, it becomes easy to win a game ball into the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time-saving game state rush preparation mode), the center accessory is such that many game balls win the first starting port 2101 (special winning opening 2101b) instead of the first starting opening 2101 (always winning opening 2101a). It is considered advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the right side of 2500 (so-called "right-handed").

On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (normal mode and rush mode in the present embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is set to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 1 second). ), It is impossible to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101.

It should be noted that it is different for the player whether it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on whether or not it is in the probabilistic game state even in the non-time saving game state. In the normal game state (normal mode), which is a non-time-saving game state and not a probabilistic game state, the left side of the center accessory 2500 is placed so that many game balls win in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. It is said that it is more advantageous for the player to aim and shoot the game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Further, in the non-time-saving game state and the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal game state, many game balls are placed in the second start port 2102. It is considered advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so as to win a prize.

Further, as the time saving function, a control for increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol compared to the non-time saving gaming state, a control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol compared to the non-time saving gaming state, and a control of the first starting port 2101. Control to extend the period for maintaining the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b at the right rotation side position from the non-time saving game state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the right rotation side position compared to the non-time reduction game state. Any one or any combination (or all) of the increasing controls may be performed.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) so that the front side is opened and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. The back box 3010 on which the 3010b is formed, the back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, the back top effect unit 3200 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box. The lower right back effect unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the lower right back area arranged between the lower back area effect unit 3400 and the front back decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010. It mainly has a production unit 3600. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later, is housed. A box 1910 is provided.

The game board 4 of the present embodiment is defined as a wide area in which the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (inner circumference of the front component 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (struck with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is upstream of the aisle portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. From the side, it flows down the right passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls that have flowed down the right passage 2545 are decelerated at the abutment portion 1114, and then first, the path of the right passage 2545. Reach the Fuzu Gate 2301 located above. After that, it is guided to the movable region of the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100. In this movable region, the game ball that is not accepted by the opening / closing member 2106 in the large winning opening 2103 is then guided to the movable region of the movable piece 2111. The game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable area is decelerated by the first guiding unit 2901, the flow direction is changed, and then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. Here, the game ball that has passed through the upper normal gate 2301 is guided to the special winning opening 2101b in which the game ball is accepted by the movable piece 2111.

In the movable region of the movable piece 2111, the game ball that has not been guided by the movable piece 2111 to be accepted by the special winning opening 2101b is decelerated again by the second induction unit 2902 and then guided to the second starting opening 2102. Will be done. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second starting port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless it enters either the large winning opening 2103 or the special winning opening 2101b.

As described above, in the time-saving game state, the game ball that has been hit right and passed through the normal gate 2301 will be accepted by the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

Then, as a result of such a game, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a judgment result of either the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. By doing so, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. ing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and protrudes from the right side in the front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the rear view of the back box 3010, and the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion slot formed by the lock mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion slot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed from the peripheral control board box 1910 containing the peripheral control unit 4140, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118), and the like, and from the lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. It has a volume 1912 that extends rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like. It has become.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[Various boards]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of the peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command from the peripheral control board 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are built-in. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100f into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a. .. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a has a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and prevents fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3131 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2102. Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3133 that detects the game ball received into the 3132 and the general winning opening 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2302 and the count sensor 2122 (count). The detection signals from the sensor 2122a, the count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 are the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is designed to be input via.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the ordinary accessory drive mechanism 2114, via the panel relay board 3040, A drive signal is output to the attacker drive mechanism 2121, the winning port distribution drive motor 2558, and the specific area distribution drive motor 2559, or via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. 1st special symbol display 1185, 2nd special symbol display 1186, 1st special symbol storage display 1184, 2nd special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, game status display A drive signal is output to the device 1183 and the round display 1190.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is performed by the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. The launch control unit 4120 that controls, the error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the prize ball tank 720. , The tank rail 731, and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation.

[Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally (hereinafter, "external WDT4111c"). The payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout control input circuit 4111e for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. , Is equipped. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU4111a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball out switch 750. , The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output control input circuits. It is input to 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED display. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko play 1 is sent via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of actually paid out game balls is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the stored game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (CR is not connected). Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically). Has notified that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is used for the payout control I / O. It is received at port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree display 365c, which is a CR unit connection terminal. It is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the residual frequency indicator 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle body 504, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the handle body 504 is first the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d uses a firing reference pulse to generate a driving current for launching the game ball toward the game region 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle body 504. Is input to the firing solenoid 654 to output the current. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and the constant current is triggered by the completion of the input of the ball feed reference pulse. By stopping the output of the ball feed member 584, the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the hit ball launcher 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Exhibit Otsu No. 169) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. .. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It includes a sound source IC 4140c to be performed, and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. A motor attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various production units provided in 4. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 or to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting data from the control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d are output to the sound source IC 4140c.

The detection signals from the various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situ of the various production units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It controls the flow of music and sound effects according to various effects from the lower speaker 821, and also connects to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”), the peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, “external peripheral control”) (not shown). It is also described as "WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, and the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Output to the LED of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or output the lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It outputs to LEDs of each decorative substrate 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, etc. provided on the game board 4. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc. provided in the game board 4, each solenoid, and the like.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It may be input via the lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear surface of the 3010 or the motor drive board 3045.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and mounts the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the peripheral relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 or the upper speaker 222, 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects are played. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which the lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that require electric power, and a door frame base board 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base board 194 includes a side speaker 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and a lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It is equipped with an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base board 194, wirings for connecting various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, etc. are aggregated and bundled, and then extended rearward. It is connected to the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

Further, in the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is arranged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game area 1100 even though it is fired by the hit ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in close proximity (FIG. 23).

Since the game ball (metal) passes through the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 at a high speed while contacting the passage wall surface, electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and it may reach 10 kV. There is (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain due to the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only in the immediate vicinity even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to electrostatic induction by this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity of the electrostatic induction circuit may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time may be input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit may be extremely amplified and exceed the appropriate amplification width (when the AC voltage becomes excessive). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as rattling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), which makes the player unpleasant sound. You will feel it. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. The digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, but usually does not have it on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, there is a tendency to set a large output.

An embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, The present invention relates to an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate (described later) that blocks an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, these various commands are used. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base board 194, or the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821, the side speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the upper speakers 222 and 262 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal audio signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal audio signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of a door frame base board 194, a peripheral relay terminal board 882, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and a lower speaker 821. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and are connected from the door frame base board 194 to the periphery. A + 24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base board 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 through wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal is provided. The plate 882 and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 120, from the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, + 24V voltage, and the woofer + signal and the woofer, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194, are transmitted. -The signal is relay-output and transmitted to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

Further, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 outputs the woofer + signal and the woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821, and is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 67. By arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in a place that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise in this way, it is possible to stably suppress the input of an abnormal audio signal to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal audio signal cutoff board]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, it is abnormal. It blocks the audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is composed of an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal, and an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. When receiving the output abnormality detection signal, it is provided with an abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821.

The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895. It is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885.

Further, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal audio signal detection circuit]
The abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) arranged after the rectifier bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, in this embodiment. Capacitance 47 μF), transistor STR1, transistor STR2, and photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor) are mainly composed of infrared LEDs.

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal branched into two is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. A + voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2, while a rectifying bridge is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD4 to the subsequent stage. A 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose negative voltage is cut by the circuit and whose voltage is substantially 0V is connected.

Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0V as the connection point + voltage waveform) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constants of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 are determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. In addition to being connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, the base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the capacitor SC2 removes the ripple of the + voltage waveform and smoothes it.

In the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the woofer signal smoothed after rectification, that is, the + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. , The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, in the subsequent stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. Further, the cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the 4th terminal (the other side of the A contact) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the 6th terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through.

Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1. A contact protection varistor SZNR2 is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885. It has become like.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with different amplitude peaks) is input, in the case of a woofer + signal in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted. In FIG. 120, a current flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 from top to bottom, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is transferred to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are conductive, and in FIG. 120, a current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 to reach the peak voltage of the peak from 0V of the + voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is transferred to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

In this way, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the transistor STR2 and the photocoupler SPC1 also keeps off, and the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state by keeping the photocoupler SPC1 in the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact (contact is closed) between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 is inactive, and the 3rd and 4th terminals are inactive. It is A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input]
[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. The SD3 conducts, a charging current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the voltage rise of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase of the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 is applied with the passage of time. It approaches the constant voltage and reaches the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistance SR2 and the resistance SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistance SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistance SR2 and the resistance SR4) causes the current to flow. A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage that appears at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal according to claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 of the photocoupler SPC1. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, so that the 8th terminal and 1 of the relay SRL1 are pulled down. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact (contact is open) between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 in the operating state, and the operating state between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal. It becomes A contact (contact is closed). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Further, the 3rd and 4th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal, and the ground line 887. It shifts to the flowing conductive state and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the UFA + signal from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 remains cut off.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler). Turns on). When the abnormal voice signal blocking circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821. To shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output of the woofer + signal from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is kept cut off. Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent damage to the speaker. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal audio signal can be grasped by the staff or the like, or when the audio output stop state is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is released by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage]
<Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conductive, a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak. Will be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are conducted, and a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the charging current flows from 0V to the peak of the + voltage waveform. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal voice signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal voice signal, the resistance SR1 even if the width of the mountain-shaped waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform. A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 increases rapidly. Due to this rapid increase in electric charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage at which the transistor STR1 is operated. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when the abnormal voice signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain it briefly.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. The state shifts to the state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal voice signal having an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that displays and controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is provided with a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in the character ROM 4150d.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the first. (Ii) Drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010 and corresponding schedule data. Multiple control data (display commands) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device is set. Draws on 3252.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 intersect with the main scan for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction in which the main scan is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. And sequentially output to each line of pixels. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minutes, the main scanning is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 149.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board of the present embodiment. When the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes the power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process of returning to the state at the time of power failure (processing at the time of power recovery) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings). , Set interrupt timing, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on processing is on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on processing, if the backup data is not saved in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting the peripheral control unit 4140 to a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started when the normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is cut off. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again supplied. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed.

When the power-on processing is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each of them is used. Supplying to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is output. Will be sent. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start. The details of the processing will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing when a power failure occurs is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of detection of a power failure warning signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3).

[Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of the power failure occurrence processing of the present embodiment. The power outage occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process.

The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), the process when a power failure occurs is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU 4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

The main control MPU4100a first executes the register save processing (step S10), and then executes the processing of steps S11 to S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the above-mentioned random number update process 2 are different. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed on the special symbol display 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, and the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker drive mechanism 2121) is displayed in a variable manner. The opening / closing member 2106) that opens / closes the large winning opening 2103 is controlled, and a process of changing the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2103 is executed.

In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for winning a normal hit, which triggers the operation of the movable piece 2111, is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is subjected to the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2111 becomes higher when a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied after the end of the big hit game state. Is configured to execute (so-called time-saving game state). In this embodiment, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened by a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, and the operating time when the movable piece 2111 is operated is set to a long time. As a result, it is possible to realize a time-saving game state in which the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is easier than in the normal state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In the output data setting process of the following step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) and a drive signal being output to a special figure start storage display (not shown). Perform processing, etc. In the command transmission process in step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing of step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing is terminated.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for jackpot determination used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (also referred to as a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery), and a jackpot game state are generated in the jackpot determination. A random number for a big hit symbol used to determine a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined to cause it, and a determination as to whether or not to generate a small hit game state instead of a big hit (also called a small hit judgment or a small hit lottery). ), Random number for small hit determination, random number for small hit symbol used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to generate a small hit game state in the small hit determination, big hit lottery and small hit Reach judgment random numbers used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform high-expected effects such as reach effects when it is judged that it is not a hit in the lottery, special displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186 Fluctuation display pattern used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the symbol. Random number (random number for variation time), opening mode (number of rounds) of the big winning opening 2103 in the big hit (small hit) game (special bonus game) Whether to control the round determination random number used to determine (etc.), the movable piece 2111 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2101b to the open state (the state where the upper end is located at the position rotated clockwise around the lower end) There are random numbers for normal hit judgment, etc. used for judgment of whether or not (normal lottery hit judgment).

In addition, the random number for the jackpot symbol is also used for determining the state type of the jackpot (whether or not to activate the time saving function, etc.) that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit (small hit) determination random number, the big hit (small hit) symbol random number, the round determination random number, and the movable piece 2111 related to the big hit (small hit) lottery are opened. The random number for judgment per normal symbol related to whether or not to control is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the big hit (small hit) lottery and the determination related to the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2111 are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a big hit (small hit) gaming state is generated, probability of determining that the movable piece 2111 is controlled in the open state) is made constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the big hit (small hit) lottery, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process of the present embodiment.

In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. Then, after the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are performed, the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled, and the first special The first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the symbol side is controlled is sequentially performed. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be changed at the same time. As a result, even if the symbol change on one side starts, the symbol change on the other side does not stop.

[1st and 2nd start opening winning process]
Next, the first and second starting port winning processes (processes in step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting port winning processes of the present embodiment.

In the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110), the process of determining whether or not the game ball has been won in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and the winning process are largely performed. On the condition that it is determined that there is, the process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the second is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 1, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 1 (the second hold number counter is 0), the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first receives various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 2102 as the second start hold storage process (step S203). Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step S203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has been won in the second starting port 2102 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus the winning notification command is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the second starting port 2102 side, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold count counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 1, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (YES in step S205), and then the next step. The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. Judgment is made as to whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the first start hold storage process (step S207), various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol) acquired by winning a prize in the first start port 2101. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the holding order. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

Also in the process of step S207, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 2101 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus the winning notification command is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, it is possible to quickly update the case where the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the first start port 2101 side.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value has reached 4, the first and second starting port winning processes are terminated at this point.

In the present embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2101 (steps S205 to step S208) is executed. .. However, instead of this, there may be a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 2101 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 2102 is executed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute the advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and further transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery, the probability variation lottery, and the determination of the variation display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. Is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The advance determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance judgment process, by comparing the random number with the advance judgment table, the lottery result (big hit (small hit) win / fail, big hit type, and variable display pattern when a lottery using the random number is performed is performed. Etc.) is determined (the determination made prior to the lottery in this way is also called "look-ahead determination"). Peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "look-ahead". Also called "directing").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the prior determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

Hereinafter, a first special symbol control process (step S14a) in which the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled, and a second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled. Each detailed procedure for and is described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first, unlike the control execution procedure.

[1st special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-mentioned first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 125) and the later-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) were executed in the above-mentioned special control process (FIG. 124). This is the process that will be executed later.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the first special symbol side is in the ON state (step S100a). The interlocking flag of the first special symbol is a flag set to be turned on when the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side can proceed at the same time. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur in duplicate between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. In order to avoid this, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, the interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is operated in the ON state. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

When the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is turned on (YES in step S100a), the main control MPU4100a does not perform the processing (steps S130a to S200a) according to the first processing flag, and the first 1 Execute the interlocking setting process (step S250a). The details of the first interlocking setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is off in the process of step S100a (NO in step S100a), the original game on the first special symbol side Assuming that the game status is such that the progress is allowed, the state of the first processing flag indicating the progress status of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU4100a selectively selects a process that matches the state of the first processing flag (progress of the game on the first special symbol side) among the plurality of processes (steps S130a to S200a) shown in the figure. Since it is executed, the game on the first special symbol side is properly advanced.

More specifically, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a), and if the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), the first 1 The fluctuation start process (step S130a) is executed. In the first variation start process (step S130a), after the setting for starting the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result of the winning first special symbol lottery (first special determination) or the like is performed, the first variation is started. 1 The processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 1 (step S140a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is executed. In this first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 (the first special symbol (identification) on the first special symbol display 1185). The first processing flag is updated to "2" after the variation time (such as the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined.

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 2 (step S160a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first variable processing (step S170a) is executed. In this first fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time set in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is based on the time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined in the first fluctuation start process (step S130a) that a big hit has been won, an interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the second special symbol side with the game on the first special symbol side is set. After turning on, the first processing flag is updated to "3" to start the jackpot game. However, if the winner is not won (loss), the first processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the first fluctuation start processing (step S130a) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 3 (step S180a). As a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), the first big hit game start processing (step S190a) that creates an interval period before starting the big hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the big hit game has elapsed, the first processing flag is updated to "4" in the first big hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU4100a executes the first big hit game start processing (step S200a). In this first big hit game start process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the jackpot game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to "4".

On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU4100a executes the first big hit game processing (step S200a) assuming that the first processing flag is 4. In this first jackpot game process, the mode of the jackpot game (number of rounds, opening time, maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set mode of the jackpot game. .. Further, when the big hit game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the first fluctuation start processing (step S130a) is restarted.

As described above, in the process of step S100a, when the interlocking flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is off, the step. When any of the processes of S130a, step S150a, step S170a, step S190a, and step S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first processing flag, the first special control processing in the interrupt processing is performed. It will be terminated.

Hereinafter, the first variation start process (step S130a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the first variation process (step S170a), the first jackpot game start process (step S190a), the first jackpot game process (step S190a). For each process of step S200a) and the first interlocking setting process (step S250a), detailed procedures thereof will be described separately.

[First fluctuation start processing]
First, the first fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the first fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment. The first fluctuation start process is executed when the first process flag is "0" in the above-mentioned first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines, as the process of step S301a, whether or not there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. I do. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process for the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter (YES in step S301a), the interrupt process is performed. The first fluctuation start process is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, each time the above-mentioned interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of the above-mentioned step S301a, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery processing of the first special symbol in the holding state, and the holding state Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the first special symbol in, the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S301a that there is a lottery process for the first special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301a), the main control MPU4100a then performs step S302a. As a process, it is determined whether or not the number of STs is 0. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (number of changes in the special symbol) in which the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (probability variation state), and is set at the end of the jackpot game in the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) described later. .. In the present embodiment, 70 STs are given as the number of STs after all the jackpot games are completed. The details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

Then, when the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302a), the main control MPU4100a updates the number of STs by subtracting 1 as the process of step S303a. On the other hand, when the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process of step S303a is not performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step S304a.

Subsequently, as the process of step S304a, the main control MPU 4100a is a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example, the first winning). The random number group stored in the earliest storage area of the determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S305a, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (random number for first winning determination). , 1st symbol random number, 1st reach random number, 1st variable random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

More specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

After that, the main control MPU4100a counts down the first special hold number counter as the processing of steps S306a and S307a, and draws lottery processing for the above-mentioned hit based on the read-out first winning determination random number (first). 1 Special design lottery) will be held. In the lottery process for the above hits, a lottery is performed based on the random number for determining the first win to determine whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit, and when a lottery result indicating that the big hit is obtained is obtained. The process of determining the jackpot symbol, that is, the type of jackpot is executed based on the first symbol random number.

Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state of the big hit is the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the big hit has a probability of 1/399. It is set to win a big hit with a probability of 1/45 when the winning probability state of the big hit is a probability change state (high probability state).

Then, when the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) is performed in this way, the main control MPU4100a then sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308a. To do. At this time, the stop symbol is also determined according to the result of the first special symbol lottery. After that, as the process of step S309a, this process ends when the first process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a).

The result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first fluctuation start process is peripherally controlled by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the winning information command set in the process of step S308a. It will be transmitted to the unit 4140.

[First fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the first variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is “1”, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 won a big hit. If the flag indicating that is set (YES in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402a), and in the flag state indicating that the big hit is not won. If there is (NO in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S403a).

Then, the main control MPU4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a), and the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 to start is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the first fluctuation timer (step S406a). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time determined in this way. After that, as the process of step S407a, this process ends when the first process flag is updated to "2" so that the process is transferred to the first variable process (step S170a).

The variation pattern set in the first variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. Will be done. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

Among the fluctuation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402a and S403a, the fluctuation pattern table used in the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state (rush preparation mode) has a liquid crystal display. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) for enlivening the display effect in the device 1900 are stored. In these fluctuation patterns, effects (including reach effects) that make the expectation of "winning" different are set, and one of the fluctuation patterns is selectively determined in the process of step S405a. Will be. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of the setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (E).

[Processing during the first fluctuation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first variable processing (step S170a) executed when the first processing flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variable processing in the present embodiment.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the first variation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) becomes 0 as the process of step S501a, that is, the above setting. Make a judgment as to whether or not the specified fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the first fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first fluctuation processing (step S170a) is performed. Each time the process is performed, the first variable timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521a.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S501a, when it is determined that the first fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). ), The main control MPU4100a displays a stop symbol (a stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) that has already been determined as the processing of steps S502a and S503a on the first special symbol display 1185. By doing so, the display control for ending the variable display is performed, and the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is issued. It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

After performing the process for stopping the symbol in this way, this process is terminated when various processes according to the result of the first special symbol lottery are executed.

When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504a), the main control MPU4100a has a second special symbol side in order to avoid duplicate hits on the second special symbol side. The interlocking flag of the second special symbol described above, which indicates that the game is in a state to be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side, is turned on (step S505a). In addition, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506a). After that, when the first processing flag is updated to "3" (step S507a) in order to start the jackpot game, this processing is terminated.

By performing such control, until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is turned off (in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later). In step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side is stopped or maintained in the current state in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side regardless of the second processing flag.

On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost (NO in step S504a), the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. Judgment (step S511a). The probability change flag is set to the on state when the jackpot winning probability is changed from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability change state). Since the change in the winning probability of the big hit is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

Then, when the probability change flag is on (YES in step S511a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the number of STs is 0 (step S512a). When the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S513a).

On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off (NO in step S511a), the main control MPU4100a shifts to the process of step S514a. If the number of STs is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S512a), the probability change state continues, so that the state of the probability change flag being on is maintained and the process proceeds to step S514a. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of step S514a (step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to the ON state when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S514a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given together with the probabilistic function when the first jackpot A occurs, and operates while the probabilistic function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued to operate when the probability change flag is in the on state.

That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513a described above, the main control MPU4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516a). Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped from fluctuating so as to indicate that it is lost, and the first processing flag is set as "the processing stage in which the special symbol is pending digested. It is updated to "0" (step S517a), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the first special symbol is performed.

[First jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first jackpot game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the first big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S601a, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the timer (first jackpot start interval timer) that measures the interval before the start of the jackpot game is already set. As a result, if the first jackpot start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S601a), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602a (the attacker device 2100 is not opened and closed, but the attacker). If the time saving function is operating as the processing of steps S603a and S604a (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. Let me. That is, after such preparations are completed, when the first jackpot start interval timer is set and the first jackpot interval start command is set as the processing of steps S605a and S606a in order to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game. , This process is terminated once.

The first jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the first jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer has already been set in the process of step S601a each time the interrupt process is performed (). YES in step S601a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first jackpot start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611a, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game elapses. It will be decided whether or not it has been done. Then, in the process of step S611a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S611a). ), Each time the first jackpot game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first jackpot start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621a.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S611a, it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. When (YES in step S611a), the main control MPU4100a updates the first processing flag to "4" (step S612a) in order to execute the jackpot game, and ends this processing.

The time length of the first jackpot start interval timer can be set according to the type of jackpot symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[1st jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the first jackpot game process (step S200a) executed when the first process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the first big hit game process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S701a, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress is on. The first jackpot game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to the on state by the process of step S703a described later at the start of the first jackpot game, and is turned off by the process of step S723a described later at the end. Set.

Then, when the first jackpot game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701a), the main control MPU4100a processes in step S702a in order to start the control related to the execution of the jackpot game using the attacker device 2100. As an opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening mode according to the type of jackpot will be described later in FIG. 146 (C).

After the execution mode of the jackpot game is set in this way, the main control MPU4100a executes the first jackpot game indicating that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703a and S704a. This process is temporarily terminated when the flag is turned on and the first jackpot start command is set.

That is, after the first jackpot game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed (). YES in step S701a), the main control MPU4100a will determine whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted as the process of the next step S711a. Then, in the process of step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is in the middle of the control related to the execution of the jackpot game (NO in step S711a). ), Each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU4100a executes the control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712a. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712a. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit is realized.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been digested, that is, all the controls related to the execution of the jackpot game have been completed. (YES in step S711a), the main control MPU4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating the end interval of the jackpot game.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the timer for timing the end interval of the jackpot game (first jackpot end interval timer) is already set (step S721a). As a result, if the first jackpot end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721a), the first jackpot end interval is processed in steps S741a and S742a in order to start the end interval of the jackpot game. This process is temporarily terminated when the timer is set and the first jackpot interval end command is set.

The first jackpot interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the first jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has already been set in the process of step S721a each time the interrupt process is performed (). YES in step S721a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first jackpot end interval timer is 0 as the process of the next step S722a, that is, the time set as the end interval of the jackpot game elapses. It will be decided whether or not it has been done. Then, in the process of step S722a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S722a). ), Each time the first jackpot game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU4100a subtracts 1 from the first jackpot end interval timer as the process of step S731a.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S722a, when it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the end interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU4100a will perform each process (step S723a to step S728a) for ending the jackpot game.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first operates the first jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress, to the off state as the process of step S723a. Next, as the process of step S724a, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is operated to the on state, and the number of times of the special symbol lottery in which the special symbol lottery is set to the high probability state ( Set 70 times to (ST number). Here, the probability change flag operated in the on state is operated in the off state when the number of STs is exhausted (step S513a) or when a big hit is made before digestion (step S506a).

In this embodiment, the probability variation function is activated for all jackpots, but when the probability variation function is activated or not activated depending on the type of jackpot, the time saving function setting process (step S725a) described later is performed. As described above, first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit that activates the probability change function may be executed. Then, when it is a big hit that activates the probability change function, the main control MPU4100a operates the probability change flag to the ON state in the same manner as the process of step S724a described above, and sets the number of STs. Further, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability change function until the next big hit, the main control MPU4100a only operates the probability change flag in the ON state and does not have to set the number of STs.

Next, in step S725a, the main control MPU4100a executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of jackpot and the game state. The details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU4100a has no possibility that the big hit game is duplicated on the second special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game of 1 is in a state to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol is turned off (step S726a). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727a), and the first processing flag is updated to "0" (step S728a) assuming that the first special symbol, which is the big hit this time, is in the processing stage where it has been put on hold. ), End this process. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the first special symbol is performed.

According to such a jackpot game process, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot until it is determined in the process of step 711a that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds. It will be opened repeatedly in step S712a), and the player will be able to obtain a prize ball according to the type of jackpot.

[Time saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the above-mentioned first big hit game process (FIG. 131) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving function setting process of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot that activates the time saving function according to the type of jackpot (step S751). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (C) described later, the time saving function is provided only when the jackpot of symbol A (first jackpot A) is won in the first special symbol lottery.

Then, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode when it is a big hit for operating the time saving function (YES in step S751) (step S752). The rush mode in the present embodiment indicates a gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated and the time saving function is not activated (high probability non-time saving gaming state). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state and the time saving flag is in the off state.

The main control MPU4100a operates the time saving function by operating the time saving flag in the on state when the current game mode is not the rush mode (high accuracy non-time saving game state) (NO in step S752) (step S753). .. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the current jackpot is not a jackpot that activates the time saving function (NO in step S751), the main control MPU4100a ends this process without operating the time saving flag. Also, even when the jackpot this time is a jackpot that activates the time saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (high accuracy non-time saving game state) (YES in step S752), the time saving flag is not operated. This process ends. Here, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the big hit game is started by the processes of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130) described above.

Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-accuracy non-time-saving game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time-saving function, the time-saving function is activated. It will not be activated. The present embodiment provides a gaming state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a gaming state (rush preparation mode) in which the time saving function is activated by not activating the time saving function that is generally advantageous to the player. It is characterized by that.

[1st interlocking setting process]
Next, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a) of the above-mentioned first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment.

In the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled so as to be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a).

Then, when the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), the main control MPU4100a has already been determined by the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 127). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002a).

Next, the main control MPU4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 (step S1003a). Further, a first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a). .. The processing of these steps S1003a and S1004a is the same as the processing of steps S502a and S503a performed when the fluctuation time is timed up in the above-mentioned first fluctuation processing (FIG. 129).

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a performs the same process as the process of steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the above-mentioned first variable processing (FIG. 129) in the process of steps S1005a to S1011a. After executing, this process ends.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), the main control MPU4100a continues the current state of the first special symbol (that is, the state where the first special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021a), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived by the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the first interlocking flag is on), the fluctuating first special symbol is forced. Stop with a lost pattern. In addition, the first special symbol that is not changing is put into a standby state in which the change is not started until the first interlocking flag is turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hits from overlapping between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side.

In the present embodiment, in the process of step S505b of the second variable processing (FIG. 137), the first interlocking flag is set on at the timing when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol ends, and in the first interlocking setting process. The stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 127) is changed to the off symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first interlocking flag may be set to be on at the timing when the fluctuation starts according to the game state. For example, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), the first interlocking flag is turned on when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the hit determination process (step S307b) of the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 135). Make sure to set it. Then, when the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the variation in which the second big hit is derived, the first winning determination random number is not used and the lottery is performed. The outlier symbol may be determined. As a result, the deviation of the first special symbol that is executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol from which the jackpot is derived is determined at the start of the fluctuation, so that the processing at the end timing of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is simplified. can do.

Further, as a modification of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state in which the fluctuating state is maintained even when the first special symbol is fluctuating may be created. In this way, if a jackpot is derived due to fluctuations on the first special symbol side, it will be forcibly controlled to be lost, and the player will lose the opportunity to win the first jackpot that he should have originally won. It disappears.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142, each detailed procedure for the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described.

The second special symbol control process may be performed by using the same program as in the case of performing the first special symbol control process described above and changing various values referred to in the program.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the interlocking flag on the second special symbol side is in the ON state (step S100b). The second special symbol interlocking flag is a flag that is set to the on state when the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side can proceed at the same time. With such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur in duplicate between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, so this is avoided. Therefore, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, at that point, the interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is operated in the ON state. ing. Here, the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the above-mentioned first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

When the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is turned on (YES in step S100b), the main control MPU4100a does not perform any processing (steps S130b to S240b) according to the second processing flag. , The second interlocking setting process is executed (step S250b). The details of the second interlocking setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is off in the process of step S100b (NO in step S100b), the original game on the second special symbol side is originally performed. Assuming that the progress of the game is allowed, the state of the second processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU4100a is a process that matches the state of the second process flag (progress of the game on the second special symbol side) confirmed in this way among the plurality of processes (steps S130b to S240b) shown in the figure. By selectively executing the above, the game on the second special symbol side will be properly advanced.

More specifically, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b), and if the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), the first 2 The fluctuation start process (step S130b) is executed. In this second variation start process (step S130b), after the setting for starting the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the winning second special symbol lottery (second special determination) or the like is performed, the variation display is started. The second processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether or not the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In this second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 (the second special symbol (identification) on the second special symbol display 1186). The second processing flag is updated to "2" after the variation time (such as the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol) to the stop display is determined.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 2 (step S160b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second changing processing (step S170b) is executed. In this second fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time set in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by the timer, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 is based on the time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined in the second fluctuation start process (step S130b) that a big hit has been won, an interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the game on the second special symbol side is set. After turning on, the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the jackpot game. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit game is started after the interlocking lag for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the game on the second special symbol side is turned on. In order to make it happen, the second processing flag is updated to "5". However, if neither the small hit nor the big hit is won (loss), the second processing flag is updated to "0". As a result, the current fluctuation is completed, so that the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 3 (step S180b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In this second big hit game start process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the jackpot game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to "4".

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 4 (step S200b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second big hit game process, the mode of the big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set mode of the big hit game. Further, when the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. As a result, the current fluctuation is completed, so that the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 5 (step S220b). As a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), the second small hit game start processing (step S230b) that creates an interval period before starting the small hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the second processing flag is updated to "6" in the second small hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220b), the main control MPU4100a executes the second small hit game processing (step S240b) assuming that the second processing flag is 6. In this second small hit game process, a small hit game is performed in which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a control mode according to the type of small hit. When the small hit game ends, the second processing flag is updated to "0". As a result, the current fluctuation is completed, so that the second fluctuation start processing (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

As described above, in the process of step S100b, when the interlocking flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side is off, the step. When any of the processes of S130b, step S150b, step S170b, step S190b, step S210b, step S230b, and step S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second processing flag, the interrupt processing is performed. The second special control process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the second variation start process (step S130b), the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the second variation process (step S170b), the second jackpot game start process (step S190b), and the second jackpot game process (step S190b). Step S210b), 2nd small hit game start process (step S230b), 2nd small hit game process (step S240b), and 2nd interlocking setting process (step S250b). Each will be explained.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
First, the second fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the second fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment. The second fluctuation start process is executed when the second process flag is "0" in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

First, as the process of step S301b, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process for the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter (YES in step S301b), the interrupt process is performed. The second fluctuation start process is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, each time the above-mentioned interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of the above-mentioned step S301b, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery processing for the second special symbol in the holding state, and the holding state Until it is determined that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in, the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is substantially put into a standby state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S301b that there is a lottery process for the second special symbol in the pending state (NO in step S301b), the main control MPU4100a then performs step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether or not the number of STs is 0. The number of STs is the number of lottery processes (number of changes in the special symbol) in which the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (probability variation state), and is set at the end of the jackpot game in the second jackpot game process (FIG. 139) described later. .. In the present embodiment, 70 STs are given as the number of STs after all the jackpot games are completed. The details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

Then, when the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302b), the main control MPU4100a updates the number of STs by subtracting 1 as the process of step S303b. On the other hand, when the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S302b), the process of step S303b is not performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step S304b.

Subsequently, as the process of step S304b, the main control MPU 4100a is a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example, the second winning). The random number group stored in the earliest storage area of the determination random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S305b, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (random number for second winning determination). , The second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number) are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the second special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become. In the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) is valid as the second special symbol reservation storage area. That is, in the variation display control of the second special symbol of the present embodiment, the random numbers extracted according to the start winning prize generated later are stored unless the second special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize generated earlier has been changed. Will not be done.

After that, the main control MPU4100a counts down the second special hold number counter as the processing of steps S306b and S307b, and draws lottery processing for the winning based on the read second winning determination random number (first). 2 Special design lottery) will be held. In the lottery process for the above hits, a lottery is performed based on the random number for determining the second win to determine whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit. The process of determining the jackpot symbol, that is, the type of jackpot is executed based on the second symbol random number.

Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is changed. In the case of a state (high probability state), it is set to win a big hit with a probability of 1/45. Also, when the winning probability state is the normal state, the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and when the winning probability state is the probability change state (high probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 44/45. It is set.

Then, when the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) is performed in this way, the main control MPU4100a then sets a flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308b. To do. At this time, the stop symbol is also determined according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. After that, as the process of step S309b, this process ends when the second process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b).

The result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second fluctuation start process is peripherally controlled by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the winning information command set in the process of step S308b. It will be transmitted to the unit 4140.

[Second fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the second fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the second variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is executed when the second process flag is "1" in the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

If the flag indicating that the big hit has been won is set in the main control MPU4100a (YES in step S401b), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit according to the gaming state is selected (step S402b), and the small hit is won. If the flag indicating that the flag has been set is set (YES in step S403b), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a small hit according to the gaming state is selected (step S404b), and the loss is neither a big hit nor a small hit. If it is in the flag state indicating that (NO in step S403b), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S405b).

Then, the main control MPU4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 to start is set, and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is started (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the second fluctuation timer (step S408b). As a result, fluctuation control is performed on the second special symbol display 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time determined in this way. After that, as the process of step S409b, this process ends when the second process flag is updated to "2" so that the process is transferred to the second variable process (step S170b).

The variation pattern set in the second variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. Will be done. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small hit lottery) is based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. The display effect will be performed as shown in.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side are simultaneously advanced. , The display effect on the first special symbol side (variation of the decorative symbol, etc.) and the display effect on the second special symbol side (variation of the decorative symbol, etc.) appear at the same time through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. ..

Among the fluctuation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402b, S404b and S405b, the fluctuation pattern table used in the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy time-short game state (rush preparation mode) is shown in the variable pattern table. A fluctuation time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length 10 times or more longer than any other fluctuation time that can be selected on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. The details of setting the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (E).

[Processing during the second fluctuation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the second variable processing (step S170b) executed when the second processing flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the second variable processing in the present embodiment.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the second fluctuation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) becomes 0 as the process of step S501b, that is, the above setting. Make a judgment as to whether or not the specified fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the second fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) is performed. Each time the process is performed, the second variable timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521b.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S501b, when it is determined that the second fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). ), The main control MPU4100a displays the stop symbol (stop symbol according to the result of the second special symbol lottery) that has already been determined as the processing of step S502b and step S503b on the second special symbol display 1186. By doing so, the display control for ending the variable display is performed, and the second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is given. It is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The second fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

After performing the process for stopping the symbol in this way, this process is terminated when various processes according to the result of the second special symbol lottery are executed.

When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504b), the main control MPU4100a has the first special symbol side in order to avoid duplicate hits on the first special symbol side. The interlocking flag of the first special symbol described above, which indicates that the game is in a state to be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side, is turned on (step S505b). In addition, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is turned off (step S506b). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, the same applies when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b and YES in step S531b). In order to avoid the occurrence, the above-mentioned interlocking flag of the first special symbol indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol is turned on (step S532b). ). After that, when the second processing flag is updated to "5" in order to start the small hit game (step S533b), this processing is terminated.

By performing such control, until the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later). In step S726b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the second special symbol side regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost (NO in step S504b and NO in step S531b), first, the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is turned on. (Step S511b). The probability change flag is set to the on state when the jackpot winning probability is changed from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability change state). Since the change in the winning probability of the big hit is triggered by the occurrence of the big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game in the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

Then, when the probability change flag is on (YES in step S511b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the number of STs is 0 (step S512b). When the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S513b).

On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off (NO in step S511b), the main control MPU4100a shifts to the process of step S514b. If the number of STs is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S512b), the probability change state continues, so that the probability change flag is kept on and the process proceeds to step S514b. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of step S514b (step S514b). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state. The time saving flag is set to the ON state when the time saving function is activated in the time saving function setting process (step S725b) of the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S514b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S515b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given together with the probabilistic function when the first jackpot A occurs, and operates while the probabilistic function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued to operate when the probability change flag is in the on state.

That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S513b described above, the main control MPU4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S516b). Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the special symbol is stopped from fluctuating so as to indicate that it is lost, and the second processing flag is set to "the processing stage in which the special symbol is on hold and digested." It is updated to "0" (step S517b), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second jackpot game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second big hit game start process (step S190b) executed when the second process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the second big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S601b, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the timer (second jackpot start interval timer) for timing the interval before the start of the jackpot game is already set. As a result, when the second jackpot start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S601b), the condition device is operated as the process of step S602b, and the time is shortened as the process of step S603b and step S604b. If the function is operating (YES in step S603b), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, when the second jackpot start interval timer is set and the second jackpot interval start command is set as the processing of steps S605b and S606b in order to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game. , This process will be terminated once.

The second jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the second jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer has already been set in the process of step S601b each time the interrupt process is performed (). YES in step S601b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second jackpot start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611b, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game elapses. It will be decided whether or not it has been done. Then, in the process of step S611b, as long as it is determined that the second jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S611b). ), Each time the second jackpot game start process (step S190b) is performed, the second jackpot start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621b.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, it was determined that in the processing of step S611b, the second jackpot start interval timer became 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game had elapsed. At that time (YES in step S611b), the main control MPU4100a ends this process when the second process flag is updated to "4" in order to execute the jackpot game (step S612b).

The time length of the second jackpot start interval timer can be set according to the type of jackpot symbol (the type determined by the second symbol random number).

[2nd jackpot game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the second big hit game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the second big hit game process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S701b, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress is on. The second jackpot game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to the on state by the process of step S703b described later at the start of the second jackpot game, and is turned off by the process of step S723b described later at the end. Set.

Then, when the second jackpot game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701b), the main control MPU4100a processes in step S702b in order to start the control related to the execution of the jackpot game using the attacker device 2100. As an opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening mode according to the type of jackpot will be described later in FIG. 146 (C).

After the execution mode of the jackpot game is set in this way, the main control MPU4100a executes the second jackpot game indicating that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703b and S704b. This process is temporarily terminated when the flag is turned on and the second jackpot start command is set.

That is, after the second jackpot game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed (). YES in step S701b), the main control MPU4100a will determine whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted as the process of the next step S711b. Then, in the process of step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is in the middle of the control related to the execution of the jackpot game (NO in step S711b). ), Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU4100a executes the control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712b. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S712b. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit is realized.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711b, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been digested, that is, all the controls related to the execution of the jackpot game have been completed. (YES in step S711b), the main control MPU4100a performs each process (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, step S742b) for generating the end interval of the jackpot game.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the timer for timing the end interval of the jackpot game (second jackpot end interval timer) is already set (step S721b). As a result, if the second jackpot end interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S721b), the second jackpot end interval is processed in steps S741b and S742b in order to start the end interval of the jackpot game. This process is temporarily terminated when the timer is set and the second jackpot interval end command is set.

The second jackpot interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the second jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer has already been set in the process of step S721b each time the interrupt process is performed (). YES in step S721b), the main control MPU4100a has elapsed whether or not the second jackpot end interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S722b, that is, the time set as the end interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. It will be decided whether or not. Then, in the process of step S722b, as long as it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S722b). ), Each time the second jackpot game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU4100a subtracts 1 from the second jackpot end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S722b, when it is determined that the second jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the end interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU4100a will perform each process (step S723b to step S728b) for ending the jackpot game.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first operates the second jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress, to the off state as the process of step S723b. Next, as the process of step S724b, the probability variation flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability variation state) is operated to the on state, and the number of times of the special symbol lottery in which the special symbol lottery is set to the high probability state ( Set 70 times to (ST number). Here, the probability change flag operated in the on state is operated in the off state when the number of STs is exhausted (step S513b) or when a big hit is made before digestion (step S506b).

In this embodiment, the probability variation function is activated for all jackpots, but when the probability variation function is activated or not activated depending on the type of jackpot, the time saving function setting process (step S725b) described later is performed. As described above, first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit that activates the probability change function may be executed. Then, in the case of a big hit for operating the probability change function, the main control MPU4100a operates the probability change flag to the ON state in the same manner as the process of step S724b described above, and sets the number of STs. Further, in the case of a big hit that activates the probability change function until the next big hit, the main control MPU4100a only operates the probability change flag in the ON state and does not have to set the number of STs.

Next, in step S725b, the main control MPU4100a executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of jackpot and the game state. The time saving function setting process is the same as the time saving function setting process (step S725a) in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described above, and is as described above in FIG. 132.

Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU4100a has no possibility that the big hit game is duplicated on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag indicating that the game of the above is in a state to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned off (step S726b). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727b), and the second processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the second special symbol, which is the big hit this time, is in the processing stage where the pending digestion is performed (step). S728b), this process is terminated. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the second special symbol is performed.

According to such a big hit game process, until it is determined in the process of step 711b that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the corresponding big prize opening 2103 is opened according to the type of big hit ( It will be opened repeatedly in step S712b), and the player will be able to obtain a prize ball according to the type of jackpot.

[Second small hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hit game start process (step S230b) executed when the second process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small hit game start process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S801b, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the timer (second small hit start interval timer) for timing the interval before the start of the small hit game is already set. As a result, if the second small hit start interval timer is not yet set (NO in step S801b), the second small hit start interval is started as the process of steps S802b and S803b in order to start the interval before the start of the small hit game. When the small hit start interval timer is set and the second small hit interval start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

The second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the small hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the second small hit start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has already been set each time the interrupt process is performed (YES in step S801b). ), The main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second small hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S811b, that is, whether or not the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has elapsed. Will be done. Then, in the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has not elapsed (in step S811b). NO), each time the second small hit game start process (step S230b) is performed, the second small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821b.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S811b, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has elapsed. When this is done (YES in step S811b), the main control MPU4100a ends this process when the second process flag is updated to "6" in order to execute the small hit game (step S812b).

[Second small hit game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the second small hit game process (step S240b) executed when the second process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the second small hit game process of the present embodiment.

First, as the process of step S901b, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second small hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress is on. To do. The second small hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to the on state by the process of step S903b described later at the start of the second small hit game, and is turned off by the process of step S921b described later at the end. Set to state.

Then, when the second small hit game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S901b), the main control MPU4100a starts the control related to the execution of the small hit game using the attacker device 2100 in step S902b. As the processing of, an opening mode (opening pattern) according to the type of small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required for control execution related to the opening pattern are set respectively. There is only one type of small hit in this embodiment. Details of the opening mode of the small hit will be described later in FIG. 146 (D).

Next, the main control MPU4100a operates the second small hit game execution flag, which indicates that the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress, in the on state as the processing of steps S903b and S904b. , When the second small hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the second small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed. (YES in step S901b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the control timer is set to 0 in the process of the next step S911b, that is, the timing at which the control related to the execution of the small hit game is terminated has arrived. Will be judged. Then, in the process of step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, it is in the middle of the control related to the execution of the small hit game (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Each time the game process (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU4100a first executes the open / close control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S912b. As a result, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement related to the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912b, and the attacker device 2100 operates the opening / closing small hit. The game will be realized.

Then, while such control is being performed, when it is determined in the process of step S911b that the control timer is 0, that is, it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the small hit game have been completed (step S911b). YES), the main control MPU4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for ending the small hit game.

First, as the process of step S921b, the main control MPU4100a operates the second small hit game execution flag, which indicates that the control related to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress, to the off state. Next, in view of the fact that there is no possibility that the big hit games are duplicated on the first special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side should be linked to the game of the second special symbol. The interlocking flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922b).

Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is in the ON state (step S923b). Then, when the probability change flag is in the ON state (YES in step S923b), it is determined whether or not the number of STs is 0 (step S924b). When the number of STs is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probability change state has ended, and the probability change flag is set to the off state (step S925b).

On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off (NO in step S923b), the main control MPU4100a shifts to the process of step S926b. If the number of STs is not 0 even if the probability change flag is on (NO in step S924b), the probability change state continues, so that the probability change flag is kept on and the process proceeds to step S926b. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of step S926b. Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S926b), it is determined whether or not to stop the time saving function (step S927b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given together with the probabilistic function when the first jackpot A occurs, and operates while the probabilistic function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability change flag is in the off state, and it is determined that the time saving function is continued to operate when the probability change flag is in the on state.

That is, when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the process of step S925b described above, the main control MPU4100a stops the time saving function on the assumption that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied (step S928b). Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function is performed in this way, the second processing flag is updated to "0" on the assumption that the special symbol from which the small hit is derived is in the processing stage where the small hit is detained (step S929b). , End this process. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second interlocking setting process]
Next, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) of the above-mentioned second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the second interlocking setting process of the present embodiment.

In the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is controlled so as to be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b).

Then, when the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001b), the main control MPU4100a has already been determined by the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) of the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 135). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined lost symbol (step S1002b).

Next, the main control MPU4100a performs display control for ending the variable display by displaying the set lost symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). Further, a second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b). .. The processing of these steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as the processing of steps S502b and S503b performed when the fluctuation time is timed up in the above-mentioned second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137).

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a performs the same processing as the processing of steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-mentioned second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) in the processing of steps S1005b to S1011b. After executing, this process ends.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001b), the main control MPU4100a continues the current state of the second special symbol (that is, the state where the second special symbol is not changing). (Step S1021b), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is on), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly lost. Stop at. In addition, the second special symbol that is not changing is put into a standby state in which the change is not started until the second interlocking flag is turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hits from overlapping between the game on the second special symbol side and the game on the first special symbol side.

[Processing on the normal symbol side]
Subsequently, the normal control process (step S15) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the normal control process, normal symbol fluctuation control (normal symbol lottery) based on the passage of the game ball of the normal symbol gate 2301 is executed, and when a hit (normal symbol hit) occurs in the normal symbol lottery, a movable piece (normal) The winning auxiliary control is executed to operate the electric accessory) 2111 to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b.

[Normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal control process of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the gate sensor 2302 that detects the passage of the game ball to the normal gate 2301 is in the ON state (step S2001). Then, when the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 2301 and is turned on (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU4100a uses a random number counter for the normal random number of the normal symbol. The gate passing process such as acquiring from the above and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2010). The details of the gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

Next, the main control MPU4100a is one of five process processes (normal symbol normal process, normal symbol fluctuation time determination process, normal symbol variation process, normal symbol stop process, normal electric accessory release process) according to the normal symbol process flag. Selectively execute one to end the normal control process.

First, in the normal symbol normal processing of step S2100, the main control MPU4100a reads a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU4100a, and based on the read normal random number, the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is described. Execute lottery processing and so on.

Next, in the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process of step S2200, the main control MPU4100a performs a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol variation process in step S2300, the main control MPU4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.

Next, in the normal symbol stop processing of step S2400, the main control MPU4100a usually has a mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The process of stopping the variable display of the normal symbol is executed so as to be displayed on the symbol display 1189.

Next, in the normal electric accessory opening process of step S2500, the main control MPU4100a is movable when the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "normal figure hit". A process of operating the piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 to enable the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is executed.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, the gate passage process (step S2010) of the above-mentioned normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passing process of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 4100a first acquires a counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the counter value, the hold number of the normal symbol is a value less than the maximum value "4". Whether or not it is determined (step S2011).

Then, in the main control MPU4100a, when the number of holdings of the normal symbol is less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is newly put into the holding state in step S2012. ~ S2014 processing is executed. First, as the process of step S2012, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S2013, a normal random number and a normal random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S2014, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. After that, the process of passing through this gate is completed.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value (NO in step S2011), the main control MPU4100a does not newly suspend the variable display control of the ordinary symbols. That is, the main gate passage process is completed without executing the process of steps S2012 to S2014.

[Normal design normal processing]
Next, the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) of the above-mentioned normal control process (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 145. The normal symbol normal process is executed when the normal symbol process flag indicates that this process should be performed in the above-mentioned normal control process. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state (YES in step S2101), the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a A random number stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode (for example, a normal random number or a random number with a variable map) is read from the RAM (step S2102). Then, the countdown is performed by subtracting 1 from the normal hold number counter (step S2103), and the display mode is related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 4100a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner (step S2104).

Specifically, the main control MPU4100a stores random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 2301 in order from the first (first) region of the normal symbol holding storage area having four storage areas. To do. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first).

Next, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (step S2105). Then, if the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (YES in step S2105), the normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) at the time saving time is selected (step S2106), and the current gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state. If (NO in step S2105), a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) for non-time saving is selected (step S2107). After that, the normal figure hit determination table selected in the process of step S2106 or step S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read in the process of step S2102 (step S2108).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is short time and the normal figure hit determination table is used when the game state is non-time reduction. It is equipped with a normal map hit judgment table for non-time reduction. Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, all the 255 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure hit. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation judgment value. In this way, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 2301, the player always wins the game and operates the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 to operate the first starting port 2101. It is controlled so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 2101b.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. However, ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, in the non-time saving game state, even if the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 2301, it is not won by hitting the normal drawing, so through the opening operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111. It is not controlled so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. As described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time-saving game state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the time-saving game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit occurs, the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is opened for a shorter time than the time-saving game state, for example, 0.1 second to enable the special winning opening 2101b to win a game ball, and then the closing operation. It is also possible to make it impossible to win a game ball in the special winning opening 2101b.

The main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the result of the process in step S2108 described above is a normal figure (step S2109). Then, in the case of hitting a normal symbol (YES in step S2109), after setting a flag for hitting a normal symbol indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is won per hit (step S2110), the normal symbol is hit. The symbol per normal symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control is stopped (step S2112).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU4100a is out of alignment as a result of the process of step S2108 described above (NO in step S2109), the main control MPU4100a is a normal diagram as an mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The outlier symbol is determined (step S2111).

After the process of step S2112 or step S2111 is completed, the main control MPU4100a updates the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag (step S2113) so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2200), and ends this process. ..

In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state in which the time saving function is not activated is set to 0%, and the winning probability of the normal symbol in the time saving gaming state in which the time saving function is activated is set to 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the time-saving game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is always higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the winning opening 2101a, that is, the time-saving game. In the state, the game specifications of the normal symbol (winning probability per normal figure, fluctuation time of the normal figure, opening pattern of the normal electric accessory) that can guide the player to hit right instead of left-handed may be sufficient. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, the normal-figure probability change function that increases the winning probability per normal figure compared to the non-time-saving game state, the normal-figure fluctuation shortening function that shortens the normal-figure fluctuation time, and the opening operation by the ordinary electric accessory. At least one of the functions of extending the opening of the public electric power to extend (winning assistance control) is given. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the winning assistance strengthening control that further strengthens the winning assistance control set in the non-time-saving gaming state is executed.

[Game specs with special designs]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 146 (A), the winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (A), in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, when the winning probability is the normal state (low probability state), the big hit is won with a probability of 1/399. In addition, when the winning probability is set higher than the normal state in the probability variation state (high probability state), the big hit is won with a probability of 1/45. In the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, only the big hit in which the condition device operates occurs, and the small hit in which the condition device does not operate does not occur. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 127) described above, the jackpot determination is performed with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of executing the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (B), the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the hit in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery described above. The small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is that when the big hit winning probability is in the normal state (low probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and the big hit winning probability is in the probability changing state (high probability state). If so, there is a 44/45 chance of winning a small hit. The small hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, and does not change between the normal state and the probabilistic state unlike the big hit winning probability. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 135) described above, a jackpot determination is performed with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of lottery execution, and 390/399. Alternatively, a small hit determination is made with a winning probability of 44/45.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high. In particular, in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, if a big hit is not won, it is set to always win a small hit. In addition, it is not always necessary to win a small hit when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, and it is lost when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state. It suffices if the small hit is won with a probability much higher than the probability of becoming (for example, the big hit winning probability is 1/45, the small hit winning probability is 40/45, the losing probability is 4/45, etc.).

Subsequently, the jackpot type of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (C). As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the jackpots of the present embodiment include the first jackpot A and the first jackpot B that can occur in the first special symbol lottery, and the second jackpot that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, A and the second jackpot B, are provided.

The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol A. Further, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol B.

The second big hit A occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol A. Further, the second big hit B occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol B.

These four types of jackpots have a 100% probability of shifting the gaming state after the jackpot game to the probabilistic state, and continuing the probabilistic state until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be added. Further, the first jackpot A can be provided with a time saving function of operating a movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 to perform a winning assist control for assisting the winning of a game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101. It is provided in.

Further, the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of big hit, and the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A and the second big hit B are the opening patterns A, B and C, respectively. And D are set. Here, the number of prize balls that a player can obtain is changed according to the opening pattern, and the interest of the jackpot game is enhanced.

The opening patterns A to C are set so that the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 is long and the player can obtain a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are jackpot games in which the round game is performed four times, and the opening time and the maximum number of prizes for each round are set so that the player can obtain 500 prize balls. Further, the opening pattern C is a big hit game in which the round game is performed 16 times, and the opening time and the maximum number of prizes for each round are set so that the player can acquire 2000 prize balls.

On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 is short and the player cannot obtain a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which a round game is performed 16 times, and is set so that the player cannot substantially obtain a prize ball by repeating high-speed opening in which one opening time is short.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (D), the small hit type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the small hit of the present embodiment is provided with a second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C occurs with a 100% probability when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and at this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol C. Further, an opening pattern E is set as an opening mode of the large winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time, and is provided so that a prize ball can be obtained by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning that the player obtains by hitting the game ball into the game area with the intention of winning the large winning opening 2103, but in the game area where the large winning opening 2103 is arranged. A prize that can be obtained by accidentally flowing down a position where a prize can be won when the game ball that has been driven in is opened at the large prize opening 2103. In the second small hit C, if the player hits the game ball with a right-handed hit, the number of rounds and one opening time of the large winning opening 2103 can be expected so that a prize of about 1 to 2 balls can be expected accidentally. Is set. When about 1 to 2 balls are won in the large winning opening 2103 by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be obtained.

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) of the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided so as to occur frequently, and the player continuously hits the game ball with a right-handed hit in the rush mode. It is possible to promote accidental winning based on the second small hit C that occurs during, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the majority of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode (total number of balls that can be won). Will occupy. In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) of the number of STs (70 times) occurs during the rush mode, the prize balls (maximum 2100 balls) of the above-mentioned big hit prize balls (2000 balls) or more occur. ) Can be expected, so there is no loss of interest in the game due to the occurrence of small hits where almost no prize balls can be obtained. Rather, a small hit game that occurs a plurality of times rather than a single big hit game keeps the player interested in the game, so that the interest of a series of games in the rush mode can be enhanced.

Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (E). As shown in FIG. 146 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 to 60 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode. Set. Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode.

Here, the normal mode is a game mode in which the player is urged to win a game ball in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 (that is, "left-handed"), and the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery. Indicates a normal game state (low probability state) and a normal game state in which the time saving function is not given. The rush preparation mode is a game mode that encourages the player to win a game ball in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 (that is, "right-handed"), and is a jackpot winning probability of a special symbol lottery. Indicates a high-probability time-saving game state in which a probability change state (high-probability state) and a time-saving function are added. In addition, the rush mode is a game mode that encourages the player to win a game ball in the second starting port 2102 (that is, "right-handed"), and the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a probable state (high probability). State) and indicates a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving function is not added. The high-accuracy time-short game state in the rush preparation mode is a game state that can be shifted to the occurrence of the above-mentioned first jackpot A.

In this way, the above-mentioned specifications (winning probability, winning type, fluctuation time, etc.) of the game of the special symbol provided to the player change according to the game state. Then, the transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is special for the number of STs given (70 times in this case). Triggered by the digestion of the design lottery (variation).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the transition of the gaming state and the control of the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the present embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is the normal game state (normal mode). In the normal game state, the game ball is launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the game ball is won in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. Is the best playing method for the player.

Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment can easily win a prize only by following the flow path of the game ball launched (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is provided in. Then, in the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 2102, the winning probability of the small hit that can obtain the prize ball is high (390/399 in the normal state, 44/45 in the probability change state). In this case, the player tries to hit the right side from the start of the game and aim for the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the variation of the second special symbol in the game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. The time is set to long-term fluctuation (600 seconds). As a result, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it takes a long time until the display is stopped (the lottery result is known), so that the player's right-handed strike can be suppressed. ..

Since the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second special in the gaming state in which the winning is not recommended in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. The fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a long time, but it is not limited to this. A state changing member capable of converting the second starting port 2102 into a winning easy state and a winning difficult state is provided, and winning is won in a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. It may be set to a difficult state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state changing member and to provide a game in which the player can easily obtain the procedure, the player can change the fluctuation time according to the game state. We are instructing you to play in the best way.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a). Then, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal game state is continued, while if the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, the high probability time saving game state (rush preparation mode, Shift to the first advantageous game state). Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit B, the game shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

As described above, in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is extremely unlikely that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be known in the normal game state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol).

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is given an advantageous privilege for the player, such as the acquisition of the prize ball and the provision of the probability change function and the time saving function by the occurrence of the first big hit A.

In the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), by launching a game ball (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 It is the best game method for the player to win the game ball.

Here, when the right-handed game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301 arranged in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the time saving function is activated, so that the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol lottery. (Probability per normal figure in the time saving state is 100%). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, as described above, in the time-saving game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the winning opening 2101a at all times. Since it is set high, the player strikes right and aims at the special winning opening 2101b.

Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning opening 2101b). Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost 70 times in a row, the game shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In addition, if the result of the first big hit A is derived by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the number of STs is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state). To continue. Further, if the result of the first big hit B is derived by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the game shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

As described above, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is extremely unlikely that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be known in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol).

(Rush mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is given an advantageous privilege for the player, such as the acquisition of the prize ball and the provision of the probability change function by the occurrence of the first jackpot B.

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), a game ball is launched at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed") to win a game ball at the second starting port 2102. Letting the player play is the best way to play.

Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the right-handed game ball reaches the second starting port 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the Fuzu gate 2301 and the special winning opening 2101b, but the time saving function does not operate, so the Fuzu gate Even if it passes through 2301, a normal hit (that is, a state in which the special winning opening 2101b is easy to win by the operation of the movable piece 2111) does not occur. Therefore, the game ball hit right in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) wins a prize in the second starting port 2102.

Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery that is put on hold in the game state before the transition when the gaming state shifts. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the main game state is not a big hit 70 times in a row, the game shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In addition, if any of the big hit results is derived by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the number of STs is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state) is set. continue.

In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, if the big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, the small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hit game generated at this time, the player can obtain a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a prize ball, which is less than the number of game balls that can be obtained in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by the small hit game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the next big hit. Then, in the main game state, a maximum of 70 small hit games can be continuously generated. That is, a series of games of the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs becomes a privilege game in which a prize ball can be obtained.

The fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving game state is set to a short time (1 second). Since it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery in this game state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time for the result of the first special symbol lottery to be known. It is also possible to do it. However, in the present embodiment, the period for granting the probability change function is controlled by the number of times the special symbol is executed (the number of STs), and the number of STs is counted when the special symbol starts to change. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to which the probability change function is given becomes long, the case where the probability change function is given to the first special symbol but the probability change function is not given to the second special symbol. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to the same short time as the second special symbol, the probability state differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous fluctuation state. It prevents the occurrence (obscuring the end of the probabilistic state). As a modification, when the end of the period for granting the probability change function is controlled until the next big hit occurs, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the present game state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery that is changing at the same time, so that the end of the probabilistic state as described above is unclear. No conversion occurs.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), even if the big hit is not derived, the prize balls can be obtained in the small hit game of the second special symbol, and the total number of prize balls. Is more than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) but the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state).

Since the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is a game state that can occur when the first jackpot B is derived in the first special symbol lottery, the player first enters the normal game state (normal mode) or high. In the probabilistic short-time game state (rush preparation mode), a game is performed aiming at winning a game ball to the first starting port 2101. Then, when the game state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first jackpot B, the player then plays a game aiming at winning the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Do.

[Control timing chart of each game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be changed at the same time. However, it is not possible to generate a big hit game or a small hit game using the attacker device 2100 in both games. Therefore, the timing of simultaneous fluctuation control in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation control of the present embodiment. FIG. 148 (A) is an example of interlocking stop control of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148 (B) is the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) in the rush mode. ) Is an example of interlocking stop control.

As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-accuracy time-short game state), if the game ball wins the second start opening 2102, the second special symbol fluctuates. The time (second fluctuation time) is set to 600 seconds, and the long-term fluctuation is started. Then, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a or special winning opening 2101b), the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is set to 30 to 60 seconds, and the first in the order of winning. 1 The change of the special symbol is executed.

In the game on the first special symbol side, when the jackpot is derived, the fluctuation is stopped at the stop symbol of the first jackpot (step S502a), and the game on the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side. The interlocking flag (second interlocking flag) to be caused is set to the ON state (step S505a). Then, the first big hit game is executed (steps S190a, S200a).

Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, in response to the second interlocking flag being turned on, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the changing second special symbol is released. The stop symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop (step S1003b).

Here, the second interlocking flag is a big hit game or a small hit in which the attacker device 2100 is similarly used on the second special symbol side when the first big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 is used is executed on the first special symbol side. It is a flag provided to prevent the game from being executed, but it is also a flag required to prepare for entering the rush mode.

Specifically, when the first big hit B occurs in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high accuracy short game state), the game state after the end of the first big hit game is the rush mode (high). It shifts to the probable non-time saving game state). In the rush mode after the transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 becomes the mainstream. At this time, if the change of the second special symbol started before the transition is continued, the game on the side of the second special symbol waits for the change to stop and becomes a standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is a flag necessary to start the game in the rush mode without delay.

As shown in FIG. 148 (B), immediately after the transition to the rush mode (high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), the change of the first special symbol held in the gaming state before the transition is executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). Then, in the rush mode, the game of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the mainstream. The second starting port 2102 is a winning opening that even a beginner in the game can win by hitting right, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, the fluctuation of the second special symbol occurs frequently. In addition, the second special symbol that does not derive a big hit derives a small hit.

Therefore, in the game on the second special symbol side, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hit game (second small hit game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurs. Then, every time the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502b), the interlocking flag (first interlocking flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol side with the second special symbol side is set to the ON state. (Step S532b). Then, the second small hit game is executed (steps S230b, S240b), and when the second small hit game is completed, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

In the game on the first special symbol side, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed in response to the first interlocking flag being turned on. At this time, the first special symbol that has not started to fluctuate is put into a standby state so as not to start fluctuating (step S1021a), and fluctuating is started when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed as a stop symbol that is out of alignment (step S1003a).

In this way, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side is the mainstream, the execution frequency of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the game on the second special symbol side is the mainstream in the rush mode. Then, the execution frequency of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In the present embodiment, there is a concern that the winning game may occur in duplicate between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Therefore, in order to avoid this, the game on one side When a hit is obtained, the game on the other side is controlled by the interlocking setting process at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

When the player starts the game in the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 such as the state where the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, the normal mode first starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to hit left and aim at the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101. Here, when the launching force of the game ball at the start of hitting is too strong and the game ball is hit to the right and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is long. Long-term fluctuations are performed.

After that, when the player adjusts the firing force and strikes left, and the game ball wins the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101, the change of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. In the game on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery in which the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the first jackpot A is won, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the jackpot symbol A, and the first jackpot game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the long-term fluctuation state is forcibly stopped and displayed as a detached symbol. Then, at the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a probability change function of 70 ST times and a time saving function of performing a prize assist control for facilitating a prize in the special prize opening 2101b are provided.

When the player makes a right-handed hit and the game ball wins in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the change of the first special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. In the game on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won is executed with a probability of 1/45. Then, the number of STs is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Then, if the first jackpot B is won when the count of the number of STs is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the jackpot symbol B, and the first jackpot game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, but the state is maintained because the change of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, at the end of the first big hit game, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

In rush mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the second starting port 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not given, and only the probability change function with 70 ST times is given. Here, the number of STs in which the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode was 68 is counted again from the count value of 70.

Here, the player continues to hit right. The right-handed game ball does not win the special winning opening 2101b because the time saving function does not operate, and wins the second starting opening 2102 further below. Since it is easy for even a beginner to win a prize in the second starting port 2102, winning a game ball in the second starting port 2102 frequently occurs. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) at this time is set to 1 second, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

In the game on the second special symbol side, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/45, and if the big hit is not won, the second special symbol lottery in which the small hit is won is executed. Then, the number of STs is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. If a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, the first interlocking flag is set to the ON state while the second small hit game is executed.

Immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b that occurred in the rush preparation mode before the transition is on hold, and the fluctuation of these first special symbols is changed. It will be executed.

In the game on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won is executed with a probability of 1/45. The fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol at this time is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, the small hit game frequently occurs in the game on the second special symbol side, so the first interlocking flag is also frequently set to the ON state. Therefore, if the first special symbol is changing when the second special symbol is stopped, it is forcibly stopped and displayed as a detached symbol. Then, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state at the end of the second small hit game, so that the next change of the first special symbol is started. Then, the number of STs is also subtracted and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol.

As described above, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are efficiently executed in a short time, so that the subtraction speed of the number of STs is also fast. Then, until the count value of the number of STs becomes 0 or the next big hit is won, the change of the second special symbol and the second small hit game are alternately and repeatedly executed.

In the rush mode of the present embodiment, when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit is won, so that the second small hit game occurs frequently. The number of prize balls that can be obtained in the rush mode is 2100 when the number of ST times (70 times) small hit is won, assuming that the number of prize balls in one second small hit game is 30 balls. This is more than the maximum number of prize balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of this embodiment. Therefore, the series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be a privilege game comparable to the big hit game. In addition, since there is a possibility of a big hit game with a probability of 1/45 even during the rush mode, the rush mode is the most advantageous (or aimable) game mode for the player.

It should be noted that the number of STs in the rush mode is likely to be beneficial to the player if it is digested by the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable that the first special symbol in the pending state is not carried over to the rush mode. Therefore, when the transition to the rush mode is found, that is, when it is found that the first jackpot B is won in the game mode before the transition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 is suppressed. Control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled so that the operation of the time saving function for assisting the winning of the special winning opening 2101b is stopped or the winning assist function is lowered. Further, some kind of notification effect may be performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Control on the peripheral control board side]
Next, the process executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151.

[Sub-main processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-main processing of the present embodiment. The sub-main process is a process executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

When the peripheral control MPU4140a starts supplying power to the pachinko machine 1, it first performs an initial setting process (step S3001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" is started (step S3002).

Here, the peripheral control MPU4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms elapses and executes a 2 ms steady-state process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0".

When the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to "1" (YES in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to "0" (step S3003), and then performs 16 ms steady processing. Execute (step S3004). In the 16 ms steady-state process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speaker 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100.

When the peripheral control MPU4140a finishes the 16 ms steady-state process, it returns to the process of step S3002 again, and repeatedly executes the process of steps S3003 to S3004 described above every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4140a, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set to "1" (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") (NO in step S3002), until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Execute loop processing.

[16 ms steady processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, a 16 ms steady-state process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the above-mentioned sub-main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 16 ms steady-state processing of the present embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first executes a command analysis process for analyzing the command received from the main control board 4100 (step S3101). Next, an effect control process for controlling the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the control command (received fluctuation pattern command or the like) analyzed in the above-mentioned command analysis process (step S3102).

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process for controlling the effect of the lamp / LED provided on the pachinko machine 1 is executed (step S3104). Further, information for executing the effect such as a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 3041 and a process of transmitting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units to the motor drive board 3045 is output. The information output process to be performed is executed (step S3105). After that, a random number update process for updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process in step S3102 is executed (step S3106), and the 16 ms steady process is completed.

The 16 ms steady-state process is usually completed within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the peripheral control MPU4140a, the 16 ms steady-state process is executed from the beginning (the process of step S3101) 16 ms after the start of the process. There is no such thing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady-state process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub-main process (step S3002), and the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub-main process after the 16 ms steady-state process is completed. When it is determined (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady-state process is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the random number update process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. is not it. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the above-mentioned sub-main processing (FIG. 150).

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, the special winning opening 2101b) and the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. It has a control structure that can change 2 special symbols at the same time, and the winning area (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b, second starting opening 2102) and the driving operation of the game ball that the player should aim at according to the game state. A plurality of gaming states are provided so that (right-handed (second game state) and left-handed (first game state)) are different. In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with a game state display 1183 including an LED capable of clearly notifying the player of the timing of "right-handed" (second game state), so that the player is a beginner of the game. Also, it is possible to smoothly switch the hitting method (driving operation) as the game state shifts, without making a mistake between "left-handed" and "right-handed".

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a control signal for controlling the game state display 1183 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, thereby causing the player to "right-hand" in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It may be notified. Usually, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in the front view (beyond the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 notifies "right-handed", the player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (driving operation) without shifting the line of sight to the left end of the front view (function display unit 1180). It will be possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state (normal mode), a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state (rush preparation mode), and a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode). Then, in the rush mode, each time a second special symbol lottery is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, which is easy for even a beginner to win, the player has an opportunity to win the prize ball (small hit game or Big hit game) is given. Further, in the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player in the rush mode, the ratio of the number of game balls that can be acquired in the small hit game tends to be higher than the ratio of the number of game balls that can be acquired in the big hit game. As a result, since it is expected that a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be given more game balls than the big hit game, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game related to the small hit game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the rush mode (second advantageous gaming state) of the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state is the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (rush preparation) that activates the time-saving function generally advantageous to the player. It is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the mode (first advantageous gaming state). Then, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-accuracy non-time-saving game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time-saving function, the time-saving function is activated. Control to continue rush mode without activating. Since the small hit game of the present embodiment can provide a game that overturns the preconceived notion that it is more advantageous for the player to activate (give) the time saving function, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, the special winning opening 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 When the second special symbol based on is changed at the same time, when one hit (big hit, small hit) is derived, the other being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missed symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hits from overlapping between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and when the game shifts to another game state triggered by the big hit, before and after the shift. In addition, it is possible to prevent the other fluctuation from being executed across.

(Second Embodiment)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a first special symbol and a game ball to the second starting port 2102 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b). It has a control structure that can change the second special symbol based on the winning prize at the same time. In such control that can be changed at the same time, in order to prevent the specific game (small hit game, big hit game) from occurring in duplicate between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Needs control. In the above-described first embodiment, when one special symbol stops the fluctuation with a stop symbol showing a specific result (small hit, big hit), if the other special symbol is changing, the stop symbol is replaced with a missed symbol. By controlling the other special symbol so that it does not change during a specific game, a control structure that can be changed at the same time is formed.

In the second embodiment, various control patterns of the control structure that can be changed at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 186.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The members having the same functions as the game board 4 (see FIG. 114) of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Here, the characteristic configuration of the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described.

In the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment, the normal gate 2301, the second starting port 2102, the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, and the large winning opening 2103 are arranged in this order from the upstream. ing.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 first reaches the normal gate 2301. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 2301, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Further, a second starting port 2102 is arranged below the normal gate 2301. The second starting port is provided so as to be able to accept a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 2301 and a game ball that has not passed through. When the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2102, the second special symbol lottery is executed if the predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

Immediately below the second starting port 2102, a special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is arranged. The special winning opening 2101b is provided with a pair of movable members (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 that are opened at the upper part in an inverted "C" shape to convert the game ball into a state in which it is easy to accept (easy to accept). The pair of movable members 2111 normally hold a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) at intervals of about the diameter of the game ball. Since the special winning opening 2101b is provided with the second starting opening 2102 above, the special winning opening 2101b is configured so that the game ball cannot be accepted when the movable member 2111 is closed. When the movable member 2111 is won in the ordinary symbol lottery, it is converted from the closed state to the easily accepted state, which allows the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b. Then, when the game ball is accepted into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101, the first special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

Further, below the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the hits of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery trigger the opening operation, and the game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 can be accepted during the operation. The attacker device 2100 is arranged. The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is a so-called combi attacker device that opens the large winning opening 2103 by opening / closing operations of two opening / closing members (first opening / closing member 2106a and second opening / closing member 2106b) that slide in the front-rear direction. Details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (A).

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is arranged at the lower left portion of the front surface of the front component 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the first embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is provided with an LED that can clearly notify the timing of performing "right-handed" (second game state) in the game state display 1183, but in the present embodiment, the game state display is provided. A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the device 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (B).

Further, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment display 1920 is arranged in the upper right portion of the center accessory 2500 and in the upper right portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The 7-segment display 1920 is display-controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920, respectively, according to the gaming state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (C).

As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment and the game board 4 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 114) have different configurations as described above, but their playability (recommended game mode transition). , The recommended driving operation in the game mode) is the same.

Next, the configurations of the attacker device 2100, the function display unit 1180, and the 7-segment display 1920 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (C).

[Attacca device]
FIG. 153 (A) is a simplified structural diagram of the attacker device 2100 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

The attacker device 2100 includes an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (FIG. 118) for opening and closing the large winning opening 2103, the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b that can operate between the closed state and the open state, and the opening / closing member of 2. See). The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is characterized in that two opening / closing members (first opening / closing member 2106a and second opening / closing member 2106b) are provided for one large winning opening 2103.

The first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b normally maintain a closed state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed so that the game ball is not accepted by the large winning opening 2103, and the center accessory 2500 It is configured as a part of the guidance flow path 2110 that guides the game ball flowing down the game area on the right side to the game area below the center accessory 2500.

Then, when a hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the drive control of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 is performed after the variation display related to the lottery is completed, and the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing are performed. The slide opening / closing operation of the member 2106b in the front-rear direction is performed. The opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b is controlled at the same timing.

Here, the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b are arranged side by side at intervals on the upstream side and the downstream side of the induction flow path 2110. That is, the large winning opening 2103 has two openings that can accept the game ball when it is in the open state. The large winning opening 2103 is configured so that the game balls are merged inside regardless of which opening the game balls are received from, and the reception of the game balls is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment opens the large winning opening 2103 by opening two places by the first opening / closing member 2106a on the upstream side and the second opening / closing member 2106b on the downstream side. It is provided with a combi-tacca structure capable of accepting a plurality of game balls that roll the guidance flow path 2110 from the upstream to the downstream by opening the times to the large winning opening 2103.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153 (B) is an enlarged front view of the function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

The function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 composed of two LEDs for notifying that it is time to perform "right-handed" above the display unit 1181. Below the right-handed state indicator 1192, four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit". The first special symbol memory display 1184, which is arranged below the round display 1190 and further consists of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. And, the lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol placed on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101 is used as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 composed of eight LED groups for displaying is provided. Further, below the first special symbol display 1185, there are a second special symbol storage display 1187 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, and a second. To display the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol arranged on the left side of the special symbol storage display 1187 and drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2102 as the second special symbol. A second special symbol display 1186 composed of eight LED groups is provided.

Further, below the display unit 1181, a game status indicator 1183 composed of two LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal symbol composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending passages of the normal drawing gate 2301 are displayed. A storage display 1188 and a normal symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball passing through the normal symbol gate 2301 as a normal symbol are provided side by side. There is.

The right-handed state indicator 1192 of the present embodiment turns on the LED at the timing of performing "right-handed" (second game state) to notify the player of "right-handed". When it is time to perform "left-handed" (first game state), the LED is turned off.

In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball through the normal gate 2301 generated by "right-handed" is detected at the timing of "left-handed", a signal warning the player is sent to the main control board. It is transmitted from the 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message warning the liquid crystal display device 1900 to return to left-handed operation, and sounds an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). If "right-handed" is still detected after that, it is characterized in that penalty control is performed to impose a predetermined penalty that is disadvantageous to the player.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153 (C) is an enlarged front view of the 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

The 7-segment display 1920 displays information on the variable display (lottery process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the number of pending numbers. On the 7-segment display 1920, a first special symbol display unit 1921 composed of a 7-segment LED for displaying a variable display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and a holding number of the first special symbol are displayed. The first special symbol storage display unit 1922 composed of two LEDs, the fourth symbol display unit 1923 composed of one LED for displaying the fourth symbol related to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol. A second special symbol display unit 1924 consisting of a 7-segment LED for displaying a display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display unit 1925 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserved second special symbols. A fourth symbol display unit 1926 including one LED for displaying the fourth symbol related to the variation display of the second special symbol is provided.

The 7-segment LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 1921 and the second special symbol display unit 1924 represent variable display by repeating turning on and off (that is, blinking) of each segment in order, and are predetermined according to the result. The fluctuation result (lottery result) is displayed by lighting the segment. During standby, the same segment as when the lottery result is out of order is lit.

The two LEDs constituting the first special symbol storage display unit 1922 are turned off when the number of holds is "0", the upper LED is turned on when the number of holds is "1", and the lower LED is turned off. When the number of holds is "2", both LEDs are lit, when the number of holds is "3", the upper LED blinks, the lower LED is lit, and when the number of holds is "4", both LEDs are lit. Flashes.

The two LEDs constituting the second special symbol storage display unit 1925 are turned off when the number of holds is "0", the upper LED is turned on when the number of holds is "1", and the lower LED is turned off. When the number of holds is "2", both LEDs are lit. In the present embodiment, it is possible to store "1" hold of the second special symbol.

One LED constituting the 4th symbol display units 1923 and 1926 can emit red and green instead of monochromatic emission, and repeats turning on and off in red during variable display, and turns green when the fluctuation result is out of alignment. It lights up and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is a hit (big hit, small hit).

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state (rush preparation mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. Further, when the gaming state is a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Will be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display device for displaying the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is switched according to the gaming state. The transition of the gaming state is triggered by the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being a big hit, or the end of the assigned ST number of times. When the big hit is triggered, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 switch the special symbol to be displayed after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the end of the number of STs is triggered, when the ST final fluctuation ends and the probability change flag is set to off (step S513a in FIG. 129, step S513b in FIG. 137), the liquid crystal displays 1900 and 7 The special symbol to be displayed by the Seg display 1920 is switched.

[Game specs with special designs]
Subsequently, FIG. 154 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the above-described first embodiment will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 154 (A) and 154 (B), in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probabilistic state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Moreover, the probability of winning a small hit is always 1/3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), there are four types of jackpots and there is no change, but the presence or absence of the time saving function differs depending on the winning game state. In the present embodiment, the time saving function is given to the big hits other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, in order to enter the rush mode, there is no choice but to use the jackpot B of the first special symbol as an opportunity. Further, as shown in the above-mentioned time saving function setting process (FIG. 132), the time saving function is not added to the big hit generated in the rush mode.

As shown in FIG. 154 (D), the number of small hit types increases in this embodiment. The small hit of the present embodiment is provided with a second small hit D in addition to the second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C and the second small hit D differ in the opening mode of the large winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) and is opened only once, whereas the opening pattern F has a shorter opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds). ), Opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, there is a 50% probability that a second small hit C or a second small hit D will occur.

Of the open pattern E and the open pattern F, the open pattern F can be expected to win the large winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is provided with a large winning opening 2103 that can accept the game ball by opening at two places upstream and downstream of the guidance flow path 2110 through which the game ball flows down. Even if the opening time is short, the opening pattern F, which is opened twice, is expected to win a game ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the fluctuation result. The fluctuation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a hit is a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time when the result is a miss is a long-term fluctuation of 600 seconds. Further, when the game mode is the rush mode, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a shortened fluctuation having a range of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the transition of the gaming state (FIG. 147) in the above-described first embodiment will be described.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rush preparation mode can be shifted to the occurrence of the first jackpot A (FIG. 146), but in the present embodiment, the first jackpot A, the second jackpot A, and the second jackpot A are available in the normal mode. It is possible to shift to the occurrence of 2 big hits B (FIG. 154). Then, the shift from the rush preparation mode to the other game mode is due to the shift to the normal mode due to the variable digestion of the number of STs, or the shift to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first jackpot B. Further, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) depends on the variable digestion of the number of STs. In rush mode, no matter which big hit occurs, the mode does not shift.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a hit (small hit, big hit), the fluctuation time is shortened by 1 second. Originally, the game mode for promoting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the rush mode, but in this mode, there is a high possibility that the winning of the second starting port 2102 is aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, if the result of the second special symbol lottery leads to a loss, it may be set to a long-term fluctuation (600 seconds), or the game ball may be launched toward the attacker device 2100 after the small hit result is confirmed. By setting the opening timing so as not to be in time for opening the big winning opening 2103 in the winning game, or by providing multiple types of opening modes to make it difficult to guess the opening pattern, the second in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Suppress the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery.

In the present embodiment, the game in the rush preparation mode in which the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 is recommended, that is, "right-handed" is diversified. In the first embodiment, even if the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2102 by "right-handing", the fluctuation of the second special symbol takes a long time, so in reality, only the fluctuation of the first special symbol can be found to be interesting. There wasn't. However, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode is short when the hit result is derived, and the short-time fluctuation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. Then, if a big hit result is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, the number of STs is newly given and the time saving function is continued. For this reason, it becomes possible to find an interest in the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the game quality in the rush preparation mode is improved.

[Control pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. The outline of the control pattern in the control structure capable of simultaneously changing the second special symbol based on the above will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous fluctuation control structure. Hereinafter, the outline of the four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (D).

First, FIG. 156 (A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. In the basic control pattern, as described in the first embodiment described above, when one special symbol becomes a hit result, the other changing special symbol is forcibly replaced with a missed result and the fluctuation is stopped. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped at the small hit stop symbol, the first special symbol being changed changes the determined big hit stop symbol to a predetermined missed stop symbol. Replace and stop fluctuating with the detached stop symbol.

Specifically, the control process of the first embodiment will be described. In the second changing process (FIG. 137) relating to the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is timed up and the small hit stop symbol is changed. When is stopped, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to on (YES in step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO in step S504b → YES in step S531b → S532b). As a result, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) relating to the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a → Step S250a).

Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the fluctuating first special symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined missing symbol (YES in step S1001a → step S1002a → step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a hit (hit determination process) is a step of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 127) executed when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. It is executed in S307a, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stop symbol (here, the jackpot symbol) is replaced with a predetermined out-of-order symbol.

As described above, in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, the interlocking flag for interlocking the game on the other special symbol side with the one special symbol side is turned on at the timing when one special symbol for deriving the hit stops fluctuating. Set to state. For this reason, the other special symbol generated during the fluctuation of one special symbol is forcibly removed by the interlocking stop control, but the presence or absence of the interlocking stop control cannot be determined at the start of the fluctuation, so that the hit determination process is performed. (Lottery process) had to be executed.

In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to the ON state at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to fluctuate, and the other special symbol has the interlocking flag at the start of fluctuation. If is on, an example of setting the flag to stop fluctuating with a missed symbol without executing the hit determination process (without lottery) will be described.

The details of the control process of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166.

Next, FIG. 156 (B) is a timing chart showing a priority control pattern. In the priority control pattern, the results derived from both special symbols are compared, the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is removed and stopped fluctuating.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when the fluctuation of deriving the small hit is executed in the second special symbol and the fluctuation of deriving the big hit occurs in the first special symbol, both lottery As a result of comparing the results, the first special symbol for deriving a jackpot advantageous to the player stops fluctuating at the jackpot symbol. Then, in the second special symbol, the determined small hit stop symbol is replaced with a predetermined missed stop symbol, and the second special symbol fluctuates and stops at the missed stop symbol.

In this way, in the priority control pattern, the priority special symbol is determined among the special symbols that change simultaneously according to the lottery result derived from the special symbol, that is, the special symbol that derives a more advantageous result for the player is prioritized. Can be executed. In the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above, even if the special symbol is a big hit in the hit determination at the start of fluctuation, if the other special symbol that is a small hit stops fluctuating first, it is forcibly removed. Although it was set, we will not unintentionally miss such a special design that will be a big hit. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original playability of the game machine as compared with the basic control pattern.

The details of the priority control pattern control process in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175.

Next, FIG. 156 (C) is a timing chart showing the interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern interrupts the other special symbol while the winning game based on the winning result derived from one special symbol is being performed, and after the winning game is completed, the other special symbol resumes the fluctuation of the remaining time. Is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), when the variation of deriving the small hit is executed by the second special symbol and the variation of deriving the big hit is executed by the first special symbol, the second special symbol is the small hit. When the fluctuation is stopped at the symbol, the first special symbol temporarily suspends the fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends the fluctuation. When the small hit game is completed, the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation.

As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably executed according to the result based on the acquired random numbers. In the above-mentioned basic control pattern and priority control pattern, one of the special symbols that fluctuates at the same time is forcibly set to be out of order regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( The hit judgment result based on random numbers) is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original playability of the game machine more than the above-mentioned priority control pattern. In addition, it is possible to make it appear that the hit game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is related to the effect of the fluctuation at the time of resumption, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The details of the interruption control pattern control process in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181.

Next, FIG. 156 (D) is a timing chart showing a reset control pattern. The reset control pattern is based on the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, and resets the residual fluctuation time when the other special symbol that has been interrupted is restarted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), when the variation of deriving the small hit is executed by the second special symbol and the variation of deriving the big hit is executed by the first special symbol, the second special symbol is the small hit. When the fluctuation is stopped at the symbol, the first special symbol temporarily suspends the fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol suspends the fluctuation. Up to this point, the control is the same as the lottery control pattern described above. In the reset control pattern, when the small hit game ends and the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation, the fluctuation is restarted after newly setting the fluctuation time after the restart.

As described above, in the reset control pattern, the degree of freedom in the effect of the fluctuation at the time of resumption is increased as compared with the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, the recommended game can be provided by setting the fluctuation time at the time of resumption according to the game situation.

The details of the reset control pattern control process in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, the characteristic control processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, the forced loss flag of the other special symbol is set to the on state at the timing when the special symbol for which the hit is derived starts to fluctuate, and the forced loss flag of the other special symbol is set at the start of fluctuation. When it is in the ON state, it features a control structure that stops fluctuating with a missed symbol (without lottery) without executing a hit determination process.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation start processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S306a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol that sets the first special symbol to be missed by no lottery is on. (Step S311a). Then, when the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311a), the processes of steps S307a and S308a of performing the lottery of the first special symbol and setting the lottery result information are executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308a described above indicates the winning result (step S313a). Then, in the case of a flag indicating a hit result (YES in step S313a), a forced loss flag of the second special symbol for making the change of the second special symbol generated during the change of the first special symbol a loss result. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if it is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, a flag indicating a missed result (NO in step S313a), the process proceeds to the process of step S309a without executing the process of step S314a.

On the other hand, when the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S311a), the main control MPU4100a sets the flag indicating the loss result of the first special symbol and the loss information command (step). S312a). After that, the process proceeds to step S309a.

In this way, in the first fluctuation start processing, when the first special symbol derives the hit result, the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state, so that the first special symbol is generated after the fluctuation starts. The second special symbol to be used is set to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[1st jackpot game processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced disconnection flag of the second special symbol to the off state when the first big hit game is completed (step S751a).

[1st interlocking setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first selects the outlier symbol determined in the process of step S312a of the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 157) described above. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). After that, the process proceeds to step S1004a.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second fluctuation start processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S306b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the second special symbol, which sets the second special symbol to be out of the lottery, is on. (Step S311b). Then, when the forced disconnection flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311b), the processes of steps S307b and S308b in which the second special symbol is drawn and the lottery result information is set are executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the process of step S308b described above indicates the winning result (step S313b). Then, in the case of a flag indicating a hit result (YES in step S313b), a forced loss flag of the first special symbol for making the change of the first special symbol generated during the change of the second special symbol a loss result. Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if it is not a flag indicating a hit result, that is, a flag indicating a missed result (NO in step S313b), the process proceeds to the process of step S309b without executing the process of step S314b.

On the other hand, when the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S311b), the main control MPU4100a sets the flag indicating the loss result of the second special symbol and the loss information command (step). S312b). After that, the process proceeds to step S309b.

In this way, in the second fluctuation start processing, when the second special symbol derives the hit result, the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state, so that the second special symbol is generated after the fluctuation starts. The first special symbol to be used is set to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[2nd jackpot game processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second jackpot game process (FIG. 139) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second big hit game is completed (step S751b).

[Second small hit game processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second small hit game processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second small hit game process (FIG. 141) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second small hit game is completed (step S951b).

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 uses the outlier symbol determined in the process of step S312b of the above-mentioned second fluctuation start process (FIG. 160) as the second. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101b). After that, the process proceeds to step S1004b.

[Right-handed penalty setting process]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the right-handed penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 regarding a warning and a penalty for "right-handed" when it is time to perform "left-handed".

In this process, when "right-handed" is performed in the game state where "left-handed" is recommended, a warning is first given, and if "right-handed" is performed after the warning, a penalty is imposed. Is set.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state) (step S1201). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of "right-handed" means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It should be noted that the acceptance detection of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

The main control MPU4100a ends this process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201) or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). To do.

Then, when the main control MPU4100a detects "right-handed" (YES in step S1202), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to "left-handed". Whether or not the warning has been executed may be determined by checking whether or not the warning execution flag set when the warning timer, which will be described later, has timed up, is in the ON state.

If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), the main control MPU4100a sets the warning time (warning timer) (step S1204). Then, when the warning timer times up (YES in step S1205), the warning execution flag is set to the on state (step S1206), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the warning has already been executed (YES in step S1203), the main control MPU4100a determines that the "right-handed" is continued despite the warning, and therefore imposes a penalty for a predetermined period.

The main control MPU4100a first sets a penalty timer, which is a period for imposing a penalty (step S1211), and sets the forced disconnection flag of the second special symbol to the ON state (step S1212). Then, until the penalty timer is timed up (NO in step S1213), the forced disconnection flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

When the penalty timer times out (YES in step S1213), the main control MPU4100a sets the forced disconnection flag and the warning executed flag of the second special symbol to the off state (step S1214), and ends this process.

In this way, when "right-handed" is detected in the normal mode in which "left-handed" is recommended, the player is first warned to return to "left-handed". If the "right-handed" is still continued, a penalty period will be given, which will result in a loss in no lottery even if the game ball is won in the second starting port 2102 by "right-handed". Then, since the player is notified (suggested) that the penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be guided to perform an appropriate driving operation according to the game mode.

Subsequently, characteristic processing of the control executed by the peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the liquid crystal display processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 with respect to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (high accuracy non-time saving state) (step S3201). Then, when the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state) or the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) (NO in step S3201), the main control MPU4100a seconds. It is determined whether or not the hit variation for deriving the hit result is executed on the special symbol side (step S3202). Then, when the hit variation is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit variation is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a normal display effect (step S3204).

Here, the blackout refers to a display effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is dark and noisy. The blackout starts when the special symbol to be displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 starts the fluctuation for deriving the hit result, and continues until the hit symbol is confirmed by the fluctuation. The special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 is due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port, which is not recommended for the player in the game mode. Therefore, the blackout can be said to be a hit warning effect for notifying that a hit fluctuation has occurred due to a special symbol that is not recommended in the game mode.

[Right-handed penalty notification processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a procedure of right-handed penalty notification processing in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notification process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the warning and the penalty notification for the “right-handed” at the timing of performing the “left-handed”. It is one. Further, it is an effect process corresponding to the right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

The peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state) (step S3301). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of "right-handed" means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It should be noted that the acceptance detection of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

The peripheral control MPU4140a ends this process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302). To do.

Then, when the peripheral control MPU4140a detects "right-handed" (YES in step S3302), the peripheral control MPU4140a determines whether or not the warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether or not the warning has been executed may be determined by checking the state of the warning execution flag set on the main control MPU4100a side described above.

If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU4140a sets the warning time (warning timer) (step S3304). The warning timer may acquire timer information from the above-mentioned main control MPU4100a side. Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes a warning notification that displays a message "Please return to left-handed" (step S3305). At this time, the warning sound may be sounded for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the warning may be suggested. Until the warning timer times up (NO in step S3306), a warning notification is performed (step S3305), and when the warning timer times out (YES in step S3306), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the warning has already been executed (YES in step S3303), the peripheral control MPU4140a is determined to continue "right-handed" despite the warning, and is therefore determined by the main control MPU4100a. A period penalty will be imposed.

Peripheral control MPU4140a sets a penalty timer (step S3311). Then, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes a penalty notification for notifying that the penalty has been imposed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer is timed up, and when the penalty timer is timed up (YES in step S3313), this process is terminated.

<Effect of basic control pattern>
As described above, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence / absence of interlocking stop control is determined at the timing when the special symbol for deriving the hit starts to fluctuate, so that the other special symbol started after that hits at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to stop the fluctuation with the out-of-order symbol without executing the determination process (without lottery). Even if the hit determination process is executed, unnecessary processing can be omitted in the other special symbol for which the loss result is forcibly set, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Subsequently, the characteristic control processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the priority control pattern, the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is controlled to stop fluctuating at the outlier symbol. It features a structure.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation start processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S307a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the first special symbol is advantageous to the player as compared with the variation of the second special symbol. The first priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 168.

After that, the main control MPU4100a executes the process of step S308a to end this process.

[First priority judgment process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the above-mentioned first fluctuation start process (FIG. 167).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (step S361a). Then, when there is no second special symbol being changed (NO in step SS361a), since there is no comparison target, this process ends.

When the main control MPU4100a has a changing second special symbol (YES in step S361a), the main control MPU4100a acquires the result of the hit determination processing of the changing second special symbol (step S362a), and obtains the result of the hit determination process of the changing second special symbol (step S362a). It is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307a of the variation start process (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

When the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (YES in step S364a), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the second special symbol is an off result (step S365a). Then, if the result is out of alignment (YES in step S365a), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a loss result, that is, if it is a small hit or a big hit result (NO in step S365a), the forced loss flag that forcibly removes the second special symbol is set to the ON state (step S366a). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, when the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364a), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is set to be out of order (step S367a). ), End this process.

In this way, in the first priority determination process, if there is a second special symbol that is changing when the change is started in the first special symbol, it is determined which variation result is advantageous to the player. If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is taken as the result of being removed, and if the first special symbol is not advantageous, the first special symbol is taken as the result of being removed. Prevent duplicate hit games with special symbols.

[Processing during the first fluctuation]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variable processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first variable processing (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is on after determining that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501a. (Step S551a). The forced loss flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

Then, when the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S551a), the main control MPU4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with an off symbol and turns the forced disconnection flag off. Set (step S552a).

After that, the main control MPU4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the fluctuating first special symbol is replaced with the result of the deviation by the second special symbol whose fluctuation is started later, the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol is removed. replace.

[1st interlocking setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, it determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a). ). The forced loss flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366b of the second priority determination process (FIG. 171) described later.

Then, when the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S1111a), the main control MPU4100a replaces the stop symbol of the first special symbol with an off symbol and turns the forced disconnection flag off. Set (step S1112a). If the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is missed in the hit determination process at the start of fluctuation (step S307a of the first fluctuation start process). The result is.

After that, the main control MPU4100a displays the detached stop symbol determined in the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, in the case where the fluctuating first special symbol is replaced with the result of the deviation by the second special symbol whose fluctuation is started later, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is performed rather than the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with an outlier.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second fluctuation start processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S307b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the second special symbol is advantageous to the player as compared with the variation of the first special symbol. The second priority determination process for determination is executed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

After that, the main control MPU4100a executes the process of step S308b to end this process.

[Second priority judgment process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second priority determination process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-mentioned second fluctuation start process (FIG. 171).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S361b). Then, when there is no first special symbol that is changing (NO in step SS361b), there is no comparison target, so this process ends.

When the main control MPU4100a has a fluctuating first special symbol (YES in step S361b), the main control MPU4100a acquires the result of the hit determination process of the fluctuating first special symbol (step S362b), and obtains the result of the hit determination process of the fluctuating first special symbol (step S362b). It is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307b of the variation start process (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

When the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (YES in step S364b), the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the first special symbol is an off result (step S365b). Then, if the result is out of alignment (YES in step S365b), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a loss result, that is, if it is a big hit result (NO in step S365b), the forced loss flag that forcibly removes the first special symbol is set to the ON state (step S366b). End the process.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, when the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364b), the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is set to be out of order (step S367b). ), End this process.

In this way, in the second priority determination process, if there is a first special symbol that is changing when the change is started in the second special symbol, it is determined which variation result is advantageous to the player. If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is taken as the result of being removed, and if the second special symbol is not advantageous, the second special symbol is taken as the result of being removed. Prevent duplicate hit games with special symbols.

[Processing during the second fluctuation]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variable processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second variable process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is on after determining that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501b. (Step S551b). The forced loss flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366a of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) described above.

Then, when the forced disengagement flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S551b), the main control MPU4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with the disengagement and turns the forced disengagement flag off. Set (step S552b).

After that, the main control MPU4100a displays the stop symbol determined in the process of step S502b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the second special symbol that is changing is replaced with the result of the first special symbol that started to change later, the stop symbol that was determined at the start of the change at the change stop timing of the second special symbol is removed. replace.

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, it determines whether or not the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is on (step S1111b). ). The forced loss flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the process of step S366a of the first priority determination process (FIG. 168) described above.

Then, when the forced disconnection flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S1111b), the main control MPU4100a replaces the stop symbol of the second special symbol with an off symbol and turns the forced disconnection flag off. Set (step S1112b). If the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S1111b), the second special symbol is missed in the hit determination process at the start of fluctuation (step S307b of the second fluctuation start process). The result is.

After that, the main control MPU4100a displays the detached stop symbol determined in the process of step S307b or step S1112b on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113b). Therefore, in the case where the changing second special symbol is replaced with the result of the deviation by the first special symbol whose fluctuation is started later, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is performed rather than the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with an outlier.

Subsequently, characteristic processing of the control executed by the peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

As described above, the special symbol in which the forced disconnection flag is set to the ON state is replaced with the offset stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. In such a special symbol, since the stop symbol before replacement is a hit (small hit, big hit), the display content (reach effect, etc.) of the character or the like displayed during the fluctuation in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the fluctuation stop time. There is a possibility that a feeling of strangeness may occur with the displayed contents (off) of. For example, it is unnatural if the character on the player side is dominant in the battle production and is about to win, but suddenly switches to defeat. Since many players recognize the fluctuation result by the effect display of the character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is desired to avoid the unnaturalness (uncomfortable feeling) that occurs in the transition of the effect display.

Therefore, in the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, a process of delaying the fluctuation result notification timing (effect display indicating deviation) of the special symbol by the effect display of the character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is delayed from the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. Execute.

[Forced loss production additional processing]
FIG. 175 (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the forced loss effect additional processing in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment. The forced loss effect addition process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 with respect to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the ON state (step S3321). Here, the forced miss flag is set to the ON state for the special symbol in which the hit stop symbol is replaced with the missed stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. When the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the off state (NO in step S3321), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4140a, when the forced disconnection flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the ON state (YES in step S3321), the special symbol in which the forced disconnection flag is set to the ON state is The liquid crystal display device 1900 determines whether or not it is a target for variable display (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is fluctuated on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol is fluctuated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. Then, when the special symbol in which the forced disconnection flag is set to the ON state is not the target of variable display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), this process ends.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU4140a is added to the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the special symbol in which the forced disconnection flag is set to the ON state is the target to be variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322). The disconnection notification effect is set (step S3323), and this process ends.

Here, the additional loss notification effect is an effect of notifying the deviation in a predetermined period by the effect display of the character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in the character battle effect). Shown. The display contents excluding the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

FIG. 175 (B) is a timing chart of the special symbol variation and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional disengagement notification effect is set in the above-mentioned forced disengagement effect addition process.

As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol that switches from the hit stop symbol to the stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the effect during the fluctuation is a game. There is a high possibility that it is a production that makes people expect (the character on the player side is dominant in the battle production). Despite the fact that such an effect has been executed, it is unnatural if the off-set confirmation effect (defeat of the character on the player side) is suddenly executed at the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, after the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, the additional miss notification effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make a production transition that does not make the player feel uncomfortable from the expected production (superiority) to the definite production (defeat), and it is possible to provide a production that does not make the player feel uncomfortable (unnatural).

<Effect of priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player by comparing the results derived by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is Since the fluctuation is stopped at the out-of-order symbol, the special symbol that derives the big hit according to the fluctuation stop timing, unlike the basic control pattern, is not processed as the out-of-order result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original playability (game property) of the game machine as compared with the basic control pattern.

In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the results derived from the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared, and the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed. Not limited to. When both derive the jackpot, the special symbol that started to fluctuate may be prioritized, or the priority result may be ranked according to the game mode, and the priority special symbol may be determined according to the ranking. ..

Further, when the effect of the special symbol that is forcibly removed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the additional loss notification effect is set so that the character display effect ends later than the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. As a result, even the effect display accompanying the hit result can be transitioned to the effect display for deriving the loss result, so that the player who reads the result from the effect display such as a character can recognize the loss without discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the uncomfortable effect display.

<Interruption control pattern>
Subsequently, the characteristic control processing in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

The interruption control pattern is characterized by a control structure in which while a hit game based on the hit result derived from one special symbol is performed, the other special symbol suspends the fluctuation and resumes the remaining fluctuation after the corresponding game is completed. To do.

[1st special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is on in the process of step S100a. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol with the detached symbol was executed, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the first is performed. 2 While the hit game is being performed on the special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (paused) as it is, so no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol with the detached symbol was executed, but in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the first is performed. While the hit game is being performed on the 1 special symbol side, the game on the 2nd special symbol side is interrupted (paused) as it is, so no processing is performed.

Subsequently, characteristic processing of the control executed by the peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted with the occurrence of the hit game on one special symbol side, but if the effect performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after resumption, the corresponding game is applicable. It may not be appropriate for later production.

Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the resumption effect change process for changing the effect after resuming the interrupted special symbol from the predetermined effect selected at the start of the fluctuation and performed before the interruption is executed.

[Resume production change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the restart effect change process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The restart effect change process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 with respect to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

The peripheral control MPU4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the game is currently being played (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the interlocking flag is set to the on state at the start of the winning game, and is set to the off state at the end of the winning game. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the ON state. Then, when the winning game is not in progress (NO in step S3331), this process ends because there is no interrupted change that is the target of the effect change.

Next, when the peripheral control MPU4140a is in the hit game (YES in step S3331), it determines whether or not there is an interrupted fluctuation (step S3332). This may determine whether or not the first processing flag or the second processing flag is "2". When the first variable processing (FIG. 129) or the second variable processing (FIG. 137) is executed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing), the first processing flag or the first processing flag or the first. 2 The processing flag is set to "2". Then, if there is no interrupted change (NO in step S3332), the present process is terminated because there is no target for changing the effect.

Next, if there is an interrupted fluctuation (YES in step S3332), the peripheral control MPU4140a determines whether or not the fluctuation is a hit (step S3333). Then, if it is a hit (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether or not the hit is more advantageous to the player than the hit of the hit game currently being executed (step S3334). Here, the judgment that is advantageous to the player is the privilege that the player can obtain, the specified priority, etc., as in the judgment of which special symbol is prioritized in the above-mentioned priority control pattern. It will be done accordingly.

Then, when the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game that is more advantageous to the player than the hit game currently being executed (YES in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU4140a produces a step-up effect as an effect after restarting. Is set (step S3335), and this process ends.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU4140a derives a hit game in which the interrupted fluctuation is not as much as the hit game currently being executed (NO in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU4140a sets a bonus effect as an effect after restarting (step). S3336), this process is terminated.

Further, when the interrupted fluctuation derives the deviation (NO in step S3333), the peripheral control MPU4140a sets the related effect as the effect after restarting (step S3337), and ends this process.

[Example of restart production]
FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect after resumption in the resumption effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, an example is a case in which the variation of the second special symbol for which the hit is derived first is executed, and the variation of the first special symbol, which is started to be executed later, is interrupted with the remaining time t at the stop timing of the variation. Explain to.

The case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, the small hit C is generated by the second special symbol, and then the big hit B is generated by the first special symbol. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the fluctuation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a step-up effect that makes it appear as if the small hit C has evolved into the big hit B is set to be executed. .. Specifically, the wave after the small hit game changes to a rough wave, and a big hit arrives.

The case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, the jackpot A is generated by the second special symbol, and then the jackpot B is generated by the first special symbol. In the jackpot A of the second special symbol and the jackpot B of the first special symbol, it is assumed that the jackpot A of the second special symbol is given a privilege that is more advantageous to the player. In this case, it is as if the jackpot game of the first special symbol was given along with the jackpot game of the second special symbol as the effect (restart effect) corresponding to the fluctuation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart. Set so that the bonus effect shown in is executed. Specifically, the rough waves after the big hit game are once settled and changed to rough waves again, and the big hit is produced. In the bonus effect, especially when the interruption fluctuation leads to a small hit, the opening timing of the large winning opening 2103 during the small hit game is notified by a countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. A small hit game can be shown as an additional privilege added to the hit game executed when the fluctuation is interrupted.

In this way, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the hit game on the first special symbol side and the hit game on the second special symbol side are a series of hits (the operation of the attacker device 2100 in the double hit game is a series of operations). A production that makes it look as if it is there is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect after resumption from becoming an effect that is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to show continuous hits as a series of hits to enhance the interest of the game. A game can be provided.

The case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, the small hit C is generated by the second special symbol, but the first special symbol interrupted at this time is lost. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the fluctuation (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a related effect such as the afterglow of the small hit game (as expected to develop from the small hit game). Is set to be executed. Specifically, after the small hit game, a temporary wave will rise, but it will return gently, and the production will end without shifting to a new hit game.

In addition, when the interrupted fluctuation is out of alignment and the result is derived as in the case (C) described above, it is not possible to obtain the effect of making the hit game before and after, such as the step-up effect and the bonus effect, related to each other. , The resumption of fluctuations may be stopped.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 as a modification of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern in which the interrupted fluctuation ends without restarting when the interrupted fluctuation is out of alignment and the result is derived will be described. To do. A different control process will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

[1st interlocking setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stopped symbol determined at the start of the change of the first special symbol is out of alignment. (Step S1121a). Then, if it is out of alignment (YES in step S1121a), the determined outlier symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). After that, in the processes after step S1004a, the process for stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, when the determined stop symbol of the first special symbol being changed is not out of place, that is, it is a hit (NO in step S1121a), the main control MPU4100a continues the current state, that is, the above-mentioned interruption. As in the control pattern, the stop state (suspended state) is temporarily set (step S1021a), and this process is terminated.

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stopped symbol determined at the start of the change of the second special symbol is out of alignment. (Step S1121b). Then, if it is out of alignment (YES in step S1121b), the determined outlier symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (liquid crystal display device 1900 or 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122b). After that, in the processes after step S1004b, the process for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, when the determined stop symbol of the second special symbol being changed is not out of place, that is, it is a hit (NO in step S1121b), the main control MPU4100a continues the current state, that is, the above-mentioned interruption. As in the control pattern, the stop state (suspended state) is temporarily set (step S1021b), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the modified example of the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the control for forcibly disengaging and stopping the other special symbol at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one hit in the above-mentioned basic control pattern, and the interruption Combination control is performed with a control in which the other special symbol is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one hit in the control pattern, and the other special symbol is restarted after the corresponding game.

In the modified example, the special symbol that derives the hit is stopped only when the other special symbol is missed at the fluctuation stop timing, and the hit is interrupted. As a result, the above-mentioned related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. Therefore, the restart effect due to the fluctuation interruption is either a step-up effect or a bonus effect, and the execution of the restart effect itself can be a notice effect (hit confirmation effect) with a high degree of expectation.

<Effect of interruption control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, it is possible to perform variable execution of all the generated first special symbol and second special symbol according to the result based on the acquired random numbers. In the above-mentioned basic control pattern and priority control pattern, one of the special symbols that fluctuates at the same time is forcibly set to be out of order regardless of the acquired random number, but in the interruption control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( The hit judgment result based on random numbers) is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original playability of the game machine more than the above-mentioned basic control pattern and priority control pattern.

Further, in the interruption control pattern, while the winning game based on the winning result derived from one special symbol is being performed, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuations are restarted after the corresponding game is completed. At this time, the effect corresponding to the restarted fluctuation (restart effect) is newly set according to the game situation before and after (the hit game on one special symbol side and the game derived from the change). As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort even when the interrupted fluctuation is resumed. In addition, when the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game, the restart effect can make it appear that the corresponding game is related to the hit game on one of the special symbols, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, the characteristic control processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

In the reset control pattern, while the hit game based on the hit result derived from one special symbol is performed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the fluctuation interrupted after the end of the corresponding game is reviewed according to the game state. It features a control structure that resumes afterwards.

[Processing during the first fluctuation]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variable processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first variable processing (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521a until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is timed up in the process of step S501a. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the process of step S521a (step S561a).

Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134a of the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 183) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the on state when the reset setting process that resets the fluctuation time of the interrupted fluctuation according to the game state is executed.

[1st interlocking setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a (step S1131a). Then, when the reset flag is on (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended state) as in the above-mentioned interruption control pattern (step S1021a). End the process.

On the other hand, when the reset flag is not on (NO in step S1131a), the main control MPU4100a acquires the timer value of the first fluctuation timer (step S1132a). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the game state (step S1133a), the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134a), and then this process is terminated. Here, the processes of steps S1132a to S1134a are reset setting processes. The target to be reset in the interrupted fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control content related to the fluctuation time such as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the change of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the change after the restart is executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the off state, and temporarily stops. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the first variable processing is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state and the subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, the fluctuation). Will be resumed).

[Processing during the second fluctuation]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variable processing in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second variable process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521b until the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is timed up in the process of step S501b. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the process of step S521b (step S561b).

Here, the reset flag is set to the ON state in the process of step S1134b of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the on state when the reset setting process that resets the fluctuation time of the interrupted fluctuation according to the game state is executed.

[Second interlocking setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b (step S1131b). Then, when the reset flag is on (YES in step S1131b), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (suspended state) as in the above-mentioned interruption control pattern (step S1021b). End the process.

On the other hand, when the reset flag is not on (NO in step S1131b), the main control MPU4100a acquires the timer value of the second fluctuation timer (step S1132b). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the game state (step S1133b), the reset flag is set to the on state (step S1134b), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the change of the second special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the change after the restart is executed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the on state, and the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the off state, and temporarily stops. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the processing during the second fluctuation is restarted, the reset flag is returned to the off state and the subtraction of the reset timer value starts (that is, the fluctuation). Will be resumed).

<Effect of reset control pattern>
According to the reset control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated in the same manner as the above-mentioned interruption control pattern can be variablely executed according to the result based on the acquired random numbers. Therefore, the reset control pattern can maintain the original playability of the game machine more than the above-mentioned basic control pattern and priority control pattern.

In addition, the reset control pattern changes the remaining fluctuation time of the interrupted special symbol according to the gaming state. Here, the interruption of the fluctuation of the special symbol is caused by the hit game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode after the corresponding game has shifted to another game mode. Therefore, if the fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is restarted as it is, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, according to the reset control pattern, the control contents such as the fluctuation time are reviewed for the fluctuation restarted after the hit game, so that the fluctuation according to the game state to be executed is provided without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. be able to. In addition, since the degree of freedom in the production of fluctuations at the time of resumption is increased as compared with the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Specifically, it may be reviewed according to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (FIG. 154 (E)) described above. For example, when the fluctuation that derives the result of the second special symbol is interrupted, if the game mode after the transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, it is reset to the long-time fluctuation, and the game mode after the transition is the rush. If it is a mode, it may be reset to a short-time fluctuation.

Further, when the game mode is the rush mode, it is desired to digest the number of STs and frequently generate the small hit C and the small hit D of the second special symbol. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 186, the reset setting when the first special symbol for deriving the jackpot occurs in the state where the number of STs remains in the rush mode will be described.

FIG. 186 is a timing chart illustrating the reset setting process of the interruption variation in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment. As described above, when the first special symbol for deriving the jackpot occurs in the rush mode with the number of STs remaining, the number of STs given in the current game is digested as much as possible before the first special symbol is displayed. I would like to welcome a big hit game (that is, grant a new number of STs).

Therefore, if a jackpot fluctuation occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining number of STs is less than a predetermined number (here, less than 5), the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol. The fluctuation time after resumption, which is reset when the data is set, is set to t1 for a long time. The long-time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which a small hit game can be expected to occur.

Then, while the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol resumes the fluctuation of t1 for a long time, the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol occurs, and the stop timing of the small hit fluctuation is reached. Then, the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted again. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short fluctuation of 1 second (FIG. 154 (E)), the number of STs is digested at a good tempo.

Then, when the remaining number of STs is one, the fluctuation time after resuming resetting is set to t2 for a short time. The short-time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which the fluctuation does not end even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the number of STs becomes 0 occurs. is there. As a result, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol that frequently interrupts can be stopped in a probabilistic state in which the number of STs is effective, that is, the jackpot result is determined, and thus disturbs the original game playability of the gaming machine. Never.

As described above, according to the reset control pattern, the fluctuation time after resuming the fluctuation of the interrupted special symbol can be adjusted according to the gaming state, so that not only the fluctuation control of the interrupted special symbol but also the fluctuation control of the interrupted special symbol can be adjusted. The fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol in the game state can also be adjusted. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly respond to a wide variety of expected game playability, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the reset control pattern as well, as in the above-mentioned interruption control pattern, the effect corresponding to the restarted fluctuation (restart effect) is displayed in the game situation before and after (the hit game on one special symbol side and the game derived from the change). If it is newly set according to the above, it is possible to provide a more comfortable effect. In addition, when the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game, the restart effect can make it appear that the corresponding game is related to the hit game on one of the special symbols, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

Based on the above, according to the present invention, a control structure that employs any or a combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the reset control pattern mentioned in the first embodiment and the second embodiment is provided. It is possible to prevent the specific game (small hit game, big hit game) from being duplicated between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and to be able to change at the same time. Here, even if the winning of the game ball to the winning area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are put into a standby state. The difference between the winning tempo of the game ball (that is, the game tempo of the player) and the lottery game tempo has caused a decline in the interest of the game. In the present invention, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned decrease in the interest of the game by the simultaneous fluctuation control.

(Third Embodiment)
In the first and second embodiments described above, the game mode is changed from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode when the big hit game ends, but the rush preparation mode is started even if the big hit game ends. It may be the one that shifts to the rush mode. Such an example will be described below as a third embodiment.

[Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball as a game medium (also simply referred to as a “ball”) when a player operates the handle device 500. It is provided with a frame-shaped front component 1110A for partitioning the inner circumference of the game area 1100 into which the game is driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

The game panel 1200 of this example is a transparent panel plate 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110A and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component 1110A. A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A is provided. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. The function display unit 1180 is arranged so that it can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1. A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) that is visibly attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. As described above, the board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 187, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle of the obstacle nails. A center accessory 2500 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center accessory 2500.

Further, behind the center accessory 2500, there is provided an effect display device 1900 that displays an effect with a large area in front view so as to attract the attention of the player. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by synthesizing decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1900.

Further, above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a display area smaller than that of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display image information obtained by synthesizing decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like.

On the other hand, from the right side region to the lower region of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, the second big winning opening 2103b and the second starting opening 2102 of the second attacker device 2100b are provided in order from the upstream. On the other hand, from the left side region to the lower region of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, the normal gate 2301, the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b), and the first attacker are in order from the upstream. The first large winning opening 2103a of the device 2100a is provided. Further, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided in the lower left area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100.

Here, the first starting port 2101 is a constant winning opening 2101a in which a game ball can always win a prize at a substantially center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a movable piece (normally). It is configured to have a special winning opening 2101b in which a game ball can be won only when the electric accessory) 2111 is operated. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b), the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 188) causes the game ball to enter (win). Detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, a random number for the first special symbol, which is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms), will be described later. (1) The first special symbol lottery (first special judgment) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the attacker device 2100a, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 fluctuates by a predetermined time. Is displayed. Then, when a hit is won, after the fluctuation display is completed, the drive control of the first attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 188), which will be described later and is configured to have a solenoid or the like, is performed, thereby performing the first attacker. The device 2100a is opened and closed. After the first attacker device 2100a is opened and closed in this way, it is possible to control the transition to a time-saving gaming state in which the ease of winning the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is improved. ..

The pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is started to change by starting the change of the second special symbol. It is not possible to put the fluctuation start waiting state for the symbol fluctuation according to the result of the symbol lottery.

Further, the normal drawing gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured so that a game ball driven into the left side region of the center accessory 2500 can pass through. Then, when the game ball is received (passed) by the normal figure gate 2301, it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 188) that the game ball has been received (passed).

At this time, if a predetermined normal start condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normal) is based on a random number for a normal symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). The determination process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary hit that triggers the operation of the electric accessory) 2111 is performed, and the ordinary symbol dynamically displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal hit is won, after the fluctuation display is completed, the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 188) having a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, the pair of movable pieces 2111 are allowed to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 through the opening operation in which the upper end is rotated outward around the lower end.

That is, the special winning opening 2101b is played only when there is an opening operation (rotation operation of the upper end of the movable piece 2111 in the outward direction centered on the lower end) by the movable piece 2111 according to the winning of a normal hit. It is provided so that the (winning) prize of the ball is possible. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 has a mode in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (a ball refusal mode) and a mode in which the same ball can be entered (permission). It can be said that the ball can be operated so as to switch between the ball mode and the ball mode, and is maintained in the ball refusal mode unless the drive control of the normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), the winning of the game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is driven into the left area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 as in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) (left-handed). The game playability centered on the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b, which is aimed at improving the acceptability of the game, will be realized.

Further, the second starting port 2102 is provided below the second large winning opening 2103b of the second attacker device 2100b, is driven into the right region of the center accessory 2500, and is the second large of the second attacker device 2100b. A game ball that has not been accepted by the winning opening 2103b is configured to be able to enter. Then, when the game ball is entered into the second start opening 2102, the entry (winning) of the game ball is detected by the second start opening sensor 3132 (see FIG. 188). At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, the second attacker is based on a random number for the second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). The second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit that triggers the operation of the device 2100b, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time. To. Then, when a hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is completed, the drive control of the second attacker drive mechanism 2121b (see FIG. 188), which will be described later and is configured to have a solenoid or the like, is performed, thereby performing the first operation. 2 The attacker device 2100b is opened and closed.

Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is below the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b), and when in the open state, is on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. A game ball that is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 of the game area 1100 when it is open above the first attacker device 2100a that can accept the game ball that is driven into the area and the second start port 2102. It is configured to have a second attacker device 2100b which is capable of accepting the above.

The first attacker device 2100a includes a first winning opening 2103a, a first opening / closing member 2106a that can operate between a closed state and an open state, and a first attacker driving mechanism 2121a that drives the opening / closing of the first opening / closing member 2106a. (See FIG. 188), and is normally closed by the first opening / closing member 2106a so that the game ball is not accepted by the first winning opening 2103a.

The second attacker device 2100a includes a second winning opening 2103b, a second opening / closing member 2106b that can operate between the closed state and the open state, and a second attacker driving mechanism 2121b that drives the opening / closing of the second opening / closing member 2106b. (See FIG. 188), which is normally closed by a second opening / closing member 2106b so that the game ball is not accepted by the second winning opening 2103b. When the drive control of the second attacker drive mechanism 2121b is performed, the game ball to the second starting port 2103b is opened through an opening operation in which the second opening / closing member 2106b rotates the upper end in the right direction (clockwise) around the lower end. Acceptance will be accepted.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment, as a result of a special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b), the first When the 1st big winning opening 2103a is opened (the winning game on the 1st special symbol side), and as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the 2nd starting opening 2102, the 2nd big winning opening 2103b is opened. In the case of opening (the hit game on the second special symbol side), the number of balls that can be accepted by the game balls is adjusted by changing the control mode for opening them.

That is, the first attacker device 2100a opens the first big winning opening 2103a by the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 2106a when a big hit is obtained as the determination result of the first special determination, so that the player can use it. It is intended to generate a big hit game state as an advantageous privilege. Further, the second attacker device 2100b opens the second large winning opening 2103b by the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2106b when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as the determination result of the second special determination. A big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a privilege advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 2101 (first start port sensor 3131) or the second start port 2102 (second start port sensor 3132), three game balls are paid out. When a game ball wins in the first big winning opening 2103a (count sensor 2122a) or the second big winning opening 2103b (count sensor 2122b), which is used to execute the big hit game state or the small hit game state, 15 game balls are displayed. It is supposed to be paid out. When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), 10 game balls are paid out.

By the way, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode in the third embodiment), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2111 is in the open state after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (special winning opening). The time maintained at the outer position where the game ball can be won in 2101b) is "5.5 seconds". That is, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 2301, the game ball is always won, and the time (0) is shorter than the time until the passing game ball reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2111. By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol at (.08 seconds), the game ball that triggered the winning of the normal hit can be directly won in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101.

After the movable piece 2111 is maintained in the open state (position where the game ball can be accepted in the special winning opening 2101b) for "5.5 seconds", the game ball is in the closed state (the game ball is in the special winning opening 2101b). It operates so that it is in an unacceptable position).

Therefore, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is maintained at the outer position for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this case, by hitting the left side, it becomes easy to win the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls will win in the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (so-called "right"). It is said that it is more advantageous for the player to hit ").

On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (normal mode and rush mode in the third embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is set to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 1). By setting (seconds), it is impossible to accept the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101.

It should be noted that it is different for the player whether it is advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on whether or not it is in the probabilistic game state even in the non-time saving game state. In the normal game state (normal mode), which is a non-time-saving game state and not a probabilistic game state, the left side of the center accessory 2500 is placed so that many game balls win in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. It is said that it is more advantageous for the player to aim and shoot the game ball (so-called "left-handed"). Further, in the non-time-saving game state and the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal game state, many game balls are placed in the second start port 2102. It is considered advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so as to win a prize.

Further, as the time saving function, a control for increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol compared to the non-time saving gaming state, a control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol compared to the non-time saving gaming state, and a control of the first starting port 2101. Control to extend the period for maintaining the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b in the outer position (open position) from the non-time saving game state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the outer position (open position) in the non-time saving game state Any one or any combination (or all) of the increasing controls may be performed.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) so that the front side is opened and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. The back box 3010 on which the 3010b is formed, the back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, the back top effect unit 3200 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box. The lower right back effect unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the lower right back area arranged between the lower back area effect unit 3400 and the front back decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010. It mainly has a production unit 3600. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 for accommodating the peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 188) having the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is provided. There is.

The game board 4 of the third embodiment is defined as a wide area in which the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (inner circumference of the front component 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (struck with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is upstream of the aisle portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. From the side, it flows down the right passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500. Here, the right-hand passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls that have flowed down the right-side passage 2545 are first decelerated at the abutment portion 1114, and then first, the second attacker device 2100b. It is guided to the movable region of the second opening / closing member 2106b. The game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable region is decelerated by the first guiding unit 2901, the flow direction is changed, and then guided to the movable region of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b. Therefore, when the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 will be accepted by the second large winning opening 2103b with a probability close to 100%.

In the movable region of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b, the game ball that was not accepted by the second opening / closing member 2106b into the second winning opening 2103b is decelerated again by the second induction unit 2902, and then then. , Guided to the second starting port 2102. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second starting port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless the ball enters the second winning opening 2103b.

As described above, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state (rush mode), the game ball that is hit right and flows down the right passage 2545 will be accepted by the second starting port 2102 with a probability of almost 100%. It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right is not limited to the one that is accepted by the second starting port 2102 with a probability of almost 100%, and may be accepted by the second starting port 2102 at a rate lower than that. For example, it may be accepted by the second starting port 2102 at a rate of about one-eighth.

Then, as a result of such a right-handed game, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2102 and a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a judgment result of any of the above second special judgments, the second attacker By opening and closing the second large winning opening 2103b by the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, a big hit game state or a small hit game state as a privilege advantageous to the player is generated.

[Various boards]
Subsequently, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, different control configurations will be described among the control configurations of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment described above.

The attacker device 2100 according to the third embodiment is driven below the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a, special winning opening 2101b) into the left side area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 in the open state. Above the first attacker device 2100a and the second starting port 2102, which are considered to be able to accept the game balls to be played, the game balls to be driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 when in the open state can be accepted. It is configured to have a second attacker device 2100b, which is said to be. Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the first count sensor 2122a for detecting the game ball accepted into the first special winning opening 2103a of the first attacker device 2100a, and the second big winning of the second attacker device 2100b. The detection signal from the detection signal from the second count sensor 2122b that detects the game ball received by the mouth 2103b is transmitted via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is designed to be entered.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the first attacker device via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to the first attacker drive mechanism 2121a for opening and closing the first opening / closing member 2106a of the 2100a and the second attacker driving mechanism 2121b for opening / closing the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100a. There is.

[1st special symbol control process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is on in the process of step S100a. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol with the detached symbol was executed, but in the third embodiment, the second embodiment Similar to the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (paused) as it is, so no processing is performed.

The measurement of the first fluctuation time is interrupted while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side. In other words, while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the process of subtracting the first variable timer (step S521a) executed in the first variable processing (FIG. 129) is not executed. When the measurement of the first fluctuation time is interrupted in this way, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is controlled to be in a non-display state (off state), or the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation of the first special symbol may be temporarily interrupted to interrupt the game on the side of the first special symbol, or the control content of the first special symbol display 1185 may be changed in response to the fluctuation pattern. By interrupting the switching of the control data shown in time series and repeatedly executing the control of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the control data being executed, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is hidden (turned off). The current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) may be continued without controlling the state) or stopping and displaying the misaligned symbol on the first special symbol display 1185. Further, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the decoration is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and changes in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) may be temporarily interrupted by changing the symbol (first decorative symbol) to the non-display state or stopping and displaying it at the off-display symbol, or the variation pattern is supported. Then, the control content of the first special symbol display 1185 is shown in chronological order. By interrupting the switching of the control data and repeatedly executing the control of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the control data being executed. When the current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) is continued without controlling the LED of the special symbol display 1185 to the non-display state (off state) or stopping and displaying the misaligned symbol on the first special symbol display 1185. Interrupts the switching of control data in which the control mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown in chronological order. By repeatedly executing the control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 related to the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) based on the control data being executed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) may be continued without changing the fluctuating decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) to the non-display state or stopping and displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). Further, while the hit game is being performed on the second special symbol side, the effect related to the second big hit game is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the decoration that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The symbol (first decorative symbol) may be reduced and displayed on the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) executed in response to the variation of the first special symbol may be displayed. It is also possible to execute a control that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (paused) by interrupting or performing the game.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this process when the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is on in the process of step S100b. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol with the detached symbol was executed, but in the third embodiment, the second embodiment Similar to the interruption control pattern, while the hit game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is interrupted (paused) as it is, so no processing is performed.

It should be noted that while the hit game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side may be interrupted by stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol, or the game on the second special symbol side may be interrupted. By interrupting the measurement and interrupting the switching of the control data in which the control content of the second special symbol display 1186 is shown in chronological order, the current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) can be obtained without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may try to continue. Further, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped while the hit game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The fluctuation of (second decorative symbol) may be stopped, the measurement of the second fluctuation time is interrupted, and the switching of the control data in which the control content of the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed in chronological order is interrupted. By doing so, when the current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) is to be continued without stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the decorative symbol (decorative symbol) executed in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The current fluctuation (fluctuation speed, etc.) may be continued without stopping the fluctuation by interrupting the switching of the control data whose control mode of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol) is shown in time series. Further, while the hit game is being performed on the first special symbol side, the effect related to the first big hit game is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while being executed in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper left part of the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the variation of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed in response to the variation of the second special symbol. Control that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the change of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), which is executed in response to the change of the second special symbol, is interrupted by interrupting the display of May be executed.

[First fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation pattern setting process in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 128) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

If the flag indicating that the jackpot has been won is set in the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 (YES in step S401a), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the gaming state is selected (step S402a). ), It is determined whether or not the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (step S408a). The rush preparation mode in the third embodiment indicates a gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which both the probability variation function and the time-saving function are operating. Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is on and the time saving flag is on.

The main control MPU4100a proceeds to step S404a without operating the time saving flag when the current game mode is not the rush preparation mode (high accuracy time saving game state) (NO in step S408a). In this case, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the big hit game is started by the processes of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130) described above.

On the other hand, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high accuracy time saving game state) (YES in step S408a), the main control MPU4100a operates the time saving flag to the off state to stop the time saving function. After that (step S409a), the process proceeds to step S404a.

Therefore, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time game state), the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result is started ( The time saving function is stopped (triggered by the start of the fluctuation display) and the mode shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). The probability change flag is set to the off state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 by the process of step S506a of the first variable processing (FIG. 129). That is, in the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), the variable display of the first special symbol is started based on the result of the first special symbol lottery, which is a big hit, and then the jackpot game based on the result of the first special symbol lottery is started. Will continue until.

[Game specs with special designs]
FIG. 192 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the third embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the above-described first embodiment will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the jackpots of the third embodiment include the first jackpot A and the first jackpot B that can occur in the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpots that can occur in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, a second jackpot C and a second jackpot D, are provided.

The first big hit A occurs with a probability of 12% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol A. Further, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 88% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol B.

The second big hit C occurs with a probability of 5% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol C. Further, the second big hit D occurs with a probability of 95% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol D.

These four types of jackpots have a 100% probability of shifting the gaming state after the jackpot game to the probabilistic state, and continuing the probabilistic state until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be added. In addition, a time saving function is provided for jackpots other than the jackpot of the second special symbol (second jackpot C, second jackpot D). That is, the time saving function is not added to the jackpot of the second special symbol generated in the rush mode. In this way, when a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) of the second special symbol occurs in the rush mode, the rush mode is resumed even after the big hit game state.

Further, the opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 (big winning opening 2103a, big winning opening 2103b) is set according to the type of big hit, and the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit C, and the second big hit Open patterns A, B, C, and D are set for the jackpot D, respectively. Here, the number of prize balls that a player can obtain is changed according to the opening pattern, and the interest of the jackpot game is enhanced.

The opening patterns A to D are set so that the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 (large winning opening 2103a, large winning opening 2103b) is long and the player can obtain a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern A is a jackpot game in which a round game is performed 15 times, and the opening time and the maximum number of prizes for each round are set so that the player can obtain 2000 prize balls. In a big hit game in which a round game is performed four times, the opening time and the maximum number of prizes for each round are set so that the player can obtain 500 prize balls, and in the opening pattern C, the round game is performed 11 times. The opening time and the maximum number of prizes for each round are set so that the player can obtain 1500 prize balls in the big hit game, and the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which the round game is performed seven times. The opening time and maximum number of prizes for each round are set so that 1000 balls can be obtained as prize balls.

As will be described in detail later, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) of the third embodiment, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is set to the normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving state; normal mode). ) And the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode) are changed to a shorter fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) so that the second small hit C occurs frequently. Further, the opening mode of the large winning opening 2103b in the small hit game is provided so that one opening time is short and a prize ball can be obtained by accidental winning. Here, the accidental winning is not a winning that the player obtains by hitting the game ball into the game area with the intention of winning the large winning opening 2103b, but in the game area where the large winning opening 2103b is arranged. It refers to a prize that can be obtained by accidentally flowing down a position where a prize can be won when the game ball that has been driven is opened at the large prize opening 2103b. In the second small hit C, if the player hits the game ball with a right-handed hit, the number of rounds and one opening time of the large winning opening 2103b can be expected so that a prize of about 1 to 2 balls can be expected accidentally. Is set. When about 1 to 2 balls are won in the large winning opening 2103b by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be obtained.

Also, in the rush mode, it is possible to promote accidental winning based on the second small hit C that occurs during the rush mode by letting the player continuously hit the game ball with a right-handed hit, and the award that can be obtained. The number of balls will occupy most of the number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired) that can be acquired during the rush mode. In the third embodiment, since the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) frequently occurs during the rush mode, a prize ball (maximum 2100 balls) of the above-mentioned big hit prize balls (2000 balls) or more can be expected, so that most prizes are awarded. There is no loss of interest in the game due to the occurrence of small hits where the ball cannot be obtained. Rather, a small hit game that occurs a plurality of times rather than a single big hit game keeps the player interested in the game, so that the interest of a series of games in the rush mode can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the third embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost in the rush preparation mode. If it is, 3 seconds is set, and if it is a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds is set. Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 5 seconds when the game mode is the rush mode. When the game mode is the rush mode, the fluctuation time is not set because the fluctuation of the first special symbol is not newly started.

In this way, the above-mentioned specifications (winning probability, winning type, fluctuation time, etc.) of the game of the special symbol provided to the player change according to the game state. Then, the transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is special for the number of STs given (70 times in this case). Triggered by the digestion of the design lottery (variation).

The number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode may be changed by changing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time of entering the rush mode. For example, in the above example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first jackpot, the variation of either 300 seconds or 600 seconds depends on the variation pattern determined regardless of the type of the first jackpot. Although the one to be set to the time is shown, the fluctuation time may be associated with each type of the first big hit in advance. Specifically, in the case of the first jackpot, if it is the first jackpot A, it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 300 seconds, while if it is the first jackpot B, it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. A variable pattern table according to the type of the first jackpot may be provided so as to determine, and in this case, about 500 prize balls, which is less than the first jackpot A that can obtain about 2000 prize balls. Even if the first big hit B is obtained, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode that is executed for a long period of time, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. In this way, the smaller the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game (the lower the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game), the longer the fluctuation time is selected and the longer the duration of the rush mode is controlled. Therefore, it may be possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls during the rush mode than a big hit (a big hit with a high expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is large.

Further, in the case of the first jackpot, the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is determined for the first jackpot A, while the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is determined for the first jackpot B. A variable pattern table according to the type of the first jackpot may be provided in the above, and in this case, when the first jackpot A that can acquire about 2000 prize balls is obtained, the game is executed for a longer period of time. Since it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls during the rush mode, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls that cannot be obtained in one big hit game only when the first special lottery result is the first big hit A. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. That is, the larger the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game (the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game), the longer the fluctuation time is selected and the longer the duration of the rush mode is controlled. As a result, the value (degree of advantage to the player) of the jackpot with a large number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game (the jackpot with a high expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game) may be further increased.

Further, as described above, the player can obtain the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the type of the big hit game, and in this example, the big hit game executed when the first big hit A is obtained can obtain about 2000 prize balls. Therefore, it can be predicted in advance that about 500 prize balls can be obtained in the jackpot game executed when the first jackpot is B, but as described above, for each type of the first jackpot. Since it is not possible to determine the degree of advantage only by the jackpot type by associating the fluctuation time in advance, it is possible to improve the game interest by paying attention to the duration of the rush mode. That is, since the duration of the rush mode is proportional to the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode, it is possible to pay attention to the duration of the rush mode.

In addition to the control of changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode by changing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time of entering the rush mode as described above, or the above-mentioned first at the time of entering the rush mode. 1 The fluctuation time of the second special symbol (of the second special symbol) executed during the rush mode, separately from the control that changes the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode by making the fluctuation time of the special symbol different. The number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode may be different by executing the control to make the fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol in which the fluctuation time is set different. For example, rush mode A (high probability non-time saving state A) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always set to 5 seconds as the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always 10 seconds. Rush mode B (high probability non-time saving state B) set to seconds can be controlled, or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds. Rush mode A (high probability non-time saving state A), which is more likely to be set to 5 seconds than seconds (for example, set to 5 seconds with an 80% chance and set to 10 seconds with a 20% chance), The fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds as in rush mode A, and is more likely to be set to 10 seconds than 5 seconds (for example, 80% probability of 10 seconds). It may be set and controlled to either rush mode B (high probability non-time saving state B) (set to 5 seconds with a probability of 20%). In this way, by making it possible to control the transition to a plurality of types of rush modes in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is different or the appearance ratio of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is different, it is advantageous only by the jackpot type and the duration of the rush mode. It becomes impossible to judge the degree, and the degree of advantage can be judged only by comprehensively judging the jackpot type, the duration of the rush mode, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, so it is possible to pay more attention to the game. It can be done and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds, the transition control is performed to the rush mode B, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds. In order to control the transition to the rush mode A, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol. In this case, the first 1 It is possible to set a difference in the degree of advantage of each of the two types of rush modes (rush mode A and rush mode B) that occur when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. If it is decided to, that is, if the rush mode continues for a long period of time (rush mode A in this example), many prize balls can be won. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds, the transition control is performed to the rush mode A, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds. In order to control the transition to the rush mode B, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol may be provided as the fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol. In this case, the first 1 Rush mode because it is possible to obtain the same amount of prize balls regardless of which of the two types of rush modes (rush mode A and rush mode B) that occur when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Not only can the game enjoyment be improved when the above two types of rush modes occur, but if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the above two types of rush modes is the same, the rush has a short duration, which is disadvantageous to the player. The degree of advantage of mode A can be increased. That is, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each of the two types of rush modes is about the same, the number of prize balls that can be obtained per unit time is increased in the rush mode A that is executed in a shorter time, which is more for the player. Since it becomes an advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the rush mode A having a short duration can be increased.

Further, if the first jackpot A (15 rounds), the transition control is performed to the rush mode A, while if the first jackpot B (4 rounds), the transition control is performed to the rush mode B. As the fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the jackpot type of the first jackpot, that is, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the opening mode (number of rounds) determined by the jackpot type may be provided. In this case, when the first jackpot A that can acquire about 2000 prize balls is reached, the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode can be further increased, so that during the rush mode, It is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls, and the result of the first special lottery is only the first big hit A, and it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls that cannot be obtained in one big hit game, which improves the game interest. Can be done. That is, as the first jackpot, the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the first jackpot is large (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is high), and the second jackpot is determined in a short fluctuation time. By executing the variable display of the special symbol to increase the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the rush mode and executing the control to frequently generate the second big hit and the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery, the first big hit Among them, the value of the jackpot (degree of advantage to the player) of the type in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is large (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is high) may be further increased.

Further, if the first jackpot A (15 rounds), the transition control is performed to the rush mode B, while if the first jackpot B (4 rounds), the transition control is performed to the rush mode B. As the fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the jackpot type of the first jackpot, that is, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables according to the opening mode (number of rounds) determined by the jackpot type may be provided. In some cases, even if the first jackpot B, which can acquire about 500 prize balls, which is less than the first jackpot A, which can acquire about 2000 prize balls, can be executed during the rush mode. 2 Since it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls during the rush mode by increasing the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. In this way, the smaller the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the first big hit as the first big hit (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is low), the shorter the fluctuation time is. 2 The first special symbol variation display is executed to increase the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the rush mode and to execute the control to frequently generate the second big hit and the small hit based on the second special symbol lottery. The number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit is small (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is low). It is also possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the type of jackpot with a small number of prize balls (the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is low).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194, the transition of the gaming state according to the third embodiment and the control of the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state will be described. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state (gaming mode) of the third embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is the normal game state (normal mode). In the normal game state, the game ball is launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the game ball is won in the constant winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. Is the best playing method for the player.

Here, the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment can easily win a prize simply by following the flow path of the game ball launched (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is provided as possible. Then, in the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 2102, the winning probability of the small hit that can obtain the prize ball is high (390/399 in the normal state, 44/45 in the probability change state). In this case, the player tries to hit the right side from the start of the game and aim for the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192 (E) described above, the second special symbol in the game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. The fluctuation time is set to long-term fluctuation (600 seconds). As a result, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes, it takes a long time until the display is stopped (the lottery result is known), so that the player's right-handed strike can be suppressed. ..

Since the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second starting port 2102 in the gaming state in which the winning is not recommended in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a long time, but it is not limited to this. A state changing member capable of converting the second starting port 2102 into a winning easy state and a winning difficult state is provided, and winning is won in a game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 is not recommended. It may be set to a difficult state. In the third embodiment, in order to avoid complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state changing member and to provide a game in which the player can easily obtain the procedure, the player changes the fluctuation time according to the game state. We are inducing you to play in the best way to play.

Therefore, in the normal game state (normal mode), the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (constant winning opening 2101a). Then, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal game state is continued, while if the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), , After the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit, the game shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state).

As described above, in the normal game state (normal mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is extremely unlikely that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be known in the normal game state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol).

(Rush preparation mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the player is given an advantageous privilege for the player, such as the acquisition of the prize ball and the provision of the probability change function and the time saving function by the occurrence of the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B).

In the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), as in the normal game state (normal mode), the game ball is launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. It is the best game method for the player to make the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 win a game ball.

Here, when the left-handed game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301 arranged in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the time saving function is activated, so that the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol lottery. (Probability per normal figure in the time saving state is 100%). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Further, as described above, in the time-saving game state, the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is higher than the winning frequency (winning probability) of the game ball to the winning opening 2101a at all times. Since it is set high, the player strikes left and aims at the special winning opening 2101b.

Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning opening 2101b) is mainly executed. Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost 70 times in a row, the state shifts to the normal game state (normal mode). In addition, if the first big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is determined by the time the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, there is a high probability that the first special symbol will start to fluctuate. It shifts to the non-time saving state (rush mode, second game game state). This high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) continues until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started.

As described above, in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set longer in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is extremely unlikely that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be known in the high-probability time-saving game state.

(Rush mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state shifts from the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) will be described.

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), a game ball is launched at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right-handed") to win a game ball at the second starting port 2102. Letting the player play is the best way to play. In addition, regardless of whether a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit is derived in the second special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, the second attacker Since the second large winning opening 2103b is opened by the opening / closing operation of the second opening / closing member 2106b of the device 2100b, right-handed hitting is performed as in the case where the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102. That is, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), it is sufficient to maintain the right-handed strike. On the other hand, in a gaming state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) (normal game state (normal mode) or high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode)), by hitting left as described above, the first It is the best game method for the player to make the starting port 2101 win the game ball, and when a big hit is derived in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101, Since the first large winning opening 2103a is opened by the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 2106a of the first attacker device 2100a, left-handed hitting is performed as in the case where the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101. That is, in a gaming state other than the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), the left-handed strike may be maintained. Therefore, it is necessary to switch from left-handed to right-handed when shifting to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), and to switch from right-handed to left-handed at the end of the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode).

Here, the second starting port 2102 of the third embodiment is provided downstream of the game area 1100 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball hit right in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is almost the same. Win a prize at the second starting port 2102.

Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, since the change of the first special symbol based on the first big hit is being executed, the first special is newly made based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2101. Even if the player makes a left-handed strike without executing the symbol lottery, the prize ball cannot be won in the game of the first special symbol.

In the second special symbol lottery in the high probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), if the big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, the small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hit game generated at this time, the player can obtain a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as a prize ball, which is less than the number of game balls that can be obtained in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main game state, the player acquires a prize ball by the small hit game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit ends. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 192 (E), the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), so that the high probability non-time saving When starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol that triggers the transition to the game state (rush mode), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S170a) and the first fluctuation start One of 300 seconds and 600 seconds is set as the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern determined by comparing with the first fluctuation random number read in step S304a in the process. To. Further, in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), it is recommended to execute the second special symbol lottery, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. Since the third embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first jackpot based on the first jackpot when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol ends. When the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted and the small hit game that occurs when the small hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol or the big hit game that occurs when the big hit is derived is executed, the first big hit The state in which the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol is interrupted is continued, and when the small hit game or the big hit game is completed, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol is restarted. There is. Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed up to 60 to 120 times, so that the small hit game and the big hit game occur continuously up to 60 to 120 times. Can be done. That is, a series of games of the second special symbol from the start to the end of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit becomes a privilege game in which a prize ball can be obtained. It should be noted that the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), the greater the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol that can fluctuate during that period. Therefore, the number of times that the small hit game and the big hit game can occur consecutively increases, and the number of prize balls that the player can obtain increases. In this example, the high-probability non-time-saving game is performed depending on whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is set to 600 seconds or 300 seconds. Different durations of state (rush mode). As a result, the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is made different, and when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 600 seconds, The number of prize balls that the player can obtain is increased as compared with the case where the setting is set to 300 seconds.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) is a series of second jackpots regardless of the derivation of the second jackpot (second jackpot C, second jackpot D) in the second special symbol lottery. 2 Prize balls can be obtained in a small hit game with a special symbol, and the total number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a big hit game. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is not the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous gaming state) but the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode, second advantageous gaming state).

The high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is a game state that can occur when the derivation of the first jackpot is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode). First, a game aimed at winning a game ball in the first starting port 2101 is performed. Then, when the game state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the first big hit, the player then moves the game ball to the second start port 2102. Play a game aiming for a prize.

When the derivation of the first big hit is decided in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time saving game state (rush preparation mode), the high probability non-time saving is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the first big hit. After shifting to the game state (rush mode), the main game state (rush mode) is continued unless the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends. Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot ends, the jackpot game based on the first jackpot is executed. Therefore, when the derivation of the first big hit is decided in the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the game shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), and the first is Not only can a prize ball be won by a series of games of the second special symbol from the start to the end of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on one jackpot, but also by the jackpot game based on the first jackpot. Since it is possible to win prize balls, it is possible to win a large number of prize balls. At this time, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first big hit is the duration of the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), the game mode is changed to the rush mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The elapsed time, the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode), etc. are displayed to make the player recognize that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit. It has become like.

When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the first jackpot ends in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), after executing the jackpot game based on the first jackpot, the high-probability time-saving game is performed again. Move to the state (rush preparation mode). Therefore, unless the result of the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode) is lost 70 times in a row, the game does not shift to the normal game state (normal mode). That is, as long as the first jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is determined by the time the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode) is executed 70 times, the high-probability time-saving game By repeating the transition from the state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), it is possible to shift from the normal game state (normal mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush preparation mode). Players can expect to win a large number of prize balls.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 194 is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the third embodiment.

When the player starts the game in the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 such as the state where the RAM of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared, the normal mode (normal state: low probability non-time saving state) starts first. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to hit left and aim at the constant winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101. Here, when the launching force of the game ball at the start of hitting is too strong and the game ball is hit to the right and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the second special symbol changes as shown in FIG. 192 (E). A long-term fluctuation (600 seconds) with a long time (second fluctuation time) is executed. Therefore, when the game mode is the normal mode and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, a display prompting the player to hit the left side (please hit the left side! Etc.) is displayed.

After that, when the player adjusts the firing force and strikes left, and the game ball wins in the constant winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the change of the first special symbol is executed and the first special symbol is changed. 1 The first decorative symbol is changed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the change of the special symbol. As described above, since the left-handed game is the best for the player in the normal mode, the variation of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the variation of the second special symbol is hardly executed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in the central portion to perform an effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, while the second decorative symbol is reduced to the upper left portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is displayed and it is difficult for the player to notice its existence. By not displaying the second decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at all during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, it is difficult to notice the existence of the second decorative symbol, or during the normal mode or the rush preparation mode. By turning off the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 and not displaying the second special symbol at all, it may be difficult to notice the existence of the second special symbol.

Further, the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol in the normal mode is set to any one of 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. In the game on the first special symbol side, the first special symbol lottery in which the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. Then, when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes a big hit, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the first special symbol of the first special symbol. After the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted. Then, when the first big hit game ends, the second interlocking flag is returned to the off state, the interrupted fluctuation of the second special symbol is resumed, and the game mode changes from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state). Move to.

Even in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), it is best for the player to hit left and aim at the constant winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting opening 2101 as in the normal mode. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a probability change function of 70 ST times and a time saving function of performing a prize assist control for facilitating a prize in the special prize opening 2101b are provided. Even in the rush preparation mode, when the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, as shown in FIG. 192 (E), the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is long and the fluctuation time (600 seconds) is long. Since it is executed, when the game mode is the rush preparation mode and the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, a display prompting the player to hit left (please hit left! Etc.) is displayed. ..

When the player strikes left in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) and the game ball wins in the constant winning opening 2101a or the special winning opening 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the change of the first special symbol is executed. At the same time, the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the variation of the first decorative symbol in response to the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is wrong, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time) is set to any of 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the selected fluctuation pattern, and the first special symbol. If the result of the symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is one of 300 seconds and 600 seconds depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. It is said that. In the game on the side of the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first special symbol lottery in which a big hit is won is executed with a probability of 1/45. Then, when the number of STs is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and when the count of the number of STs is 70 or less, the jackpot of the first special symbol (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won. As shown in 192 (E), a long-term fluctuation (300 seconds or 600 seconds) in which the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is long is executed. Then, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate for a long time, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state).

In the rush mode, it is best for the player to hit right and aim at the second starting port 2102. Therefore, when the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, the liquid crystal display device 1900 notifies that the mode has changed to the rush mode, and a display prompting the player to hit right (rush into rush mode! Hit right! Etc.). Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not given, and only the probability change function with 70 ST times is given. Here, the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is reset, and the number of STs is counted again from the count value of 70.

The right-handed game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 2102. Since it is easy for even a beginner to win a prize in the second starting port 2102, winning a game ball in the second starting port 2102 frequently occurs. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) at this time is set to 5 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

In this way, in the rush mode, the right-handed game is the best for the player, and the second special symbol is frequently changed, while the first special symbol is changed for a long time and stopped during the rush mode. Is not displayed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in the center, and the effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed over the entire area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, while the first decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal. It is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left portion of the device 1900, and it is difficult for the player to notice its existence. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above as long as it makes it difficult for the presence of the first decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be noticed during the rush mode. For example, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the rush mode. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol may not be displayed at all, and the first decorative symbol may be displayed when the rush mode ends and the normal mode is entered, while the second decorative symbol may not be displayed at all. Similarly, during the rush mode, the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 can be turned on to display the second special symbol, while the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 is turned off and the first special symbol is not displayed at all. Then, when the rush mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode, the LED of the first special symbol display 1185 can be turned on to display the first special symbol, while the LED of the second special symbol display 1186 is turned off. The second special symbol may not be displayed at all.

In the game on the second special symbol side, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45, and if the jackpot is not won (probability of 44/45), the second special symbol lottery for winning the small hit is executed. Then, the number of STs is decremented and updated by 1 at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. If a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hit game is executed, the first interlocking flag is set to the on state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the first interlocking flag is turned off at the end of the second small hit game. It is returned to and the suspended fluctuation of the first special symbol is resumed.

The number of STs is also subtracted and updated by 1 at the start of the change of the second special symbol. When the number of STs becomes 0, the probability change flag is set to the off state and the game mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, the rush mode ends when the number of STs becomes 0 without winning the jackpot of the second special symbol. In the rush mode, in addition to the case where the number of STs becomes 0 without winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol has elapsed, or the second special symbol has a rush mode. Even if the jackpot is won, it ends and shifts to the normal mode. However, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change flag is set to the off state when the second jackpot game is started and the rush mode ends, but when the second jackpot game is finished, it is again. The probability change flag is set to the on state, and the rush mode is restarted after the end of the second big hit game (Rush mode consecutive chan). In this way, in the rush mode, the variation of the second special symbol and the second big hit game or the second small hit game are alternately and repeatedly executed. The number of STs may be subtracted and updated only due to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol without subtracting and updating the number of STs due to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. In this case, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery does not become a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) during the rush mode, until the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses. Can be continuously controlled to the rush mode, so that it is possible to prevent the rush mode from ending in the middle of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol and reducing the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 70, whereas the winning probability of the second special symbol in the probability variation state (high probability state) is 1/45, so that it is theoretically possible. Will generate a big hit of the second special symbol once before the number of STs becomes 0. In addition, if a big hit of the second special symbol occurs during the rush mode, the rush mode is temporarily terminated, but since the rush mode is restarted after the end of the second big hit game, the rush mode is substantially continued. It is in a state of being. That is, the biggest factor as a condition for ending the rush mode is that the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses. Therefore, when shifting to the rush mode, the elapsed time after the game mode shifts to the rush mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode). Etc. are displayed to make the player aware that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit.

In the game on the first special symbol side, the jackpot symbols (symbol A, symbol B) are stopped and displayed based on the elapse of the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the probability change flag is set to the off state. After setting the second interlocking flag to the on state, the first big hit game is started. As a result, the rush mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted. When the first big hit game is finished, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the ON state, and after the first big hit game is finished, the mode shifts to the rush preparation mode.

In addition, if the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol elapses during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted with the start of the first jackpot game, and the first jackpot game ends. At the same time, the suspended fluctuation of the second special symbol is resumed. That is, the second big hit game or the second small hit game is executed according to the result of the change of the second special symbol restarted during the rush preparation mode after the end of the first big hit game. If the second special symbol is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) in the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is completed after the end of the second big hit game. ), But when the second big hit game is executed in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), it shifts to the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) after the end of the second big hit game. That is, the jackpot of the second special symbol (second jackpot C, second jackpot D) has a different game mode after the end of the second jackpot game depending on the game mode at the time when the second jackpot game is started. It has become. Specifically, if the time saving function is operating at the time of starting the second big hit game, the time saving function is activated even after the end of the second big hit game, and the time saving function is stopped at the time of starting the second big hit game. If so, even after the end of the second big hit game, the time saving function is not activated and the state is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transition to the rush mode again immediately after the transition from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and to suppress an excessive improvement in gambling.

In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol (second jackpot C, second jackpot D) is reached, it is possible to always shift to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) after the end of the second jackpot game. In this case, it is possible to pay attention to the fluctuation of the second special symbol that is restarted immediately after the transition from the rush mode to the rush preparation mode, and it is possible to improve the expectation for re-entry into the rush mode.

Further, in the rush mode of the third embodiment, when the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit is always won, and the probability is 44/45, so that the second small hit game occurs frequently. Become. Further, since the second fluctuation time in the rush mode is 5 seconds, if the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is about 120 times in the rush mode. If the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed about 60 times in the rush mode. The number of STs is set to 70 as described above, and the number of STs is subtracted and updated due to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol during the rush mode. Therefore, assuming that the mode shifts to the rush mode when the remaining number of STs is 69, and the second special lottery result is not a big hit but a small hit during the rush mode, the fluctuation of the second special symbol changes. When 69 times have been played, the game mode will shift from the rush mode to the normal mode. That is, when the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed 120 times unless a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery at least once. Since the rush mode will be terminated before, if the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 600 seconds, it is necessary to continue the rush mode for the entire period with at least one jackpot and a maximum of 119 times. It is necessary to generate a small hit. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol is 300 seconds and the remaining number of STs is 69 and the mode shifts to the rush mode, the rush mode ends in the middle of the long-term fluctuation of the first special symbol. A maximum of 60 small hits occur without doing so. Here, about 30 prize balls can be obtained in one second small hit game, and about 1000 to 1500 prize balls can be obtained in one second big hit game. That is, when one big hit is won in the rush mode and about 4570 to 5070 prize balls are won when the 119 small hits are won, and 1800 balls are won when the 60 small hits are won in the rush mode. You will be able to win the prize ball. This is equal to or greater than the maximum number of prize balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of the third embodiment. Therefore, the game entertainment can be improved by shifting to the rush mode. As described above, if the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state (particularly the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state)), it is not always necessary to win the small hit, and the first in the probabilistic state. 2 If you do not win the big hit in the special symbol lottery, you may win the small hit with a much higher probability than the probability of losing, but even in this case, the small hit game will occur frequently. By setting the winning probability (for example, winning probability of 80% or more), a large number of prize balls can be obtained during the rush mode.

Further, after the end of the rush mode, the first big hit game is started. Since it is possible to obtain about 500 to 2000 prize balls in one first big hit game, it is possible to obtain about 2300 to 7070 prize balls by winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode. Become. Therefore, even if the first jackpot B, in which only about 500 prize balls can be obtained by executing the jackpot game in which the round game is performed four times, the prize balls acquired during the rush mode are added up. By doing so, it is possible to win more prize balls than the first jackpot A, which can win about 2000 prize balls by executing the round game 15 times, and it is disappointing because it became the first jackpot B. Can be deterred and the decline in amusement interests can be deterred. Also, by acquiring the prize ball of the first jackpot A in addition to the prize ball acquired during the rush mode, it is possible to acquire many times as many prize balls as the prize ball that can be acquired in one first jackpot game, so that the rush Expectations for the mode and the first jackpot A can be raised, and the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, the lottery process of whether or not to win the big hit and whether or not to win the small hit is executed as the second special symbol lottery, but at least the small hit is executed as the second special symbol lottery. As long as the lottery process of whether or not to win is executed, the big hit game may not be executed in the game on the second special symbol side by not executing the lottery process of whether or not to win the big hit. In addition, at least in the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), only the lottery process of whether or not to win the small hit is executed without executing the lottery process of whether or not to win the big hit as the second special symbol lottery. By doing so, it may be controlled so that the small hit game can be executed in the game on the second special symbol side in the rush mode, but the big hit game cannot be executed. In this way, by controlling so that only the small hit game can be executed in the game on the side of the second special symbol in the rush mode, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hit game are repeatedly executed in the rush mode. A game mode other than the rush mode in which the prize balls collected by executing the big hit game (which may be 100%) are acquired at once, and a rush mode in which the prize balls acquired by executing the small hit game are gradually increased. Since it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two pachinko machines and one pachinko machine 1 can provide different game characteristics, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to prevent a decline in the game interest. In addition, since the jackpot game is not executed during the rush mode, a large number of prize balls (a collection of 1000 to 1500 balls) cannot be obtained at once (in a short time), and the prize balls are gradually obtained. Since the game to increase the number of small hits is executed, it is possible to concentrate on the game on the side of the second special symbol in the rush mode aiming at the occurrence of more small hits, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, even if the lottery process of whether or not to win the big hit as the second special symbol lottery and whether or not to win the small hit is executed, if the big hit is won as the second special symbol lottery, the lottery is small. By executing the big hit game (opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b that opens and closes the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b in the opening pattern E), the big hit game is mainly performed (even at 100%). (Good) It may be possible to distinguish between a game mode other than the rush mode in which a large number of prize balls are acquired at once and a rush mode in which the number of prize balls to be acquired is gradually increased. Further, at least in the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is the same as the small hit game (open pattern E, the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b). The big hit game of the big winning opening 2103b) which opens and closes the game may be executed. In this way, if a big hit is won as the second special symbol lottery, it is the same as the small hit game (opening mode of the big winning opening 2103b that opens and closes the second opening / closing member 2106b of the second attacker device 2100b in the opening pattern E). By executing the big hit game of), the small hit game can be executed in the game on the second special symbol side in the above-mentioned rush mode, but the same effect as in the case of controlling so that the big hit game cannot be executed can be obtained. It becomes possible to play.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot symbol is displayed. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (triggered by the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol), the first special is to shift to the rush mode in which the expected value of winning the prize ball is higher than the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state). It is possible to give the player surprise and surprise by suddenly shifting to the rush mode (the rush mode occurs) at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, which is executed in response to the fluctuation of the symbol and the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol while expecting the occurrence of the rush mode, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. In addition to the first big hit game that is executed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery, the game motivation is controlled by controlling the game to an advantageous state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by shifting to the rush mode. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to pay attention to games other than the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, so that it corresponds to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Even during the period before the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, the probability change flag is set to the off state when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first variable processing (FIG. 129). Although it is configured to end the rush mode, it may be configured to end the rush mode at least before the first attacker device 2100a opens and closes in the first big hit game. For example, the first big hit game start process (FIG. 130). ), When the time saving flag is set to the off state in step S604a, the probability change flag may be turned off. That is, in this example, the rush mode is controlled with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, but within the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Not limited to those controlled to the rush mode, the rush mode is continued even after the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol has elapsed until at least the first attacker device 2100a is opened and closed. May be controlled.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the third) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Since the fluctuation time (2 fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot A, first) is performed in the first special symbol lottery. Before winning the 1 jackpot B), only the game on the 1st special symbol side is made to be executed. That is, the state before winning the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the 1st special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the 2nd special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of the pachinko machine 1). ) Can be said to be in a restricted state. Then, when the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the time before the 1st special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol and the change of the 1st special symbol is started. In order to lift the restriction (triggered by the start of fluctuation of the 1st special symbol) and shift to the rush mode that allows the execution of the game on the 2nd special symbol side to improve the expected value of winning the prize ball compared to the normal mode. , It is possible to realize a novel game in which the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol are suddenly switched to the rush mode (the rush mode is generated) at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, which is executed in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. As a result, the player can be surprised and surprised, so that the player can be expected to generate the rush mode and pay attention to the establishment of the start condition to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In the third embodiment described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). (2nd fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol (1st fluctuation time), and the stop display frequency of the 2nd special symbol is displayed as the stop display of the 1st special symbol. By significantly lowering the frequency compared to the frequency, by encouraging only the game on the 1st special symbol side to be executed before winning the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) in the 1st special symbol lottery. The configuration is such that the game on the second special symbol side is substantially restricted, but until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). ) Reduces the firing intensity of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 500 to less than a predetermined strength so that the ball cannot be hit to the right, or enters the right region of the center accessory 2500 of the game ball launched by the hitting ball launching device 500 with a predetermined strength or more. Is disturbed by a member or the like, or the detection by the second start port sensor 3132 is stopped so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 2102, or the game ball enters the second start port 2102. Even if the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132 as a ball, the detection signal is ignored (the first special symbol lottery in step S201 of the first and second start port winning processes (FIG. 125)). If a flag indicating that the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) has been won is set, it is determined that the game ball has not been won in the 2nd starting port 2102). Before the game on the 2nd special symbol side cannot be executed and the 1st special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol when the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery. However, at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), the mode is shifted to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) and during the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). The game on the second special symbol side may be able to be executed. As a result, the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) can be reliably switched between the rush mode and the other game modes.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the third) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Since the fluctuation time (2 fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot A, first) is performed in the first special symbol lottery. Before winning 1 jackpot B), it can be said that the suspension of fluctuation of the second special symbol is substantially restricted. Then, when a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the frequency of stopping and displaying the 2nd special symbol when the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol starts (of the 2nd special symbol). In order to increase the frequency at which the fluctuation is started), when the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the second special symbol and the second special symbol are suddenly started. It is possible to realize a novel game in which the frequency of stop display of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of is increased, which can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, the second decorative symbol is changed by increasing the stop display frequency (frequency at which the change of the second special symbol is started) of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. Since it is possible to improve the expectation that the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol will be stopped and displayed, the first special symbol can be improved. By paying attention to the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. That is, even if the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. As the stop display frequency increases, the probability that the second special symbol will be stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol or small hit symbol per unit time, and the second decorative symbol will correspond to the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol or the second In addition to improving the probability that the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the special symbol will be stopped and displayed and the motivation for playing the game can be improved, it fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, but also the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is increased. Therefore, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest even during the period before the display is stopped by the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol).

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the first jackpot A, until the first jackpot B) is won (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) in the first special symbol lottery. By performing a long-term fluctuation with a (2 fluctuation time) of 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol, the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially restricted, and the first special symbol When a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the symbol lottery, the frequency of stopping and displaying the 2nd special symbol triggered by the start of the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol (the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is started). It was configured to increase the frequency), but until the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the 2nd special symbol and It is regulated not to stop and display the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol, and when the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol Before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), the mode is changed to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) and the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). Only during the high-probability non-time saving state), the regulation may be lifted so that the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol can be stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined in step S501b of the second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) that the second fluctuation time has elapsed (the second fluctuation timer has become 0), the states of the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are confirmed and the rush occurs. If it is a game mode other than the mode (high probability non-time saving state) (normal mode (low probability non-time saving state), rush preparation mode (high probability non-time saving state)), it changes according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The second special symbol and the second special symbol that change based on the transition to the game mode other than the rush mode by ending the process without stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol to be performed. 2 The decorative design may be stopped and displayed. As a result, the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) can be reliably switched between the rush mode and the other game modes.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the third) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The fluctuation time (2 fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), and the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) in the first special symbol lottery. In order to shorten (change) the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol to 5 seconds with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol when winning, it corresponds to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. The fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) until the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the second special symbol suddenly stop and display at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates is shortened (changed). It becomes possible to realize a novel game of being played, which can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, since the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is shortened (changed), it corresponds to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game by paying attention not only to the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates, but also to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the first special symbol. That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the jackpot symbol) is not stopped and displayed, the variation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is shortened (changed). The stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, and as a result, the second special symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol per unit time. The decorative symbols are the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol) and the small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the second special symbol). In order to improve the probability that the small hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol are stopped and displayed. It is possible to improve the motivation to play by shortening (changing) the fluctuation time until. In this way, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play while paying attention to whether or not the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the decorative symbol is shortened, and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Can be suppressed from the deterioration of the game interest even in the period before the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), and the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is performed in the first special symbol lottery. ), The fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, so that the rush mode is entered when the mode is changed to the rush mode. The game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) is shown to shorten the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol, but at least when the mode shifts to the rush mode, the game mode other than the rush mode is shown. It suffices to change the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol rather than (normal mode, rush preparation mode), and when the rush mode is entered, the game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush) The fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol may be extended as compared with the preparation mode). In this case, the variation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed to correspond to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The stop display frequency of the fluctuating second decorative symbol changes, and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol per unit time changes accordingly, and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponds to the jackpot symbol (the second special symbol). The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (the big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol) and the small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol) Since the probability of being stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol) is improved or decreased, the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed. Can change the motivation to play. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play while paying attention to whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol (second fluctuation time) is changed, and the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Even during the period before the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the state before winning the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the first special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the second special symbol side (in other words). And part of the functions of the pachinko machine 1), so if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first The control of the second jackpot game can be started when the special symbol changes. That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the control of the first jackpot game is started when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (first jackpot A, first jackpot B). On the other hand, if the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery is a big hit (2nd big hit C, 2nd big hit D) or a small hit, the fluctuation start that the result of the 1st special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol becomes a big hit Since the control of the second big hit game can be started by shifting to the rush mode as an opportunity, it becomes possible to realize a novel game in which the second big hit game or the small hit game is suddenly started after the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. , This can give the player surprise and surprise. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by paying attention to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the first special symbol while expecting the occurrence of the second big hit game. Further, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game is started not only when the stop display is made with the big hit symbol) but also when the change of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the first special symbol and the first special symbol starts. Since the prize ball can be obtained by obtaining the prize ball, in addition to being able to pay attention to other than the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, the game can be played. , The motivation for playing can be improved, and the decline in the interest in playing can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment described above, the second special symbol side game is substantially restricted before the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (2nd big hit C, 2nd big hit D) or a small hit, the result of the 1st special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol becomes a big hit. Since the control of the big hit game and the small hit game can be started, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, the first special The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game can be started without triggering the fluctuation start in which the result of the first special symbol lottery of the symbol becomes a big hit, but in the first special symbol lottery, the big hit (first big hit A, Before winning the 1st jackpot B), as mentioned above, the game on the 2nd special symbol side cannot be executed, or the 2nd special symbol is restricted from being stopped and displayed. Whenever the result of the symbol lottery is a big hit (2nd big hit C, 2nd big hit D) or a small hit, the rush mode is triggered by the start of fluctuation when the result of the 1st special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol becomes a big hit. The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game may be started by shifting to. As a result, if the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit, then after that. The control of the first big hit game will always be started, and in order to get double joy by continuously generating hits (big hit, small hit), the motivation for the game will be improved and the game interest will be reduced. Can be deterred.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before the control of the first big hit game is started. In order to enable the acquisition of prize balls by the game on the second special symbol side, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol during the execution of the game on the first special symbol side. Is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol), and the prize ball is controlled by controlling the first jackpot game. It is possible to provide a new game that breaks the conventional wisdom that it is possible to acquire a prize, and it is possible to give the player surprise and surprise. In addition to the first big hit game, a prize ball can be won by shifting to the rush mode, so that the player's motivation for the game is improved and the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the first special symbol Since it is possible to play while paying attention to other than the stop symbol, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first). Even if the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the special symbol is not stopped and displayed, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the result of the second special symbol lottery is always controlled to be a big hit or a small hit during the rush mode. Therefore, when a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the game mode is shifted to the rush mode before the control of the 1st big hit game is started, and the 2nd special symbol side. Whenever the game of is executed, the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit is started. Will be. That is, the second big hit based on the fact that the game on the second special symbol side is executed during the rush mode, or the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. When the control of the game or the small hit game is started, the player subsequently changes the first decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot of the first special symbol). It can be inferred that the stop display is performed at the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) and that the game is controlled by the first jackpot game. In this way, the second game based on the fact that the game on the second special symbol side is executed during the rush mode and the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. When the control of a big hit game or a small hit game is started, it is possible to recognize that hits (big hit, small hit) occur continuously, and to improve the motivation to play by getting double joy, the game. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, since the game on the second special symbol side can be executed even in the game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode), the game mode other than the rush mode (normal mode) , Rush preparation mode), when the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit is started. There is. In other words, the second big hit game or small hit based on the fact that the game on the second special symbol side is executed or the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. Even if the control of the winning game is started, it may not be controlled to the first big hit game after that. That is, the second big hit game or small hit based on the fact that the game on the second special symbol side is executed and the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (second big hit C, second big hit D) or a small hit. The start of the control of the hit game suggests the control of the first big hit game, and does not mean that the control of the hit game is always executed. Before winning the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the 1st special symbol lottery, the game on the 2nd special symbol side cannot be executed as described above, or the 2nd special symbol When the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started by restricting the stop display, the first big hit game may be controlled after that.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. During the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) from the start of to the stop display with the jackpot symbol, the expectation of the prize ball is higher than in the normal mode (low probability non-time saving state). By controlling the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), which has a high value and is advantageous to the player, during the variable display of the first decorative symbol executed in response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Since the rush mode suddenly occurs, the player can be surprised and surprised. Further, even before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the rush mode is generated during the variable display of the first special symbol so that the player can advance the game advantageously. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In the third embodiment, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 1185 in step S409a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). This is configured to start the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state), but the rush mode may be started at least after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device in step S502a of the first variable processing (FIG. 129), the probability change flag is set to the off state to end the rush mode. However, the rush mode may be terminated at least before the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol (before the variation time of the first special symbol elapses). For example, in step S501a of the first variable processing (FIG. 129), the rush mode is started by setting the time saving flag to the off state before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses, or the rush mode is started, or the first special symbol is also used. The rush mode may be terminated by setting the probability change flag to the off state before the fluctuation time elapses. That is, in this example, the rush mode is controlled from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery to the stop display of the jackpot symbol, but the first special symbol It suffices if the fluctuation display is in progress (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), and the rush mode can be started in the middle of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, or the rush mode can be set in the middle of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. You may want to quit.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Since the second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), the jackpot (first jackpot A, 1st jackpot A,) is performed in the first special symbol lottery. Before winning the first big hit B), only the game on the first special symbol side is made to be executed. That is, the state before winning the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the 1st special symbol lottery is substantially the execution of the game on the 2nd special symbol side (in other words, a part of the function of the pachinko machine 1). ) Can be said to be in a restricted state. Then, when a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the 1st special symbol from the start of the variable display of the 1st special symbol to the stop display at the big hit symbol. During the fluctuation display of (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the restriction is released by shifting to the rush mode to allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side, and the prize ball is acquired more than in the normal mode. The expected value of is being improved. Therefore, it is restricted by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol (during the period of the variable time of the first special symbol) executed in response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Since the game is allowed to be executed on the side of the second special symbol, the player can be surprised and surprised. In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the restriction is lifted by shifting to the rush mode to allow the execution of the game on the second special symbol side. By performing various games, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

In the third embodiment described above, the second special symbol fluctuates until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). The time (second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol, and the stop display frequency of the second special symbol is changed to the stop of the first special symbol. By significantly lowering the display frequency, the player is made to execute only the game on the 1st special symbol side before winning the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) in the 1st special symbol lottery. In the configuration, the game on the 2nd special symbol side is substantially restricted, but until the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery (the game mode shifts to the rush mode). To prevent right-handed hitting, the firing intensity of the game ball by the hitting ball launching device 500 is weakened to less than a predetermined strength, or the hitting ball launching device 500 launches the game ball to the right region of the center accessory 2500 of the game ball launched at a predetermined strength or higher. The approach is obstructed by a member or the like, the detection by the second start port sensor 3132 is stopped so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 2102, or the game ball enters the second start port 2102. Even when the ball enters and the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132, the detection signal is ignored (the first special symbol in step S201 of the first and second start port winning processes (FIG. 125)). In the lottery, if a flag indicating that the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) has been won is set, it is judged that the game ball has not been won in the 2nd starting port 2102). When the game on the 2nd special symbol side cannot be executed and the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the variation of the 1st special symbol is being displayed (1st). During the period of the fluctuation time of one special symbol), the game on the second special symbol side may be executed by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). As a result, the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) can be reliably switched between the rush mode and the other game modes.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). Since the second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), the jackpot (first jackpot A, 1st jackpot A,) is performed in the first special symbol lottery. Before winning the first jackpot B), it can be said that the suspension of fluctuation of the second special symbol is substantially restricted. Then, when a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is being displayed (1st special symbol). (During the period of fluctuation time), the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (frequency at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started) is increased by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). .. That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the stop display is not displayed in the jackpot symbol), the stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, so that the number per unit time is increased. 2 Probability that the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and the second decorative symbol is a small hit symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the second special symbol or the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. The probability of being stopped is improved. In this way, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol (during the period of the variable time of the first special symbol) executed in response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), by executing a novel game in which the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases by shifting to the rush mode. , It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). By performing a long-term fluctuation with a second special symbol (second fluctuation time) of 600 seconds, which is significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is substantially restricted, and the first When a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the special symbol lottery, the rush mode (high probability non-high probability) is displayed during the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol). It was configured to increase the frequency of stopping and displaying the second special symbol (frequency at which the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts) by shifting to the time saving state), but in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot (first jackpot) Until A, 1st jackpot B) is won (until the game mode shifts to rush mode), the 2nd special symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the 2nd special symbol are restricted from being stopped and displayed. , When a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the rush mode (during the period of the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol) during the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol By shifting to the high-probability non-time saving state), the regulation may be lifted so that the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol can be stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined in step S501b of the second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) that the second fluctuation time has elapsed (the second fluctuation timer has become 0), the states of the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are confirmed and the rush occurs. If it is a game mode other than the mode (high probability non-time saving state) (normal mode (low probability non-time saving state), rush preparation mode (high probability non-time saving state)), it changes according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The second special symbol and the second special symbol that change based on the transition to the game mode other than the rush mode by ending the process without stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol to be performed. 2 The decorative design may be stopped and displayed. As a result, the main game (the game on the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side) can be reliably switched between the rush mode and the other game modes.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time). When the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) is won, the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is set during the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol). By shifting, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the jackpot symbol) is not stopped and displayed, the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is shortened (changed). The frequency of stop display of the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol increases, and as a result, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol per unit time. The probability and the probability that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol are improved. In this way, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol (during the period of the variable time of the first special symbol) executed in response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Since the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise. In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), by executing a novel game in which the lottery frequency of the second special symbol increases by shifting to the rush mode. , It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). (2nd fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol (1st fluctuation time), and the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot) is performed in the 1st special symbol lottery. When B) is won, the change of the second special symbol is changed by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) during the change display of the first special symbol (during the period of the change time of the first special symbol). The time (second fluctuation time) is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. That is, when the mode is changed to the rush mode, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the game modes (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode, but at least the rush mode is shown. It suffices if the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is changed from the game mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode when shifting to the rush mode. The variation time (second variation time) of the second special symbol may be extended as compared with the game mode (normal mode, rush preparation mode) other than the rush mode. In this case, the variation time until the second decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is changed to correspond to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The fluctuating stop display frequency of the second decorative symbol changes, and the probability that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol and the second decorative symbol is the second special symbol per unit time. Since the probability that the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol corresponding to the second special symbol will be stopped and displayed is improved or decreased, it fluctuates according to the second special symbol and the second special symbol. The game motivation can be changed by changing the fluctuation time until the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, not only the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol, but also the second decoration that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to play while paying attention to whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol (second fluctuation time) is changed, and the first decorative symbol that changes in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol Even if the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol) is not stopped and displayed, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, until the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode), the second special symbol Since the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time), the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit. The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game based on the above is rarely started. On the other hand, when a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is being displayed (1st special symbol). In order to shorten the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol to 5 seconds by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) during the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery. The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game based on the result being a big hit or a small hit can be started frequently. That is, when a big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, the rush mode is displayed during the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol). By shifting to the (high probability non-time saving state), the probability that the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game is started is improved. In this way, by suddenly shifting to the rush mode during the variable display of the first decorative symbol (during the period of the variable time of the first special symbol) executed in response to the first special symbol and the first special symbol. Since the frequency of starting the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game increases and the chances of the player winning the prize ball increase, the player can be surprised and surprised. In addition, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the frequency of starting the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game increases by shifting to the rush mode. By executing the game, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In the third embodiment described above, the game on the second special symbol side is substantially restricted before the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery. The control of the second big hit game and the small hit game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit or a small hit is rarely started, but the second big hit game and the small hit game are started. It may not be possible to start control of. For example, before winning the big hit (1st big hit A, 1st big hit B) in the 1st special symbol lottery, the game on the 2nd special symbol side cannot be executed as described above, or the 2nd special symbol When the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery becomes a big hit or a small hit by restricting the stop display, the change start that the result of the 1st special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol becomes a big hit By shifting to the rush mode as an opportunity, the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game may be started. As a result, when the control of the second big hit game or the small hit game is started based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being a big hit or a small hit, the control of the first big hit game is always started after that. As a result, double joy is obtained by continuously generating hits (big hits, small hits), so that it is possible to improve the motivation for playing and suppress the decline in the interest in playing games.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the middle (during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the prize ball can be obtained by the game on the second special symbol side by shifting to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). That is, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed, the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol and the second of the second special symbol). The big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the special symbol) and the small hit symbol (the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol of the second special symbol) The prize ball can be obtained by controlling the second big hit game or the small hit game based on the stop display displayed in. In this way, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the first decoration corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). Even if the big hit symbol of the symbol is not displayed as a stop, the player can be surprised and surprised because the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game can be started by suddenly shifting to the rush mode. Can be given. Further, the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, not only the control of the first jackpot game is started, but also the rush mode (high probability) is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the variable time of the first special symbol). Even in the case of shifting to the non-time saving state), the player can increase the chances of winning the prize ball by being able to start the control of the second big hit game and the small hit game, so that the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode) until the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is won in the first special symbol lottery (until the game mode shifts to the rush mode). In the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the second fluctuation time) is 600 seconds, which is much longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (first fluctuation time). When the jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) is won, the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is set during the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (during the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol). By shifting, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shortened (changed) to 5 seconds. Then, the rush mode is terminated when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses, and the first decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol (the first special symbol). The control of the first jackpot game is started when the jackpot symbol and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol are stopped and displayed. That is, when the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shortened by shifting to the rush mode, the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot A, first jackpot) is always performed in the first special symbol lottery thereafter. It is possible to recognize that the game is controlled by the first big hit game based on winning B). Therefore, even during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the second decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the second special symbol By executing a novel game in which it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) is changed, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the third embodiment described above, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the time saving function is stopped and the rush is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is configured to shift to the preparation mode (high probability non-time saving state), but the timing to stop the time saving function (the time when the rush mode occurs) is not limited to the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. The timing for stopping the time saving function (time when the rush mode occurs) may be appropriately set within the period up to. For example, the time saving function may be stopped 5 seconds after the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is a big hit in the rush preparation mode, may be stopped to control the transition to the rush mode, or the first special symbol may be controlled in the rush preparation mode. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started according to the type of the first big hit and the type of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and a plurality of predetermined types of time (for example, 0 seconds) are started. When a time determined from (at the start of fluctuation) of 5 seconds and 10 seconds elapses, the time saving function may be stopped to control the transition to the rush mode.

In the first to third embodiments described above, when the transition to the rush mode is controlled, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a notification to that effect, so that an advantageous state different from that of a big hit or a small hit can be obtained. Although the player is made to recognize that the occurrence has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not display the notification that the transition to the rush mode is to be controlled, and the rush is performed in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. By continuously executing the effect display during the big hit game to be executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in connection with the first big hit game when the big hit is made in the preparation mode even after the end of the first big hit game (first). In the effect display during the big hit game, the number of rounds is added and updated until the rush mode is finished (for example, if the rush mode is started after executing the first big hit game for 16 rounds, the second big hit game or the small hit is performed during the rush mode. When the game is started, the number of rounds added to the number of rounds of the first big hit game is displayed.) It is difficult to recognize the end of the first big hit game and the start of the rush mode, and the rush mode is integrated with the first big hit game. In this case, it seems that the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit game is significantly increased (about twice in the above example) as compared with the conventional game machine. Since the value of the big hit can be improved, the game entertainment can be improved, and in the case of the third embodiment, when the big hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, the lottery is concerned. An effect that makes the rush mode appear integrated with the reach effect by executing a reach effect that causes a game ball to be driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500 while the decorative pattern is changed, which is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the result. In this case, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by being able to win a prize ball while the reach production is being executed. In the third embodiment, as a rush preparation mode. When starting the rush mode based on the big hit as a result of the first special symbol lottery, after notifying that the first big hit game will be started, the effect display during the first big hit game is started, and the first The rush mode and the first jackpot game are continued until the jackpot game is completed (the number of rounds is added and updated until the first jackpot game is completed in the effect display during the first jackpot game that is executed at the start of the rush mode). It may be possible to show and in one piece, and in this case also once It is possible to improve the value of the jackpot by giving the illusion that the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is significantly increased (about twice in the above example) compared to the conventional game machine. Can be improved. In addition, when the first big hit game is started, an effect of notifying the start of the first big hit game and notifying the switch to right-handed is executed, and in the first big-hit game, the game ball is driven into the right area of the center accessory 2500. It is designed to let you. Therefore, even if the effect display during the first big hit game is executed at the start of the rush mode, or the effect display during the first big hit game is continued until the rush mode is ended even after the first big hit game, the game is played. It is possible to have a person drive a game ball into the right area of the center accessory 2500 and win a game ball in the second prize opening 2103b, which does not give a disadvantage because the prize ball can be obtained. .. As described above, in this example, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the rush mode, the result is either a small hit or a big hit, and the result is not a loss. Therefore, whenever the second special symbol lottery is performed during the rush mode, the small hit game or the first big hit game is executed and the prize ball can be obtained. That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a state in which a prize ball can be obtained by controlling the transition to the rush mode after the end of the first big hit game (the first big hit game and the second big hit game or the small hit in the rush mode). The game) occurs continuously, and in the third embodiment, a state in which a prize ball can be obtained is continuously generated by controlling the transition to the rush mode before the start of the first big hit game. By executing, for example, a series of effects (for example, playing a video composed of a series of stories) over the state in which the prize balls generated continuously can be obtained, the first jackpot game and the second in the rush mode are performed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a big hit game and a small hit game. Further, as a reach effect executed over a period from the start to the end of the rush mode in the third embodiment, for example, after displaying the mode of the battle on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second big hit game in the rush mode or the like. When the small hit game is started, a display such as "Right-handed and shoot a cannonball at the enemy army!" Is displayed to make the player right-handed and the player right-handed to hit the second big winning opening 2103b. Depending on the acceptance of the game ball, a shell may be shot at the enemy army to reduce the number of the enemy army. In addition, as described above, as an effect of showing the first big hit game and the rush mode in an integrated manner, in order to perform an effect of causing the player to hit the game ball into the right area of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory A game ball can be driven into the right area of 2500 to win a prize in the second large winning opening 2103b, which makes it possible to obtain a prize ball, so that no disadvantage is given.

In the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first fluctuation pattern setting process ( The rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is started by setting the time saving flag to the off state when starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 in step S409a of FIG. 191). However, the rush mode may be started after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, after the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the time saving flag is set to the off state before the variation time of the first special symbol elapses in step S501a of the first variable processing (FIG. 129). 1 The rush mode may be started during the variation display of the special symbol (during the period of the variation time of the first special symbol). That is, in the third embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery, either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. However, the time to control the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is different by setting the time saving flag to the off state when starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, but the fluctuation of the first special symbol Even if the start timing of the rush mode is changed by changing the time from the start of the display until the time reduction flag is set to the off state, the rush mode ends after the start (change of the first special symbol). The time until the time elapses) changes, and the time to control the rush mode can be changed.

A specific example in which the start timing of the rush mode is different during the variation display of the first special symbol (during the period of the variation time of the first special symbol) as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. FIG. 195 is an example of a variation pattern table selected in a high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), and FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing the effect content executed when the start timing of the rush mode is changed. This is an example.

As shown in FIG. 195, the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected at the time of a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) in the variable pattern table selected in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode). A variable pattern table and a variable pattern table in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected when the result is lost are set. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B), four kinds of fluctuation patterns of big hit time fluctuation patterns A to D are set. In the variation pattern table in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is selected when the result is lost, two types of variation patterns, the variation patterns A and B, are set. Then, when a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), the step of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). In S402a, the fluctuation pattern table when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern table according to the high probability time saving state (rush preparation mode), and the fluctuation at the time of big hit. Any fluctuation pattern of patterns A to D is determined. On the other hand, if a loss is determined in the first special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving state (rush preparation mode), the high-probability time-saving state (rush preparation mode) is performed in step S403a of the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191). As the variation pattern table according to the above, the variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected as the result of the first special symbol lottery, and one of the variation patterns A and B at the time of loss is determined.

In the jackpot time fluctuation patterns A to D, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol from the start to the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, and the timing for setting the time reduction flag to the off state ( Rush mode start timing) is set. In this example, 70 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for the jackpot fluctuation patterns A to D, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. The first big hit game based on what is done is executed. Further, in the jackpot fluctuation patterns A to D, the timing for setting the time saving flag to the off state (start timing of the rush mode) is different. First, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern A, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed. By setting the time saving flag to the off state when starting, the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is entered, so 70 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, becomes the time to control the rush mode. ing. Further, in the jackpot time fluctuation pattern B, the rush mode is entered by setting the time saving flag to the off state 20 seconds after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed. Of the remaining time, 50 seconds is the time to control the rush mode. Further, in the jackpot time fluctuation pattern C, the rush mode is entered by setting the time saving flag to the off state 40 seconds after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed. Of the remaining time, 30 seconds is the time to control the rush mode. As described above, in this example, although the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same, the earlier the timing for setting the time reduction flag to the off state (the start timing of the rush mode), the longer the time for controlling to the rush mode. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode increases, and the number of executions of the second small hit game based on winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode also increases. Since the number increases, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode.

Further, in the jackpot time fluctuation pattern D, the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is not shifted by setting the time saving flag to the off state when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses. In this way, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern D is executed, the second small hit game based on winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery can be executed without shifting to the rush mode. It has become difficult. That is, after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, only the first jackpot game based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the prize ball can be obtained only by the first jackpot game. ..

In the loss-time fluctuation patterns A and B, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set from the start to the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In this example, 70 seconds, which is the same as the jackpot time fluctuation patterns A to D, is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for the loss time fluctuation pattern A, and the first special for the loss time fluctuation pattern B. 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. Further, in the loss time fluctuation patterns A and B, the time saving flag is not set to the off state, and the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) is continued even after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. There is.

Next, when the jackpot fluctuation patterns A to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A are executed, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the jackpot fluctuation patterns A to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A, the rush mode (high probability non-time reduction state) is set by setting the time reduction flag to the off state. ) Is executed, and when the rush mode is not shifted, the effect of notifying whether or not to execute the first big hit game is executed. More specifically, "Pounding effect 1" is executed as an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the rush mode at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds out of 70 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and 20 to 20. At the stage of 40 seconds, "Pounding effect 2" is executed as an effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the rush mode, and at the stage of 40 to 70 seconds, the first after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. "Pounding effect 3" is executed as an effect of notifying whether or not to execute the jackpot game.

Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (A), the rush mode is set by setting the time saving flag to the off state when starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Since the mode shifts to (high probability non-time saving state), during the variable display of the first special symbol, as an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect of notifying that the rush mode is in progress is executed. There is. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern B is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (B), the rush mode is set by setting the time saving flag to the off state 20 seconds after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. It shifts to (high probability non-time saving state), but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, as a successful production of "Pounding production 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main character attacks the enemy character and rushes. The effect of notifying that the mode will be changed is being executed. After that, as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, an effect of notifying that the rush mode is in progress is executed.

Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern C is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (C), the rush mode is set by setting the time saving flag to the off state 40 seconds after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. It shifts to (high probability non-time saving state), but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, as a failure effect of "Pounding effect 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the enemy character attacks the main character and 20 to 20 seconds. At the stage of 40 seconds, as a successful production of "Pounding effect 2" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect is executed to notify that the main character shifts to the rush mode by avoiding the attack of the enemy character. There is. After that, as the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, an effect of notifying that the rush mode is in progress is executed.

Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern D is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (D), the time saving flag is turned off when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is finished 70 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display. The state is set, but at the stage of 0 to 20 seconds, the enemy character attacks the main character as a failure effect of "Pounding effect 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and at the stage of 20 to 40 seconds, As a failure effect of "Pounding effect 2" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main character eats the attack of the enemy character, and at the stage of 40 to 70 seconds, "Pounding effect 3" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a successful production, the main character stands up to notify that the first big hit game will be executed after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. In this way, the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) until a successful production is executed in any of the "pounding effect 1", "pounding effect 2", and "pounding effect 3" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. ), Or whether to execute the first jackpot game after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, so the player pays attention to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with expectation. can do.

Further, when the loss time fluctuation pattern A is executed, as shown in FIG. 196 (E), the time saving flag is not set to the off state, but it is 0 out of 70 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a failure effect of "Pounding effect 1" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of ~ 20 seconds, the enemy character attacks the main character and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the stage of 20 to 40 seconds. As a failure effect of "Pounding effect 2", the main character eats the attack of the enemy character, and in 40 to 70 seconds, the main character collapses as a failure effect of "Pounding effect 3" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, the effect of notifying that the first big hit game is not executed is being executed. In this way, even during the variable display of the first special symbol based on the fact that the first special symbol was decided to be lost in the first special symbol lottery, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays "pounding effect 1", "pounding effect 2", and "pounding effect". By executing the "effect 3", the player can pay attention to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 until the end.

When the loss time fluctuation pattern B is executed immediately before the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on any of the jackpot time fluctuation patterns B to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A, the first based on the loss time fluctuation pattern B As an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the variable display of the special symbol, a preceding effect that the main character encounters an enemy character may be executed. For example, at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the loss time variation pattern B, there is a hold waiting for the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the next first special symbol is in the hold state. Whether or not to execute any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns B to D and the loss time fluctuation pattern A as the symbol fluctuation display is determined in advance (so-called look-ahead), and the jackpot fluctuation display as the next first special symbol fluctuation display is performed. When it is determined in advance that any of the fluctuation patterns B to D and the fluctuation pattern A at the time of loss is to be executed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 precedes the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern B at the time of loss. You just have to execute the production. Then, when the preceding effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the variation display of the first special symbol executed thereafter is based on any of the jackpot time variation patterns B to D and the loss time variation pattern A. Since it is possible to recognize that productions such as "Pounding effect 1", "Pounding effect 2", and "Pounding effect 3" are executed, the expectations of the player can be raised even before the execution of such effects. ..

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the control to shift the game mode to the rush mode is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. Control to shift to the rush mode at a predetermined rate when the result of the symbol lottery is not a big hit (before the first big hit game is started after the first special symbol is changed) Anything that executes the control to shift to the rush mode may be executed. For example, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order during the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), the first variation pattern setting process is executed and the special variation pattern is selected. The game mode may be shifted to the rush mode when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. With such a configuration, since the chances of winning the prize ball are increased, it is possible to pay attention to the occurrence of the rush mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described.

[First fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of the first variation pattern setting process in the fourth embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first variation pattern setting process (FIG. 191) of the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

If the flag indicating that the jackpot has been won is not set (NO in step S401a), the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 selects a variation pattern table at the time of disconnection according to the gaming state (step S403a). ), The variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start process (step S404a').

Next, in the main control MPU4100a, the determined fluctuation pattern is a specific fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern of 180 seconds and a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198 (E) described later). (Step S408a'), if it is a specific fluctuation pattern, the time saving flag is turned off to stop the time saving function (step S409a), and then the process proceeds to step S405a.

On the other hand, in the main control MPU4100a, the determined fluctuation pattern is a specific fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern of 180 seconds and a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol in the rush preparation mode shown in FIG. 198 (E) described later). ) (NO in step S408a'), the process proceeds to step S405a without operating the time saving flag.

Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush preparation mode (high-probability short-time game state) and the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result is started (triggered by the start of the variation display), the time saving function is stopped and the mode shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). As described above, the probability change flag is set to the off state when the total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 70 times. That is, the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is continued until the total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 70 after the end of the jackpot game. By setting the probability change flag to the off state when the fluctuation is stopped based on the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, or by setting the time reduction flag to the on state again when the fluctuation of the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped. The transition to the rush mode may be made until the fluctuation based on the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped. In this case, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed by the second fluctuation start process executed during the rush mode. The rush mode may not be terminated until at least the fluctuation based on the specific fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is stopped by not subtracting the number of STs at the start of.

[Game specs with special designs]
FIG. 198 is an example of various tables showing the game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the fourth embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 192) in the third embodiment described above will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 198 (E), the variation time of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 seconds to 120 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode, and the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost in the rush preparation mode. If it is, any of 3 seconds, 180 seconds, and 300 seconds is set, and if it is a big hit, 300 seconds or 600 seconds is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order in the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state), a specific fluctuation pattern (300 seconds) is used as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. , 600 seconds), the mode shifts to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). That is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made different according to the type of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed is more advantageous than the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs. Is set to be low. Specifically, in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, it continues for 180 seconds or 300 seconds, whereas it is a big hit. In the rush mode that occurs when becomes, it is designed to continue for 300 seconds or 600 seconds. That is, in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs, the value is equal to or higher than the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. It is designed to be given to the player. In addition, even in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the value equivalent to the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs (300). Seconds or 600 seconds continuation) may be added, in which case the expectation for the rush mode can be further improved.

Further, the probability that a specific fluctuation pattern is executed is set to be lower than the winning probability in the high probability state (for example, about 1/500). In this way, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, a state advantageous to the player (rush mode) can occur, so that the player has an increased chance of winning a prize ball, so that the rush preparation mode In some cases, expectations for the occurrence of rush mode can be improved. In addition, although the fluctuation time has been increasing in recent years, when the above-mentioned reach effect is executed for a long period of time and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit is made with the expectation for the big hit gradually increased. It is effective for improving the interest of the game because it can be generated, but when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed, not only is the disappointment from the state where the expectation for the big hit is gradually increasing, but also it is useless for a long period of time. There is a risk that the game will be less enjoyable if it is recognized that the player has spent a lot of time. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the first special symbol is changed over a long period of time, which is advantageous to the player within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Since a state (rush mode) is generated to enable the acquisition of prize balls, it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest due to the result of long-term fluctuations being out of order.

It should be noted that control is performed to make the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is executed during the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, different. By doing so, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode may be different. For example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always 10 as a rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. Either rush mode C (high probability non-time saving state C) set to seconds or rush mode D (high probability non-time saving state D) where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is always set to 15 seconds. It is possible to set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to 10 seconds and 15 seconds, and there is a high possibility that it will be set to 10 seconds rather than 15 seconds (for example, 10 seconds with an 80% probability). Set to 15 seconds with a 20% probability) Rush mode C (high probability non-time saving state C) and set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to 10 seconds and 15 seconds as in rush mode C. Rush mode D (high probability non-time saving) that is possible and more likely to be set to 15 seconds than 10 seconds (eg 80% chance to set to 15 seconds and 20% chance to set to 10 seconds) It may be controlled to either the state D) or the state D). As a result, the degree of advantage cannot be determined only by the type of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the duration of the rush mode, and the type of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the duration of the rush mode, and the second special symbol Since the degree of advantage can be determined only by comprehensively determining the fluctuation time of the above, it is possible to draw more attention to the game and improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs. It is set that the player's advantage is lowered by changing the second special symbol with a fluctuation time (10 seconds or 15 seconds) longer than or equivalent to the fluctuation time (5 seconds or 10 seconds). That is, in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs, the value is equal to or higher than the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. Is to be given to the player. In addition, the second special symbol in the rush mode that occurs when a big hit occurs even in the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. The second special symbol may be changed in a fluctuation time (5 seconds or 10 seconds) equivalent to the fluctuation time of the above, and in this case, the expectation for the rush mode can be further improved.

In addition, when the result of the 1st special symbol lottery is out of order and the change is determined to be a specific variation pattern, the variation time of the 2nd special symbol in the rush mode for transition control is changed to the deviation of the 1st special symbol. It may be different depending on the type of pattern. For example, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 180 seconds as a specific fluctuation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific variation pattern, the first variation pattern table of the second special symbol is controlled so as to shift to the rush mode C. A plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol. In this case, the specific variation pattern is executed even when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect. It is possible to set a difference in the degree of advantage of each of the two types of rush modes (rush mode C and rush mode D) that occur in the case, and a specific fluctuation pattern is obtained even when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order. If the rush mode continues for a longer period of time when is executed (rush mode C in this example), more prize balls can be won. It can be deterred.

Further, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of 300 seconds as a specific fluctuation pattern, the transition control to the rush mode D is performed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of 180 seconds as a specific fluctuation pattern, the first is the fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol so as to control the transition to the rush mode C. A plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol. In this case, the specific variation pattern is executed even when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect. Regardless of which of the two types of rush modes (rush mode C and rush mode D) that occur, the same amount of prize balls can be obtained. If the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the above two types of rush modes is the same, the advantage of the rush mode C, which is disadvantageous to the player and has a short duration, is increased. be able to. That is, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each of the two types of rush modes is about the same, the number of prize balls that can be obtained per unit time is increased in the rush mode C that is executed in a shorter time, which is more for the player. Since it becomes an advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the rush mode C having a short duration can be increased.

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 199, the transition of the gaming state according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the part different from the third embodiment will be described, and the description will not be duplicated.

(Rush preparation mode)
Similar to the third embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode), the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning opening 2101b), and the first The result of the special symbol lottery is lost 70 times in a row, and based on a fluctuation pattern other than the specific fluctuation pattern described later (non-specific fluctuation pattern; in this example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set). When the first special symbol is changed 70 times in a row (when it becomes a non-specific deviation), it shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). Further, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation start of the first special symbol is triggered only when the first jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is determined by the time the first special symbol lottery is executed 70 times. As a result, it shifts to a high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode, second game game state), but in this embodiment, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, it is based on a specific fluctuation pattern. When the first special symbol is changed (when the specific symbol is out of specification), the transition to the high-probability non-time saving state (rush mode, second game game state) is triggered by the start of the change of the first special symbol. If the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) continues until the big hit game based on the first big hit is started, but as described above, the first If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, it will continue until the total number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 70 times. It has become.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the opportunity for the rush mode to occur increases as compared with the third embodiment. That is, in the third embodiment, the rush mode is generated only when the big hit occurs in the rush preparation mode, but in the fourth embodiment, a specific fluctuation pattern is generated even if the big hit does not occur in the rush preparation mode. The rush mode is generated when is selected. When the rush mode is generated, specifically, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on a specific fluctuation pattern is started, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, "Enter the rush mode! Hit right!" ), Audio output from the speaker (for example, "Enter rush mode. Please hit right"), lighting mode of the lamp and LED (lighting mode that encourages right-handing, for example, the door so as to surround the outer circumference of the game window 101. The lamp and LED provided in the frame 5 are controlled to shift to the rush mode by means of the mode in which the light moves from the launch rail 660 toward the right side region of the center accessory 2500, etc.), and the switch to right-handed operation is performed. It is designed to notify the player.

In addition, the rush mode that occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific fluctuation pattern is executed is the number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. Since it continues until the total number reaches 70 times, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the remaining number of fluctuations that can stay in the rush mode during the rush mode, and the player has a chance time. Is designed to recognize that there is a time limit. Further, when the rush mode is terminated when the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the specific fluctuation pattern is stopped, the elapsed time from the transition of the game mode to the rush mode on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the elapsed time , The remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time that can be controlled in the rush mode) is displayed so that the player can recognize that the chance time has occurred and that the chance time has a time limit. May be good.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the first case is when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the first special symbol is changed based on a specific fluctuation pattern (when the specific out of order is found). The transition control to the rush mode is shown when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, but the transition to the rush mode is controlled because the first special symbol fluctuates in a specific fluctuation pattern and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be. For example, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern is stopped, a specific fluctuation pattern is set in step S515a of the first fluctuation processing (FIG. 129). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol has been changed, and when it is determined that the first special symbol has been changed based on a specific fluctuation pattern, the time saving flag is turned off to stop the time saving function. It may be. In this case, since the transition to the rush mode is controlled after the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the relationship between the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation pattern (180 seconds or 300 seconds in the above example) and the duration of the rush mode is lost. It is not necessary to change the first special symbol over a long period of time (180 seconds or 300 seconds) as described above.

Further, in this case, the rush mode is continued until the number of STs becomes 0, but after the transition to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state) is controlled, the first special symbol lottery is performed before the number of STs becomes 0. When the result is a big hit, the rush mode is terminated, and after the first big hit, the transition control to the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state) is performed.

In addition, in the rush mode in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the transition is controlled due to the fact that the first special symbol is changed based on a specific fluctuation pattern and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. , Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed. As described above, the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery will not be missed during the rush mode, so it is better to change only the 2nd special symbol during the rush mode for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The number of prize balls that a player can obtain is larger than that of changing both. In this example, as described above, the first starting port 2101 is arranged in the left area of the center accessory 2500, while the second starting port 2102 is arranged in the right area of the center accessory 2500, and when hit left, the first starting port 2101 is arranged. 1 A game ball can be put into the starting port 2101, but a game ball cannot be put into the second starting port 2102, and a game ball can be put into the second starting port 2102 when hitting right. 1 A game ball cannot enter the starting port 2101. Therefore, if the transition to the rush mode is controlled and only right-handed is performed without left-handed, the first special symbol is changed and the number of STs is subtracted until the first hold number counter becomes 0. However, after the first hold number counter becomes 0, the first special symbol does not start to fluctuate, and small hits or big hits are generated in all the remaining ST counts, and prize balls can be won. ..

In the above example, the pachinko machine 1 that performs so-called sequential fluctuation control in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed each time a start winning prize is generated is used, but the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol. Even if the pachinko machine 1 that controls the so-called priority fluctuation that fluctuates with priority is used, the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, and the first special symbol fluctuates based on a specific fluctuation pattern. Then, it may be possible to control the rush mode for transition control due to the stop display of the out-of-order symbol. In this case, a rush mode in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, and the transition is controlled due to the fact that the first special symbol is changed based on a specific fluctuation pattern and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. By hitting right inside, it is possible to constantly change the 2nd special symbol and not start the fluctuation of the 1st special symbol, so the number of STs at the time of transition control to the rush mode The prize ball can be obtained by changing the second special symbol in all the remaining times to generate a small hit or a big hit.

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, a rush occurs when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol according to the lottery result. Although it is configured to control the transition to the mode, the transition to the rush mode may be controlled when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific deviation. Specifically, as a random number related to the lottery process of the first special symbol, a first missed symbol random number for determining the missed symbol is provided, and when the result of the first special symbol lottery is missed, the first missed symbol random number is provided. It is configured to draw a lottery whether to use a specific outlier symbol or a non-specific outlier symbol based on the above, and when a lottery result indicating that the specific outlier symbol is obtained is obtained, the transition to the rush mode is controlled. You may.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the third embodiment described above, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is made different according to the game mode (game state), and when the game mode is the normal mode (normal state) and the rush preparation mode (high probability time saving state). Is set to 600 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the game mode is the rush mode (high probability non-time saving state). That is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is different due to the transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is set after the rush preparation mode is started. It may be different according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol required until the transition to the rush mode (since the game on the first special symbol side is performed in the rush preparation mode, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is mainly used). The differences between the fifth embodiment and the third embodiment of such an example will be described below.

First, in the fifth embodiment, after the first jackpot game based on the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is completed in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode, the game mode is the rush preparation mode (high probability). (Time saving state) is entered, but after shifting to the rush preparation mode, 1 is added to the fluctuation count counter of the special symbol each time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the rush preparation mode is calculated. I'm counting. Since the game on the first special symbol side is performed in the rush preparation mode, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is mainly counted. Then, in the first special symbol lottery in the rush preparation mode, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on the jackpot (first jackpot A, first jackpot B) is started, the game mode is set to the rush mode (high probability non-time saving). The state) is entered, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted before the transition to the rush mode is the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) or less than the predetermined number of times, and is the third in the rush mode. 2 The fluctuation pattern table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol is different.

As shown in FIG. 200, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the rush mode, two types of fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds and 10 seconds are set, and the rush mode is set. In the process, one of the two types of fluctuation patterns is determined. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table used during the rush mode, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more and less than 50 times. The probability of determining each of the two types of fluctuation patterns is different between the case and the case. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the fluctuation pattern is 80%, and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 20%. On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. The probability of determining the pattern is 20%, and the probability of determining the variation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the variation time of the second special symbol is 80%.

As described above, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. The probability of determining the fluctuation pattern in which 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is higher than that of less than 50 times. The probability of determining 5 seconds, which is the shortened fluctuation time, is increased. Therefore, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time for controlling the rush mode (variation time of the first special symbol), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened. By increasing the probability of determination, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode increases, and the second based on winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode. Since the number of times the small hit game is executed also increases, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode. That is, the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is determined. By increasing the probability of playing, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode. And, as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode increases, the player's dissatisfaction and frustration tend to increase, but it can be acquired during the rush mode. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction and frustration of such players.

On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. The probability of determining the fluctuation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of determining the pattern. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50 times, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is more than 50 times or more. The probability of determining 10 seconds, which is the lengthened fluctuation time, is high. Therefore, when either 300 seconds or 600 seconds is executed as the time for controlling the rush mode (variation time of the first special symbol), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. By increasing the probability of determination, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol that can be executed during the rush mode is reduced, and the second based on winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the rush mode. Since the number of times the small hit game is executed is also reduced, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode is reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), the predetermined number of times It is configured so that the probability of determining the variation time of the second special symbol with a shorter variation time is higher than the case where it is less than, but the number of fluctuations of such a special symbol is a predetermined number of times (book). In the case of less than 50 times in the example, the probability of determining the variation time of the second special symbol with the shorter variation time may be higher than the case of the predetermined number of times or more. .. For example, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is less than 50, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 5 seconds. When the probability of determining the pattern is 80% and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 20%, while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 50 or more. 20% has a probability of determining a fluctuation pattern in which 5 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and 80% has a probability of determining a fluctuation pattern in which 10 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. And it is sufficient. In such a configuration, the smaller the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode. By increasing the probability of deciding what to do, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode. Then, as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode decreases, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode increases, so that during the rush preparation mode Can play the game with a sense of tension.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 50 times or more or less than 50 times, and is the fifth in the rush mode. 2 The fluctuation pattern table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol is configured to be different, but the number of fluctuations of such a special symbol is not the fixed number of times as in 50 times, but the rush preparation. The number of times may be changed according to the type of the big hit (first big hit A, first big hit B) that triggered the transition to the mode. For example, when the jackpot that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first jackpot A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 20 times or more. If the jackpot that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode is the first jackpot B, it is determined whether the number is less than 20 times, and the time between the start of the rush preparation mode and the transition to the rush mode. It may be determined whether the required number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 50 times or more or less than 50 times. Then, as in the fifth embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is 20 times (first jackpot A) or 50 times (first jackpot B). ) Or more, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the rush mode is shorter than when it is less than 20 times (1st jackpot A) or 50 times (1st jackpot B). If the probability of determining a thing is high, the number of fluctuations of such a special symbol is set to 20 times due to the first jackpot A, and 20 times or more is caused by the first jackpot B. Since the probability is higher than when it is set to 50 times and becomes 50 times or more, the probability of being executed by shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during rush mode is high, and it is acquired during rush mode. You can increase the number of prize balls that can be played. That is, for each type of jackpot (1st jackpot A, 1st jackpot B) that triggered the transition to the rush preparation mode, the judgment criteria at the time of transition from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode (the second in the rush mode). By differentiating the fluctuation pattern table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol), the prize balls that can be obtained during the rush mode will also be different, so the rush It is possible to pay attention to which type of jackpot is the trigger for shifting to the preparation mode, and to prevent the game from becoming a rut during the rush preparation mode.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol required from the start of the rush preparation mode to the transition to the rush mode is the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) or less than the predetermined number of times. In the rush mode, the fluctuation pattern table used to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is configured to be different, but the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is When the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) is reached, the fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol may be configured to be different. For example, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is less than the predetermined number (50 in this example), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer. When the probability of determination is high, while the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is a predetermined number (50 in this example) or more, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. Of these, the probability of determining the one with the shorter fluctuation time should be increased. In such a configuration, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times in this example) after the transition to the rush mode. The state in which the probability of deciding on a longer one is high is changed to the state in which the probability of deciding on the one with a shorter fluctuation time among the fluctuation times of the second special symbol is high. Even if the change is made from a state in which the probability of determining the fluctuation time of the symbol with a shorter fluctuation time is high to a state in which the probability of determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol with a longer fluctuation time is high. Good. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set during the rush mode. By changing the probability of determining a shorter (longer) one, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the rush mode is a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) even though the same rush mode is in effect. Since the frequency of winning the prize ball (the execution frequency of the second small hit game based on winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery) will be different before and after, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming a rut in the rush mode. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained. Further, the number of round games, the opening pattern, the type of hit (big hit, small hit), winning probability, fluctuation time, etc. shown in FIGS. 146, 154, 192, 198, and 200 are examples. It is not limited to the above, and can be appropriately changed as long as it has the same action and effect as described above.

(Sixth Embodiment)
[Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 201 to 207. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 205 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 206 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 207 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 262) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed (Fig.). 207).

Further, the table unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the skill area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, it can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 205).

[Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206 and 262. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly equipped.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 206. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 262) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 262). reference).

[Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 207. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lower the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203 and 205 to 207. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is provided, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided so that the game balls can be accepted at either of them.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged near the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 207, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the skill area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 208 (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit as viewed from the rear. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The first prize opening door is a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate with the lower side rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 to illuminate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an illegal insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. In the upright state where the first prize opening door member 2112 is closed, the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[Under the side unit]
Next, the 2200 below the side unit of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 (a) is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and the top of the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 209 (b) is a perspective view of the bottom of the side unit and the top of the side unit as viewed from the back. The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

The side unit lower 2200 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and the unit base 2201 projecting forward from the front surface and upward and upward. The rear is open and communicates with the three ball receiving portions 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 and the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. It is provided with a hi section 2203 that guides the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 to the rear.

The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left side of the front view. The three ball receiving portions 2202 are separated from each other to the left and right and project from the front surface of the unit base 2201. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

The side unit lower 2200 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in the front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the side unit upper 2300. The side unit lower 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1112 by the gutter portion 2203, respectively. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel plate 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 installed in the back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 245). Is detected by and discharged downward.

[On the side unit]
Next, the 2300 on the side unit of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 209. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a.

The side unit upper 2300 has a flat plate-shaped unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a shelf portion 2302 extending forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extending to the left and right so that the right end side in the front view is lowered. And have. The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

With the side unit upper 2300 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right by the shelf portion 2302. It can be guided to the direction (center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a).

[Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213. FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 212 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow path on the right side of the center accessory. Further, FIG. 213 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 213 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line FF in (a).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the production unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can. The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006.

The center accessory 2500 includes a flat plate frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the peripheral edge of the opening 1112 that largely penetrates back and forth in the center of the panel plate 1112, and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like frame having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents the game ball from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. It is equipped with a center base 2510. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 has the highest position on the upper side slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open to enter on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 at a substantially central outer peripheral surface in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view. The warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side of the front view in the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 2521 can be released and heads backward at the lower end of the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 207) and the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 are moved to the center side in the left-right direction along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510 and behind the flange portion 2511. The guide path 2523 to be guided and the game ball guided by the guide path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in the front view, and extend to the left and right along the lower side within the frame at the center of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. It includes a stage 2530 that rolls the supplied game ball in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2530 is curved so that both the left and right ends of the front view are high and the left and right sides of the portion corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction are the lowest, and the stage 2530 swells so as to be slightly higher between the lowest portions. It is out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W shape with a gentle slope. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a portion that is slightly higher than the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a fan-shaped central guide portion 2531 that lowers forward and slightly expands to the left and right, and a central guide portion 2531. It is provided with a fan-shaped side guide portion 2532, which is formed in each of the two lowest parts on both the left and right sides of the above, and which is lowered toward the front and spreads to the left and right.

In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp inlet 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the taxiway 2523 is provided. It is discharged forward from either the central guide portion 2531 or the side guide portion 2532 of the stage 2530, and is returned (refluxed) into the game area 5a again. Further, in the stage 2530, when the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located directly under the central guide portion 2531, and when the game ball is discharged from the central guide portion 2531 into the game area 5a. , It is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

As shown in FIG. 212, in the center accessory 2500, a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends substantially vertically downward from the right end of the front view on the upper side of the center base 2510 to the vicinity of the substantially center in the vertical direction. The front peripheral wall so that the right end side is slightly lowered from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the vicinity of the inner circumference of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000) in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. The upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in which a part of the portion 2512 extends to the right, and the right hanging wall portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right lateral wall portion to approximately the same height as the stage 2530. It includes a 2512c and a lower right lateral wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends to the left so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and has an upper right distribution space 2541 in which game balls can be distributed and an upper right. On the right side of the front view of the right hanging wall portion 2512c that communicates with the distribution space 2541, a right flow passage 2542 that allows the game ball to flow downward, and a game ball that communicates with the right flow passage 2542 and is formed below the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d. It is provided with a lower right distribution space 2543 that can be distributed and can communicate with the game area 5a. The upper right distribution space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right distribution space 2543 form a right-handed game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size whose vertical and horizontal dimensions are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can flow down by a free path. The right-hand flow passage 2542 is bent so that the vicinity of the lower end extending vertically downward extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the width in the left-right direction is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls can be flowed down in a row up and down.

The lower right distribution space 2543 extends to the left from directly below the portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end side in the front view becomes lower, and then opens to the left with the second attacker passage 2543a. (Ii) A discharge passage 2543b that communicates with the right end of the attacker passage 2543a in the front view and extends downward, and a second that penetrates the flange portion 2511 and opens rearward at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b so that the game ball can pass through. It is equipped with a two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 is a passage whose vertical dimension is about twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has the left and right dimensions outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. The lower right distribution space 2543 is assembled on the game board 5, and the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543a is on the left side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, and the first start port 2002 and the first large. It opens to the left at a height between the winning opening 2005 and the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c that opens at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and is returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being removed.

The upper right circulation space 2541 has an open front as a whole, and a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a and the upper right lateral wall portion 2512b at a portion substantially lower half in the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat plate-shaped transparent right front decorative plate 2544 whose front extends from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c to the right in the front view, and the rear is the right hanging wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right distribution space 2543 is closed by a flat plate-shaped transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 whose front extends downward from the position of the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right horizontal wall portion 2512d, and the rear is the lower right horizontal wall. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 that project inside the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 and extend in a direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball. In the right-hand flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 project alternately from the surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other in the distribution direction of the game ball at predetermined intervals. The plurality of reduction ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542 have a distance between the reduction ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side, which is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right-hand flow passage 2542, the game ball always flows down in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to the acceleration due to gravity.

On the other hand, in the lower right distribution space 2543, a plurality of reduction ribs 2546 alternately project at predetermined intervals from the surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 facing each other in the distribution direction of the game ball. .. The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right distribution space 2543 are set so that the distance between the deceleration ribs 2546 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball between the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side. There is. Further, the distance between the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the reduction rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, even within the lower right distribution space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, and the distribution speed of the game balls is attenuated to prevent the distribution speed of the game balls from becoming too high.

In the present embodiment, the upper right distribution space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, and the second starting port 2004, and the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped.

More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending from the upper rear end of the upper right hanging wall portion 2512a to the right in the front view, and one game ball is provided. It is formed so that it can only pass in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 that detects the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003. The gate portion 2003 is arranged slightly to the left of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 project forward from the front of the flange portion 2511 that closes the lower half behind the upper right distribution space 2541 below the gate portion 2003. Be prepared for. More specifically, the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the general winning opening 2001 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear open at the upper end, and is directly below the general winning opening 2001. On the left side surface of the front view, the ball receiving member 2548 is formed so that the second starting port 2004 opens to the left, and the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511 extend around the axis whose lower end extends back and forth. The second start port door member 2549, which is rotatably attached and closes the second start port 2004 so as to be openable and closable, and the second start port door member 2549, which is attached to the rear surface of the flange portion 2511 and is opened and closed, are driven to open and close. It includes a start port solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 262) and a second start port sensor 2551 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004.

The general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500 is opened with a size capable of accepting only one game ball upward from the right side of the front view with respect to directly below the gate portion 2003. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center accessory 2500 to the right in the front view.

The second starting port 2004 opens to the left in the front view directly under the general winning opening 2001, and the second starting port door member 2549 rotates counterclockwise in the front view to open to the left. It becomes possible to accept the game ball. The second starting port door member 2549 has two sides extending so that the outer shape of the front view extends from a base circle forming the lower portion and a point outside the base circle so as to be in contact with the base circle. It is formed in a so-called "drop-like shape" as if it is composed of and, and is rotatably attached at the center of the base end circle.

In the second starting port 2004, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2550 is de-energized, and the second starting port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the tip side is located substantially directly above the base end circle. , The second start door member 2549 is closed so that the game ball cannot be accepted. Then, when the start port solenoid 2550 is energized according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the tip side of the second start port door member 2549 moves to the left in the front view. In addition, the second start door member 2549 rotates and stops rotating with the tip side slightly higher. As a result, the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be accepted. In the state where the second starting door member 2549 is rotated and opened, the tip of the second starting door member 2549 is in a state of substantially coincident with the vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511, detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, and discharged downward.

The second prize opening 2006 is arranged so as to open upward at the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543. More specifically, the second upper prize opening 2006a constituting the second prize opening 2006 opens upward at the right end of the front view in the second attacker passage 2543a, and is also the second prize opening. The second lower prize opening 2006b constituting the 2006 opens upward in the second attacker passage 2543a on the left side and the lower side of the second upper prize opening 2006a in the front view. The widths of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are formed within a range of three to four times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The center accessory 2500 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the center base 2510 so as to be able to open and close the second upper winning opening 2006a that opens upward, and the front end is the front surface of the flange portion 2511. It is attached to the flat plate-shaped second upper prize opening door member 2552, which protrudes forward and closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and is inclined so that the left end side of the front view is lower, and the rear surface of the center base 2510. The second upper prize opening door member 2552 is opened and closed, and the second upper prize opening solenoid 2553 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 (Fig. 262) that detects the game ball received in the second upper prize opening 2006a. The second lower prize opening 2006b that opens upward is supported by the center base 2510 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the front end is from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. Also protrudes forward and closes the second lower prize opening 2006b, and is attached to the flat plate-shaped second lower prize opening door member 2555 that is inclined so that the left end side of the front view is lower, and the rear surface of the center base 2510. The second lower attacker solenoid 2556 that opens and closes the second lower grand prize door member 2555, and the second lower grand prize sensor 2557 that detects the game ball received in the second lower grand prize 2006b (FIG. 262). See) and.

Further, the center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction straddling between the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-shaped crossing plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side of the view is lowered and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and a second lower large portion that extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-shaped discharge plate portion 2559 that extends in the left-right direction from the left end of the winning opening 2006b to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a so that the left end side is lowered and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And have. The length of the transfer plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction is formed within a range of 2 to 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The left and right lengths of the discharge plate portion 2559 are formed within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend vertically, and on each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is installed. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 213, from the upstream side of the flow of the game ball, the first deceleration rib 2546a, the second deceleration rib 2546b, the third deceleration rib 2546c, the fourth deceleration rib 2546d, Ten deceleration ribs 2546 of the fifth deceleration rib 2546e, the sixth deceleration rib 2546f, the seventh deceleration rib 2546g, the eighth deceleration rib 2546h, the ninth deceleration rib 2546i, and the tenth deceleration rib 2546j are provided. An odd-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and an even-numbered reduction rib 2546 is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is arranged on the left side of the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a and near the right end of the transfer plate portion 2558. The third deceleration rib 2546c is arranged substantially in the center of the transfer plate portion 2558 in the left-right direction. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is arranged on the right side of the right end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006b and near the left end of the transfer plate portion 2558. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is arranged on the left side of the right end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is arranged on the right side of the front view at the center of the second lower winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction. The 7th deceleration rib 2546g is arranged on the left side of the center of the second lower winning opening 2006b in the left-right direction in the front view. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is arranged to the right of the left end of the front view of the second lower prize opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end of the front view of the second lower winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is arranged substantially in the center of the discharge plate portion 2559 in the left-right direction.

Of the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration ribs 2546j, odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the ninth deceleration ribs 2546i are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and the odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 are provided. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first deceleration ribs 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j, the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545 is provided with an even number of deceleration ribs 2546 from the second deceleration rib 2546b to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j. The even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the vicinity of the ceiling (see FIG. 213 (a)).

Of the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second deceleration rib 2546b and the second deceleration rib 2546b closest to the left end of the front view of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555). It is separated from the lower end of the other deceleration ribs 2546 by a large distance from the upper surface of the other reduction ribs (2546). More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are each at the same distance as the substantially outer diameter of the game ball from the left end of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b in the front view. , Are formed so as to be separated.

As a result, when the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b shifts from the open state where the game ball can be accepted to the closed state where the game ball cannot be accepted, the second upper prize opening slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower prize opening door member 2555, the front left end of the second upper winning opening 2006a or the front left end of the second lower winning opening 2006b, and the second deceleration rib 2546b. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) in which the game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h.

In the state where the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 protrude forward and the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are closed, the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 are closed. A state in which the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game ball that is narrower than the above and circulates (rolls) on the upper surface of the second upper prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower prize entrance door member 2555 is the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h. It always comes into contact with the door, and a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 includes a portion of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right side of the front view, and an inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000). ), A space with a width in which only one game ball can be distributed is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven to the right of the front view from the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the center in the game area 5a. The game ball can be distributed in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the front view of the accessory 2500.

Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the left and lower sides of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game ball driven into the game area 5a abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails and circulates downward through various paths.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 214 to 217. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 215 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 218 (a) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 218 (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as viewed from the back.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 to the bottom of the back box 3010, and then is centered in the left-right direction along the bottom. After guiding to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge unit 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game ball received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500 to the left in the front view along the bottom inside the back box 3010. The back box 3010 is discharged from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a on the left side in the rear view, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. The upper relay board 3040 that relays the connection with the upper left decorative board 3253, the upper relay board cover 3041 that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending to the left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 housed in the effect drive board box 3042 from the peripheral control board 1510. The effect drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor, decorative board, etc. based on the control command, and the main control board 1310, which is attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each winning opening sensor, each solenoid, etc. It is provided with a panel relay board 3044 that relays the connection of the above, and a panel relay board cover 3045 that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 218 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is open at the front and squarely penetrates the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that projects rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. Two fixing grooves 3010c, which are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the main liquid crystal display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left middle decorative unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is mounted in the back box 3010 on the left side in the front view, upward from the center in the vertical direction, near the front end. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is formed with a translucent unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration attached to the front of the unit base 3051 to three-dimensionally imitate the "middle tile" of mahjong. The translucent back left middle decorative body 3052, the back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back left middle decorative board 3053. It has.

The back left middle decorative unit 3050 can illuminate the back left middle decorative body 3052 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left middle decorative substrate 3053.

[Movable production unit after the back]
Next, the rear-rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 219 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 220 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 220 (b) disassembles the lower back movable effect unit for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear. FIG. 221 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the back bottom rear movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the back bottom rear first decorative body and the back bottom rear second decorative body, and FIG. 222 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back together with the 1st decorative body after the back bottom and the 2nd decorative body after the back bottom. FIG. 223 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the rear-back movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 224 (a) is a front view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 224 (b) shows that the back-bottom rear first decorative body and the back-lower rear second decorative body are rotated together from the normal state. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the back lower rear second decorative body is facing the front, and (c) is the state of (b) the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body. Is a front view of a state in which is moved to the moving end on the left side of the front view. Further, FIG. 225 (d) shows the first decorative surface of the back lower rear first decorative body by rotating the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body together in the state of FIG. 224 (c). It is a front view of the state facing the front, and (e) is a front view, in which the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated from the state of (d) to open the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom. It is a front view of the state where the second decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back bottom and the second decorative surface of the second decorative body after the back bottom are facing the front.

The lower back movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back movable effect unit 3100 is supported by the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back, which are hinge-rotatably supported on one side extending vertically with respect to the axis extending vertically. The rear second decorative body 3120, the rotary drive unit 3130 in which the rear lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body are hinge-rotatably mounted and each can be rotationally driven separately, and the rotary drive unit 3130. The slide unit 3150 is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back bottom rear fixed decorative body 3160 is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

The first decorative surface 3110 after the back bottom has the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 which are arranged facing each other and have different decorations formed and have translucency, and the first decorative surface. The 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 and the first decorative body 3113 are mounted inside the display screen. The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from the decorative surface 3111 and the side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 of the four sides extending vertically in the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113 are outward. The first decorative body is formed between the two first hinge portions 3115, which are projected so as to be able to be supported so as to rotate around the axis extending vertically, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112. It is equipped with a first decorative substrate (not shown), which is mounted inside the main body 3113 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides.

The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is formed with a decoration with the left half of the characters "holy". The sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect moving image) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

The two first hinge portions 3115 are vertically separated from each other and are mounted coaxially. These first hinge portions 3115 are hinge-rotatably supported by the second hinge portion 3124 of the second decorative body 3120 after lowering the back. The first decorative substrate after the back bottom can illuminate the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

The second decorative surface 3120 after the back bottom has the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122, which are arranged so as to face each other and have different decorations from each other and have translucency, and the first decorative surface. The 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 are supported so as to face each other, and the thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 and the rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 extend vertically. It protrudes outward from the side of one side that is in contact with the second decorative surface 3122, and the two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 are rotated about the axis extending vertically. A decorative body that is cylindrically protruding downward from the lower end of the three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are separated from each other vertically and the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124. The support shaft 3125, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the decorative body support shaft 3125. The second detection piece 3128 extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the above, and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112 are mounted in the second decorative body 3123, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on both sides. It is equipped with a second decorative substrate (not shown), which is mounted on the lower back.

The first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration in which the characters "Tenun" are written vertically. The second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration on which the right half of the word "holy" is applied. The second decorative body 3123 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed to be approximately the same size as the first decorative body 3113 of the lower back first decorative body 3110. That is, the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom have external dimensions. They are formed to be approximately the same size.

The three second hinge portions 3124 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 are vertically separated from each other and are coaxially attached to each other, and the lower rear first decorative body is placed between the second hinge portions 3124. The first hinge portion 3115 of the 3110 is located and attached to each other so that the hinges can rotate. As a result, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state in which the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other by hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface of each other. 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 can be rotated (hinge rotation) from the open state where they are substantially on the same surface. Then, in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are left and right with the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 sandwiched between them. The decorations are integrated and the word "holy" appears. Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the first decorative surfaces 3111 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, respectively, The decorations corresponding to the decorations made on the 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are provided, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the first The one hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are made inconspicuous.

In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 for hinge-rotating the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom independently of the second decorative body 3120 can be rotated at the upper end portion. Will be inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 in the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surface 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122. More specifically, it is formed to have a length of 80% to 90%. As a result, even if the heavy lower back first decorative body 3110 or the like is eccentric on one side extending vertically and the hinge can be rotated by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the lower back first decorative body 3110 or the like is provided. The decorative body 3110 and the like (decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall down.

As shown in FIG. 222, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a protruding from the gear teeth at one place on the outer circumference, and cannot be rotated once. The back bottom rear second decorative substrate of the back bottom rear second decorative body 3120 can illuminate the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 by appropriately emitting the LEDs on both sides.

The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rear-rear movable production unit 3100 is a rotary drive unit base that rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 in a box shape with the front side open and is slidably attached to the slide unit 3150 in the left-right direction. The cylindrical sleeve portion 3132a, which is rotatably supported by the 3131 and the rotary drive unit base 3131 and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, protrudes upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132a and under the back. One of the connecting portion 3132b attached to the lower part of the rear first decorative body 3110, the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c formed over half a circumference around the lower end portion of the sleeve portion 3132a, and the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c. It includes a rotation transmission member 3132 having a first detection piece 3132d extending outward from the end.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 includes a spur gear-shaped first drive gear 3133 that meshes with the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a rear lower rear first drive motor that rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133. The 3134, the first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first drive motor 3134 is mounted after the back bottom, and the first drive motor bracket 3135 mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3136, a lower rear second drive motor 3137 for rotationally driving the second drive gear 3136, and a lower rear second drive motor 3137 are mounted and inside the rotary drive unit base 3131. It includes a second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132. The first rotation detection sensor 3139 and the lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. It is equipped with a second rotation detection sensor 3140, which is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and can detect the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and includes a sub liquid crystal display device 3114, a back bottom rear first decorative board, a back bottom rear second decorative board, and a back bottom rear first drive motor 3134. The rotation drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection between the back bottom rear second drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and the second rotation detection sensor 3140 and the back bottom rear relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150. , Further prepared.

Further, the rotary drive unit 3130 includes a flat plate-shaped unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131 and extends long to the left and right, and a rack gear. A rack member 3143 having a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view of the 3143a is provided.

The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape and has a main portion 3131a in which the decorative body support shaft 3125, the back lower rear first drive motor 3134, the back lower rear second drive motor 3137, and the like are housed. A sub-part 3131b, which is substantially cubic in height at about half the height of the main part 3131a and is arranged on the left side of the main part 3131a when viewed from the front and accommodates the rotation drive unit relay board 3141, is provided. The main portion 3131a and the sub portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

Further, the rotary drive unit base 3131 is provided with a U-shaped upper bearing portion 3131c and a lower bearing portion 3131d whose front end side is open and notched toward the rear on the top plate portion and the bottom plate portion of the main portion 3131a. .. The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates vertically, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmission member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is recessed from the upper side to the lower side and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the second decorative body 3120 is inserted after the back bottom. The open front end side of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d is closed by the unit cover 3142.

The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the right side of the front view of the decorative body support shaft 3125 via the first drive motor bracket 3135. The rear lower rear second drive motor 3137 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the left side of the front view of the decorative body support shaft 3125 via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

The first drive motor 3134 after lowering the back is a connecting portion 3132b that rotates together with the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 that meshes with the first drive gear 3133 by rotationally driving the first drive gear 3133. The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back bottom. On the other hand, the rear lower rear second drive motor 3137 is driven by the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, so that the second decorative body side operating gear 3126 at the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 meshes with the second drive gear 3136. The second decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

As shown in FIG. 220, the slide unit 3150 of the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is mounted on the box-shaped unit base 3151 which is mounted in the back box 3010 and whose front and upper sides are open, and the upper part in the unit base 3151. The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 is attached to the front surface, and the slide guide 3152 extending to the left and right is rotatably attached around the axis extending forward and backward approximately in the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction. A transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a that meshes with the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 3153b that rotates integrally with the pinion gear 3153a and has a diameter larger than that of the pinion gear 3153a. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 that meshes with the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3154 that rotationally drives the drive gear 3154, and a rear lower rear third drive motor 3155 that is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151. The slide detection sensor 3156, which is installed in the unit base 3151 and detects the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and the substantially lower half of the front open portion of the unit base 3151 are closed to close the unit base. A horizontally long flat plate-shaped slide cover 3157 attached to the front end of the 3151, and a rear lower rear relay board 3158 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3151 to relay the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. It has.

The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotation drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom rotates the drive gear 3154 to rotationally drive the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshing with the drive gear 3154, and the pinion gear 3153a. The rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid and moved in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 that meshes with.

Subsequently, the operation of the rear-back movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 223 and 224 (a), the rotation drive unit 3130 is located at the right end of the front view with respect to the left and right slide directions by the slide unit 3150. ing. Further, in a normal state, the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lowering the back are in a closed state with the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, and then after lowering the back. The first decorative surface 3111 (display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 is directed forward. In this normal state, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are located on the right side of the front view with respect to the axis of the hinge rotation extending vertically (decorative body support shaft 3125). doing. Further, in a normal state, the side side of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, which is rotatably supported by the hinge, is on the side opposite to the side of the decorative body support shaft 3125. The whole is rotated so as to be located in front of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated by about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction in a plan view.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 223, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. Further, in a normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. It has become. Further, in a normal state, the second detection piece 3128 of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is detected by the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

Further, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 201 and the like, the first decorative body 3110 after the back is facing the front (front) of the movable decorative body unit 3100 after the back in the assembled state on the game board 5. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right of the front view, at the lower part of the right corner of the front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is on the player side. The display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized from the above. Further, in this normal state, as described above, the right side side of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is located in front of the center of the hinge rotation, and the sub liquid crystal display device. The display screen of 3114 is inclined so as to face the surface of the game panel 1100 toward the vertical line side passing through the center of the game area 5a.

In this normal state, the second drive motor 3137 after the back bottom of the rotary drive unit 3130 passes through the second drive gear 3136, the second decorative body side operating gear 3126, and the decoration support shaft 3125, and the second back bottom rear second. When the second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, and the second decorative surface 3120 is rotated clockwise (160 degrees) in a plan view, it is closed and the lower back is closed. The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 located in front of the rear second decorative body 3120 is pushed by the rear lower rear second decorative body 3120 and rotates together, and is decorated with "heavenly luck". The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing the front (see FIG. 224 (b)). Further, the first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the lower back first decorative body 3110, which was facing the front in the normal state, is in a state of facing the rear and cannot be seen from the player side. From this state, neither the lower back first decorative body 3110 nor the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be further rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view.

In the state of FIG. 224 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back is in a state of being detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and after lowering the back. The second detection piece 3128 of the decoration support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decoration 3120 is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven in the front view clockwise direction by the third drive motor 3155 after the back bottom of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143 The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid to the position at the left end of the front view together with the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 via 3143a. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, when the rotation drive unit 3130 is slid to the position of the left end in the front view, the axis line extending up and down the hinge rotation (the center line of the decorative body support shaft 3125) is It substantially coincides with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the slide is moved to the position at the left end of the front view while maintaining the state of FIG. 224 (b). Further, FIG. 225 (d) shows the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmission member by moving the position to the left end position in the front view in the state of FIG. 224 (a) and driving the first drive motor 3134 after lowering the back. The first decorative body after the back is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the first decorative body side operating gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of the 3132. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the 3110 is facing directly in front of the user, or the first decorative surface 3110 after the back is driven by the first drive motor 3134 after the back from the state shown in FIG. 224 (c). By rotating 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is rotated together with the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back, and the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is rotated. It shows a state in which one decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) is directed directly in front of the surface.

Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 224 (c), the second lower back decoration body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by driving the second lower back rear drive motor 3137, or FIG. 225. In the state of (d), when the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back is rotated 180 degrees in the clockwise direction in a plan view by driving the first driving motor 3134 after lowering the back, as shown in FIG. 225 (e). , The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are folded facing each other, and then the hinge is rotated to rotate the back bottom. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 are opened after the lower back, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and face the front.

In the state of FIG. 225 (e), the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the first decorative body after lower back 3110 and the second decorative body 310 after lower back are compared with the case where the first decorative body 3110 after lower back and the second decorative body 310 after lower back are superimposed on each other and closed. By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back second decorative body 3120 side by side, the decorative surface formed by the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 can be formed. The size is doubled, and it can be made to stand out in the game area 5a to strongly attract the player's attention, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player. Further, in the state of FIG. 225 (e), the decorations of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are integrated, and the characters "holy" are written. The decoration becomes visible. The first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower rear second decorative body 3120 have the first decorative surface 3111, 3121 and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122. The decoration corresponding to the decorated decoration is given, and when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are opened. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character "holy" can be visually recognized by the player in good condition.

As shown in the figure, the one-piece decoration formed by the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 includes "holy" on top of "holy". A cutout decoration 3170 such as "1" is formed. This cutout decoration 3170 is a decoration made by cutting out a part of one character or a pattern, and on the upper side of the cutout decoration 3170, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, which will be described later, is the back upper left first decorative body 3210. When the cut-out decoration 3260, in which the decoration of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the decoration of the second decorative member 3222 of the second decorative body 3220 on the back side are lined up side by side, the entire character of "sparrow" is completed. Yes (see Figure 254).

As described above, according to the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-bottom rear second decorative body 3120 are closed by superimposing their surfaces on each other. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are opened side by side, the decorative surface of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom is enlarged (expanded) in the front view game area 5a. ), And the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which were closed and could not be seen from the player side, are opened so that they can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is directed forward. In this state (see FIG. 225 (d)), when the first decorative body after the back bottom is rotated and arranged on the left side of the front view of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom, the first decorative body after the back bottom is initially displayed. The decorative area, which was only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110, becomes two, the first decorative surface 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 of the second decorative surface 3120 after the back bottom so as to extend to the left. The area of decoration is doubled, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which were previously invisible, can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). Alternatively, in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom faces forward (FIG. 224 (c)). (Refer to), when the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is rotated and arranged on the right side of the front view of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back, initially only the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back is used. The decorative area is doubled as the second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 so that the existing decorative area extends to the right. At the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen so far, can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 225 (e)). In this way, by opening the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decorative range by the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. Since it is possible to expand and change the decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player's interest is focused on the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back. It is possible to attract strongly and entertain the decoration spread by the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back, and at the same time, make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, in a state where the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are put together. When rotated to, the hinges of the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lower back rotate around the side extending vertically on one side that is rotatably attached. When the surface (back surface) facing backward in this state is rotated so as to face forward, the entire positions of the first decorative body 3110 after lowering the back and the second decorative body 3120 after lower back move the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the opposite position by sandwiching it. More specifically, the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed, and the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back is directed forward. In this state (see FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)), when the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the lower back first decorative body is formed. The entire 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 move to the left in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIGS. 224 (b) and (C). On the other hand, in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back faces forward (FIG. 224 (b)). And (c)), when the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 The whole moves to the right in the front view, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 is in a state of facing forward (see FIGS. 224 (a) and 225 (d)). As a result, the area of decoration by the lower back first decorative body 3110 or the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-bottom rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120, and the back-lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back-lower rear second decorative body 3120. It is possible to entertain the movements and decorations of the 3120 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in a state in which the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, one of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 or the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is placed. In any case, when the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are rotated together to open by rotating, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body after the back bottom are the first. (Ii) Since the surface of the decorative body 3120 that can be seen from the player side starts to rotate, at the beginning of the rotation, the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom open. It is difficult to understand whether they rotate together, and it is possible to excite the player by which action to perform, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player. Further, with respect to the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, the player can see that the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom are opened and rotated together. Since the change in decoration that can be seen from the side is different, it is possible to entertain the player with the change in decoration in various patterns, and it is possible to make the player less bored by various effects.

As described above, the lower back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is first decorated differently by rotating the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 by hinges. The decorative surfaces 3111, 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112, 3122 can be turned to the front, and the slide unit 3150 slides the first decorative body 3110 after the back and the second decorative body 3120 after the back to the left and right. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

Further, in the lower back movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (the position eccentric from the center of gravity) of the two sides extending vertically in the outer shape of the square in the second lower back decorative body 3120. The upper end and the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward coaxially with the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 in the rotary drive unit 3130, respectively. It is supported, and it is rotatably supported at two locations that are as far apart as possible from the top and bottom. Therefore, the decorative body support shaft 3125 protrudes from a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, so that the decorative body support shaft 3125 is above the decorative body support shaft 3125. Even if an eccentric load that attempts to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 acts due to the weight of the attached back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120, the decorative body support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt. The decorative body support shaft 3125 can be supported in a straight line, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the lower back rear second decorative body 3120 can be rotated. In other words, since the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decorative body Since the support shaft 3125 is difficult to tilt, the heavy back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and back lower rear second decorative body 3120, which are rotatably attached to each other, can be placed coaxially with the axis of the hinge rotation. It can be rotatably supported without problems.

[Back top left movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. FIG. 226 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 226 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 227 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 228 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 229 (a) is a front view showing the back-up left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 229 (b) shows the back-up left first decorative body and the back-up left second decorative body in the back-up left movable effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which it moved to the position of the right end of the front view, and (c) shows the state which developed the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body from the state of (b). It is a front view.

The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the left end in the front view to the vicinity of the center. The back-up left movable production unit 3200 extends up and down the front-view of the back-top left first decorative body 3210 and the back-top left first decorative body 3210, which have a square front-view shape and have a predetermined decoration on the front surface. Mounted above the back top left second decoration 3220 and the back top left first decoration 3210, which are hinged rotatably mounted on the right side and have different decorations on the two facing sides. The rotary drive unit 3230 that hinges and drives the back upper left second decorative body 3220, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are slid to the left and right together with the rotary drive unit 3230. It is provided with a slide unit 3240 that can be mounted inside the back box 3010.

The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a flat plate-shaped fixed decorative member 3211 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency, and a front end of the fixed decorative member 3211 on the right side of the front view. It covers the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211 and the cylindrical first hinge portion 3212, which protrudes outward from the side and is coaxially attached to the axis extending vertically and vertically. The first decorative body base 3213, which is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and projects upward from the fixed decorative member 3211, is attached between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. From the left end of the first decorative base 3213, which is connected to the upper surface of the first decorative base 3213 and the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and has an L-shaped side view. The connecting portion 3215 extending to a position to the right of the right end, the rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending to the left and right, and the connecting portion 3215 extending forward from the vicinity of the left end in the front view. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3217.
It has.

The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a slightly vertically long quadrangle in a front view. The length of the side extending to the left and right of the fixed decorative member 3211 is the side extending to the left and right of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110, and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120. It has the same length, and the length of the side extending vertically is shorter than the length of the side extending vertically of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration on which the left half of the character "sparrow" is applied. As shown in FIG. 229 (c), in the present embodiment, the character "sparrow" is interrupted from the upper side to the lower side of the lowermost "one" part.

The three first hinge portions 3212 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions upward from the center in the vertical direction. Further, the three first hinge portions 3212 project to the right and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in the front view. The rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the front surface of the portion of the first decorative body base 3213 that protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211. A slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connecting portion 3215 on the rear surface of a portion extending vertically in an L-shape in a side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

The back-up left first decorative body 3210 can illuminate and decorate the fixed decorative member 3211 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the back-up left first decorative substrate 3214.

The back top left movable effect unit 3200 has a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a square outer shape and a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222, which is attached to the first decorative member 3221 and has a translucent decoration on the surface facing back to the surface of the first decorative member 3221, and the left and right sides of the first decorative member 3221. Two second hinges 3223 and two hinges rotatably attached to the first hinge 3212 of the upper left first decorative body 3210, which protrude outward from one of the vertically extending sides. A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-shaped operating gear 3225 attached to the upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member. It is provided with a back-up left second decorative substrate (not shown), which is attached between the 3221 and the second decorative member 3222 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides.

The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is formed with a decoration having the characters "Dokun" on its surface. The second decorative member 3222 is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character "sparrow" is applied to the surface and the back surface of the first decorative member 3221. The second decorative member 3222 can be recognized as the character "sparrow" by being located on the left side of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the first decorative body 3210 on the back upper left side in the front view. Specifically, the decoration by the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 is a cutout decoration 3260 in which the lowermost part "one" is cut off from the upper side with respect to the character "sparrow". On the lower side, the decorations (cutout decorations) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character "sparrow" is completed. Since the cutout decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable production unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", it can be recognized as the character of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut out.

The two second hinge portions 3223 project to the right and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. Further, the two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated from each other, and are provided at positions closer to the center from both upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The operating gear 3225 is attached so as to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operating gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotary drive unit 3230.

The back top left second decorative body 3220 can lightly decorate the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 by appropriately emitting an LED mounted on the back top left first decorative substrate (not shown). ..

The rotation drive unit 3230 of the back top left movable effect unit 3200 creates a space between the rotation drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decoration base 3213 of the back top left first decoration 3210 and the rotation drive base 3231. A rotary drive cover 3232 formed and mounted on the upper side of the rotary drive base 3231, and a working gear 3225 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 which is rotatably mounted between the rotary drive cover 3232 and the rotary drive base 3231. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3233 that meshes, a drive gear that meshes with the transmission gear 3233 (not shown), and a back-up left first drive motor that rotates and drives the drive gear and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232. It is provided with a rotation detection sensor (not shown) that is attached between the 3235, the rotation drive base 3231 and the rotation drive cover 3232, and detects the rotation position of the drive gear.

The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece extending outward, and by detecting this detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, the rotation position of the drive gear is detected, and the drive gear, transmission gear 3233, And the rotation position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operating gear 3225.

The rotary drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left first drive motor 3235 to rotate the back upper left second decorative body 3220 via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operating gear 3225. Can be done.

The slide unit 3240 of the back-up left movable production unit 3200 is slidably attached to the horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, the horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3241, and the slide rail 3242. A base cover 3244 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3241 so as to form a space between the slider 3243 to which the connection portion 3215 of the upper left first decorative body 3210 is attached to the front surface and the unit base 3241. The back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the back upper left second drive mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotating shaft penetrates the base cover 3244 and projects between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3246 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3245, a small-diameter first transmission gear 3247a that meshes with the drive gear 3246, and a large-diameter second transmission gear 3247b that rotates integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. The transmission gear member 3247 rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244 has meshed with the second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The pinion gear 3248 that meshes with the rack gear 3216 and is rotatably attached between the unit base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and the detection piece 3217 of the back top left first decorative body 3210 that is attached to the base cover 3244 It is equipped with a slide detection sensor 3249.

Further, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the left side of the front view on the front surface of the base cover 3244, and is attached to the back upper left first decorative board 3214, the back upper left second decorative board, the back upper left first drive motor 3235, the rotation detection sensor, and the like. The back upper left second drive motor 3245, the back upper left relay board 3250 relaying the connection between the slide detection sensor 3249 and the effect drive board 3043, and the back upper left relay board 3250 covering the front surface of the base cover 3244. A board cover 3251 attached to the front surface, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front surface of the board cover 3251, and a back upper left decorative board 3253 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A translucent back upper left decorative body 3254 attached to the front surface of the back upper left decorative base 3252 so as to cover the front of the back upper left decorative substrate 3253 and having a predetermined decoration formed therein.

When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back top left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 backs up the back top left first decorative body 3210 via the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. It can be slid in the left-right direction together with the left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the back upper left decorative body 3254 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate 3253.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 is back-up so that the back-up left first decorative body 3210 covers the front surface of the back-up left first decorative body 3210 as shown in FIG. 229 (a). The left second decorative body 3220 is in a state of being folded toward the back upper left first decorative body 3210 side by the rotation drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in a state of being. Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in the front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, a rotation detection sensor (not shown) detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the rotation drive unit 3230. Further, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

In the normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the player side. It is invisible from the above (see FIG. 201 and the like).

In a normal state, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the back upper left first decorative body 3210 slides to the right in the front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230 by the rack gear 3216 meshing with the 3248, and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 229 (b)). In this state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the hinge-rotatable vertically extending axes of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are centered in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 253).

Then, in a state where the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the right end in the front view by the slide unit 3240, the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotary drive unit 3230 passes through the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the back upper left second decorative body 3220 that is folded and covers the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is unfolded. The hinge is rotated to the right side of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 in the front view (see FIG. 229 (c)). As a result, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are lined up side by side, which makes them about twice as large as the normal state, so that they stand out in the game area 5a. It can attract the player's attention strongly, and the appearance of a large decoration can surprise the player.

In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side and face the front, and the respective decorations are integrated. Then, the decoration of the character "sparrow" becomes visible. The first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are decorated with the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. Corresponding decoration is applied, and when the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is opened from the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the first hinge portion 3212 and the second hinge portion 3223 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to make the character of "sparrow" visible to the player in good condition.

In addition, the decoration of the character "sparrow" that can be visually recognized as a unit is cut off from the position above the "one" part on the bottom side, and the back top left first decoration body 3210 and the back top. To be integrated with the decoration of the second decorative surface 3112, 3122 of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. Then, the character of "sparrow" is in a perfect state (see FIG. 254).

In this way, the back-up left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back-up left first decorative body 3210 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back-up left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge around the vertical axis, it can be folded so as to cover the front surface of the back upper left first decorative body 3210, or it can be unfolded so as to line up on the front right side of the back upper left first decorative body 3210. It is possible to present a variety of effects to the player.

[Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. FIG. 230 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 230 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 231 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 231 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body in the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is supported by a back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front surface and a back right fixed decorative body 3310 slidably supported in the left-right direction behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310. The frame-shaped movable back right decorative body 3320 and the movable back right decorative body 3320 are slid to the left and right to be mounted in the back box 3010, and the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front surface. It is equipped with a back left drive unit 3330.

The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long substantially quadrangular shape in front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached to the rear surface of the fixed side decorative member 3311 which is three-dimensionally decorated and has translucency, and the fixed side decorative member 3311, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312. As shown in the figure, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a “發” tile decoration. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 can illuminate the fixed side decorative member 3311 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312.

The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long quadrangle having a front view shape substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable side decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 having a translucent property attached to the rear surface of the movable side decorative member 3321. And the frame-shaped movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decorative frame 3322, and the back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decorative frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3324 and the like are provided.

The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is decorated in the same manner as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower end side of the movable base 3323 protrudes downward from the movable side decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and the protruding portion is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the back left drive unit 3330. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U shape along the portion on the right side of the center in the front left-right direction of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322. By making the LED of the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 emit light, the movable side decorative member 3321 can be made to emit light.

The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable production unit 3300 is mounted on the lower front of the unit base 3331 installed in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decoration 3320 can slide in the left-right direction. The slide guide 3332 that extends in the left-right direction is attached, the back left drive motor 3333 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333. A rod-shaped operating arm (not shown) that is attached and the tip side is connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320, and a slide detection sensor 3335 that detects the rotational position of the operating arm and is attached to the unit base 3331. And the back left which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 and relays the connection between the back left fixed decorative board 3312, the back left movable decorative board 3324, the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and the effect drive board 3043. It includes a relay board 3336.

In the unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330, the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is attached to the front of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the left end side in the front view. The slide guide 3332 is attached to the lower end portion of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 when viewed from the rear. The operating arm (not shown) extends from the base end side attached to the rotation shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the right end of the lower side of the back left movable decorative body 3320 having a frame-shaped tip end side. Further, although not shown, the operating arm has a slit formed at the tip thereof, which penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction thereof. A guide pin projecting rearward from the vicinity of the lower right corner of the rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted into the slit.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the back left movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310, and is almost invisible from the front. It is in a state of being. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located in an invisible immersive position. In this normal state, an operating arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. Further, in the normal state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a part of the right end of the front view of the back left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the back left. The portion on the left side of the front view of the front of the fixed decorative body can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached at a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 as the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear movable decorative body 3120. ing.

In this normal state, when the actuating arm is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the actuating arm is inserted. , The operating arm presses to the right in the front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides straight to the right in the front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right side portion of the frame-shaped back left fixed decorative body 3320 is located from the rear side of the front view to the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the sliding movement to the right stops. As a result, the portion of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 to the right of the left side is located to the right of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 231 (b)). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at an appearance position that can be visually recognized from the player side.

In the state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is located at the appearance position, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the player side in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. In addition to being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged rearward through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect movie) is displayed in the display area directly behind the back left movable decoration body 3320, the player can see the frame of the back left movable decoration body 3320. It is possible to give the illusion that a liquid crystal display device is installed inside. As a result, the player can be illusioned that there are two sub-liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the first decorative surface 3111 in the first decorative body 3110 after the back of the movable effect unit 3100.

[Movable production unit on the back]
Next, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243. FIG. 232 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 232 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper and middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 233 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 233 (b) shows the back-up and middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 234 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 234 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 235 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 236 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 237 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive configuration of the back-up middle decorative unit from the front, and FIG. 237 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in (a). FIG. 238 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle decoration unit in a normal state, and FIG. 238 (b) shows a state in which a pair of back-up middle decoration units of the back-up middle decoration unit are half-opened outward. (C) is a front view showing a pair of back-up middle decoration units of the back-up middle decoration unit in a state of being completely opened to the outside.

Further, FIG. 239 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 239 (b) is a rear upper middle drive unit of the back upper middle movable production unit as viewed from behind. It is a perspective view. FIG. 240 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 240 (b) shows the back-up middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 241 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 241 (b) shows the back-up middle rotation unit of the back-up middle drive unit disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 242 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive system of the back-up middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 243 (a) is a front view of the back-up middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 243 (b) is a front view showing the back-up middle decorative body unit lowered in the back-up middle movable effect unit. ..

The back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from substantially the center to the right end in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 233, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the rear of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 and the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 which are attached so as to be openable and closable. The back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 having the back upper middle decorative body 3412, the rotary connecting member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410, and the rotary connecting member 3430 The back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is mounted so as to be able to move up and down and rotatably, and the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back upper right decoration is mounted on the front of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. It includes a unit 3480 and a back-up middle relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the back-up middle drive unit 3440.

As shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the back-up middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency. 3411 and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3412, which are arranged behind the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 and have a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back-up middle first decorations 3412. A pair of light-transmitting flat plate-shaped slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of slide bases 3413 attached to the rear surface of the pair of slide bases 3413 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The back-up middle first decorative board 3414, the back-up middle second decorative board 3415 mounted on the rear surface of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back-up middle second decorative board 3415, and the back-up middle second decorative board 3415. The substrate cover covers the rear surface of the 3415 and forms a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative body 3412 on the back surface and the substrate cover 3416. It includes a flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 attached to the rear side of the 3416 and a decorative unit base 3418 attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417.

Further, the back-up middle decorative unit 3410 is attached to the rear surface of the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative unit base 3418 and the rotating shaft protruding from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A spur gear-shaped first drive gear mounted on the rotating shafts of the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and arranged between the motor base 3419 and the decorative unit base 3418. The 3421 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 that are rotatably attached to the decorative unit base 3418 so as to mesh with the first drive gear 3421 and have the front end projecting forward from the decorative unit base. The first pinion gear 3423, which meshes with the first transmission gear 3422 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative unit base 3418, is provided.

Further, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is a mounting boss that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and attaches one of the pair of slide bases 3413. The first slider 3424 which has 3424b and is slidably attached between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative unit base 3418 in the left-right direction and the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 sandwich the first pinion gear 3423. On the opposite side, it has a rack gear 3425a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends to the left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that penetrates the slider cover 3417 and attaches the rest (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , The second slider 3425 which is slidably attached to the slider cover 3417 and the decorative unit base 3418 in the left-right direction, and the slide position of the second slider 3425 which is attached to the decorative unit base 3418 from the rear side It is provided with a slide detection sensor 3426 for detecting the above.

The pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 has a front view shape in which one end of a quadrangle extending to the left and right in the longitudinal direction bulges outward in a semi-arc shape. The end side on the opposite side is recessed inward in a semi-arc shape, and the portion recessed in this semi-arc is defined as a recess 3411a. Further, in the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the outer periphery excluding the end side in which the recess 3411a recessed inward in a semicircular shape is formed extends rearward in a plate shape. The pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are attached so that the ends on which the recesses 3411a are formed face each other. Further, the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are formed in a milky white color having translucency as a whole, and the front surface of one back-up middle first decorative body 3411 is on the head side of the "dragon". The decoration is formed on the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the back of the rest (the other) so that the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" has a metallic luster.

The back-up middle second decorative body 3412 has a flat plate shape extending to the left and right, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the size when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Has been done. The back-up middle second decorative body 3412 has a circular central decorative portion 3412a that bulges forward in a circular shape that can be inserted into the recess 3411a of the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 in the center, and the left and right of the central decorative portion 3412a. A circular central horizontal decoration portion 3412b formed on both sides separated from each other vertically and a circular central horizontal decoration portion 3412b formed on both the left and right outer sides of the central horizontal decoration portion 3412b and having the same size as the central horizontal decoration portion 3412b. It is provided with an intermediate decorative portion 3412c and a circular end decorative portion 3412d formed on both the left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c near the left and right ends, respectively, and having a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c. The second decorative body 3412 on the back surface is formed in a milky white color having translucency as a whole, and the outer periphery of the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d on the front surface and the like. A linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed on the surface. The second decorative body 3412 on the back is decorated to remind the player of the "dot stick" of "Mahjong".

The pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface, and are rearward around the outer periphery extending to the rear of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface. It is attached to the end. As a result, by assembling the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 is placed between the portion forming the front surface of the back-up middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413. A space is formed in which the second decorative body 3412, the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back surface, and the substrate cover 3416 can be inserted. Further, each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is provided with slits 3413a that penetrate the front and rear and extend to the left and right. Of the pair of slide bases 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side closer to the upper side in one slide base 3413, and the slit 3413a is formed on the side closer to the lower side in the remaining slide base 3413. Further, the pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The pair of back-up middle first decorative substrates 3414 and back-up middle second decorative substrates 3415 are substrates having a white surface (entire surface). This makes it easier to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate less noticeable. Since the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is attached to the slide base 3413 away from the portion forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411 on the back surface, the light from the LED is on the back surface. Since the light irradiation range is widened by the time it reaches the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, it is possible to uniformly illuminate and decorate the entire first decorative body 3411 in the back and middle even if the number of LEDs is small. it can. On the other hand, the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415 can illuminate the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412, and also has a central decorative portion 3412a and a central horizontal decorative portion of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412. The 3412b, the intermediate decoration portion 3412c, and the edge decoration portion 3412d can be independently luminescently decorated.

The substrate cover 3416 includes a mounting boss 3416a that projects rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the rear surface and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The rear end of the mounting boss 3416a of the board cover 3416 that penetrates the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413 is mounted on the slider cover 3417. Further, the mounting boss 3416a of the substrate cover 3416 slides relatively in the left-right direction in the slit 3413a via the bush 3427 that is rotatably mounted. The substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

The slider cover 3417 penetrates back and forth and extends left and right, and the first slit 3417a through which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted and the first slit 3417a penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. It is provided with a second slit 3417b through which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The second slit 3417b is formed near the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

The first pinion gear 3423 is arranged slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction in the front view (see FIG. 237). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged side by side from the left end in the front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have a front end that penetrates the first slit 3417a of the slider cover 3417 and protrudes forward, and is decorated on the head side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in the front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have a front end that penetrates the second slit 3417b of the slider cover 3417 and protrudes forward, and is decorated on the tail side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. Further, the second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that projects upward in a flat plate shape from the upper part near the right end in the front view. The detection piece 3425c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is closed with the ends of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 on the recess 3411a side in contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 238 (a) and the like. There is. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 bulges forward through the circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other parts of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are from the front. I can't see it.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the left end of the front view of the first slider 3424 and the right end of the front view of the second slider 2425 are in the left-right direction in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410. It is located near the center. Further, the detection piece 3425c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decorative portion 3412a is light-emittingly decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back side, the player can be shown the decoration reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong". Further, in a normal state, when the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412 is light-emittingly decorated by the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415, the back-up middle first decoration covering the front of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 is covered. The body 3411 can be luminescently decorated as a whole. Further, when the LED of the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is made to emit light under a normal state, the light is formed on the rear surface of the second decorative body 3415 on the back surface, and the first decorative body 3414 on the back surface is formed in white. It can be reflected and diffused on the front surface, etc., and the outer periphery of the first decorative body 3411, etc.

When the first pinion gear 3423 is rotationally driven in the front-view clockwise direction by the first drive motor 3420 on the back side from the normal state via the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422, the first The rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 that mesh with the pinion gear 3423 slide the first slider 3424 to the left in the front view and the second slider 3425 to the right in the front view. Slide to move. As a result, the first decorative body 3411 on the back side, which is decorated on the head side of the "dragon" attached via the mounting boss 3424b of the first slider 3424, slides to the left in the front view, and at the same time, the first decorative body 3411 The first decorative body 3411 on the back side with the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" mounted via the mounting boss 3425b of the two sliders 3425 slides to the right in the front view, and a pair of back top middle The first decorative body 3411 slides open in a direction away from each other.

When the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 are slid away from each other, the back-up middle first decorations 3411 are moved from between the ends of the pair of back-up middle first decorations 3411 on the recessed 3411a side. A part of the second decorative body 3412 on the back side, which is arranged behind the 3411, faces forward. Then, in a state where the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411, the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 Temporarily stop the rotational drive of. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 237 (b), from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 to the central decorative portion 3412a of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 and four. The central horizontal decoration portion 3412b is in a state of facing forward. In this state, if the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are light-emittingly decorated by the second decorative substrate 3415 on the back, the player can be shown a decoration reminiscent of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong". it can.

From this state, when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid and moved in the direction of being separated from each other by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. As shown in c), substantially the entire back-up middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 (fully open state). In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward, and the back upper middle second decorative substrate When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d are luminescently decorated by the 3415, the player can be shown a decoration reminiscent of the "mahjong" "man-point stick". it can. Further, in this state, the back-up middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3415 make the back-up middle first decorative substrate 3411 and the back-up middle second decorative substrate 3412 luminescent as a whole. be able to.

Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the center in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decoration unit base 3418 in the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, and the back-up middle drive unit 3440 It includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467 in the medium rotation unit 3460, and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 rotatably attached to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connecting bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotating unit 3460.

Next, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 of the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 and the like, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 can rotate the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 on the front side to mount the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 so as to be rotatable. The unit base 3441 attached to the back box 3010, the base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460, and the base cover. The flat second drive motor 3443 attached to the front surface of the 3442 and the rotating shaft penetrating the base cover 3442 and projecting rearward, and the flat second drive motor 3443 attached to the upper middle second drive motor 3443. A gear-shaped second drive gear 3444, a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear 3445a that meshes with the second drive gear 3444, and a small-diameter spur gear-shaped small-diameter transmission gear that rotates integrally with the large-diameter transmission gear 3445a. A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a and a gear portion 3446a which have 3445b and mesh with the second transmission gear 3445 which is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and the small diameter transmission gear 3445b of the second transmission gear 3445. It has a columnar drive pin 3446b projecting rearward from the rear surface, and the elevating drive gear 3446 rotatably attached to the base cover 3442 and the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 are inserted and rearward. It has an arcuate slit 3447a protruding from the base, and is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the second drive gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the elevating drive gear 3446, and the base. It includes a second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and a flat plate-shaped gear cover 3447 that rotatably attaches the elevating drive gear 3446 in cooperation with the cover 3442.

Further, the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and has a rotation detection sensor 3448 that detects the rotation position of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, and the unit base 3441 and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. The assist spring 3449, which is attached in between and urges the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in the direction in which the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 rises, and the whole band-shaped, penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction. It has an assist slit 3450a, and the assist arm 3450, whose base end side is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441, and the assist arm 3450 are rotatably pressed from the front toward the unit base 3441 side. It is equipped with an arm retainer 3451 attached to the front surface of the.

As shown in FIG. 241 and the like, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 has a bearing portion 3461a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, and a long hole extending in a predetermined direction through the front and rear A drive slit 3461b into which the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c into which the connection bush 3432 of the rotary connecting member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of the assist arm 3450 protruding rearward. It has a columnar assist pin 3461d inserted into the 3450a, and rotates so as to close the shallow box-shaped rotating unit base 3461 with the rear open and the open rear side of the rotating unit base 3461. It includes a rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461.

Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 includes a back-up middle third drive motor 3436 mounted on the front surface of the rotation unit base 3461 so that the rotation shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotation unit base 3461. The spur gear-shaped third drive gear 3464 attached to the rotating shaft of the third drive motor 3464 on the back is meshed with the third drive gear 3464 and can be rotated by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. A rod-shaped transmission rack gear that meshes with the mounted spur gear-shaped drive pinion gear 3465 and is slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. The 3466 and the transmission rack gear 3466 are meshed with each other and are rotatably attached by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462 at a position coaxial with the insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461. It includes a spur gear-shaped driven pinion gear 3467 to which the rear end of the base 3431 is attached.

Further, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467, and the rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461 and the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 are inserted inside. A cylindrical bush with a flange that is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 on the outside, and a bush 3469 that is attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 and comes off from the assist pin 3461d. It is provided with a retaining cap 3470 to prevent the above.

The unit base 3441 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440 is formed in a shape in which the upper part of the left side of the front view of a quadrangle extending vertically protrudes to the left, and protrudes forward from the front of the lower part to rotate in the back-up middle. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably attaching the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into the bearing portion 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 in the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 at the upper end of the front surface near the right end of the front view, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end of the front view.

The back-up second drive motor 3436 is attached near the upper end portion on the front surface of the base cover 3442. The rotary drive of the back-up second drive motor 3464 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445. The elevating drive gear 3446 is located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. It is mounted rotatably with (see FIG. 242).

The assist spring 3449 is a coiled torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer circumference of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. By pressing the assist arm 3450 to the unit base 3441 side by the arm retainer 3451, the assist arm 3450 can rotate on the same surface without rattling.

The rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 extends to the left and right, and a bearing portion 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed in the lower right corner of the front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed of a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing portion 3461a and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in the front view. The rotation unit base 3461 extends to the left and right along the lower side longer than the transmission rack gear 3466, and has a slide groove 3461e that slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466, and a slide groove 3461e that protrudes upward from the upper right end of the front view to detect rotation. It includes a detection piece 3461f detected by a sensor.

The third drive motor 3464 in the back surface is mounted substantially in the center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c in the rotating unit base 3461. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the outer gear teeth that mesh with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within a range of about 3/4 of the entire circumference, and the driven pinion gear 3467 does not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion of the outer circumference where gear teeth are not formed, and the detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

Next, the back upper right decorative unit 3480 of the back upper middle movable production unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decorative unit 3480 is attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3481 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3442 and the front surface of the decorative base 3481 at a position in front of the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 in the back upper middle drive unit 3440. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a translucent back upper right decorative board 3843 arranged in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3481. , Is equipped.

The back upper right decorative unit 3480 can illuminate the back upper right decorative body 3483 by emitting the LED of the back upper right decorative substrate 3482. The back upper right decorative body 3483 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled on the game board 5 and has a general prize with the gate portion 2003 in the right-handed distribution space 2541 in the front-view right-handed game area 2540 of the center accessory 2500. It is located between the mouth 2001, and the inside of the upper right distribution space 2541 can be light-emitting and decorated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

The back-up middle relay board 3490 of the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 is the back-up middle first decorative board 3414, the back-up middle second decorative board 3415, the back-up middle first drive motor 3420, the slide detection sensor 3426, and the back-up. The middle second drive motor 3443, the rotation detection sensor 3448, the back upper middle third drive motor 3464, the rotation detection sensor 3468, the back upper right decorative board 3482, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is connected.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), in the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is extended to the left and right so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal, and the upper side thereof is It is located slightly below the upper side of the unit base 3441 in the back-up middle drive unit 3440. In this normal state, a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and closed.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 242, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. It is located at the lower end of the inside. In this state, a rotational moment that attempts to rotate the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 in the counterclockwise direction in the front view around the rotation support pin 3441a acts on the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 due to the weight of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 or the like. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left side via the drive slit 3461b. Then, when the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevating drive gear 3446 tries to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevating drive gear 3446 and is orthogonal to the extending direction of the drive slit 3461b. Since it is located below, the elevating drive gear 3446 tends to rotate in the front-view clockwise direction. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the elevating drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end of the drive slit 3461b, the elevating drive gear 3446 cannot rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460. Is maintained in the normal state, and the decorative body unit 3410 is locked in the raised state. Further, in this state, since the elevating drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, a load is applied to the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even when the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

Further, in a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotary unit base 3461 is located at the moving end away from the rotary support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a). The driven pinion gear 3467 that meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 is rotationally positioned near the rotational end in the clockwise direction in front view. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotation unit base 3461 of the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is located above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 is a base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. Further, in a normal state, a pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 that extend and close horizontally in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 are the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the front view center accessory 2500. It is located above the display screen of the player so that it can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 201 and the like).

From this normal state, when the elevating drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 by the second drive motor 3443 in the back and forth, the elevating and lowering The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise in the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the drive pin 3446b presses the inside of the drive slit 3461b to the left, and the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotationally supported via the drive slit 3461b. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the pin 3441a as the center.

When the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) and on the left side in the front view. The 3461c (driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction in the front view with the rotation support pin 3441a as the center, so that the assist arm 3450 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the assist pin 3461d. As it rotates, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip end side thereof.

Then, when the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 rotates about 41 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the normal state, the rotation drive of the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 stops, and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461c. (The driven pinion gear 3467) is located below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located at the lower end (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 is in contact with the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d is in contact with the end portion on the tip side in the assist slit 3450a. The rotation is restricted.

In the state where the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, the back upper middle decoration is assembled on the game board 5. The center of the body unit 3410 (the central decorative portion 3412a of the second decorative body 3412 in the upper back) is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 257).

With the decorative body unit 3410 on the back upper side moved to the lower end, the drive pinion gear 3465 is rotationally driven by the third drive motor 3464 on the back side via the third drive gear 3464 in the clockwise direction of the front view. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides to the right in the front view in the slide groove 3461e. When the transmission rack gear 3466 slides to the right, the driven pinion gear 3467 that meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and is a rotary connection attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 also rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the connection base 3431 of the member 3430.

In the back-up middle rotation unit 3460, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the slide groove 3461e in the front view. In the present embodiment, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated by about 193 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state. Therefore, in the state where the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, it can be rotated by 208 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the normal state in which it extends horizontally (FIG. 243 (FIG. 243). b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 243 (b), the back-up middle first decorative body 3410 of the back-up middle decorative unit 3410 is driven to slide the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 in the directions away from each other. Move (see FIGS. 258, 259, etc.).

As described above, the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 has the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 having the pair of back-up middle first decoration body 3411 and the back-up middle second decoration body 3412, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3440. In addition to being able to move up and down and rotate, the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 can be opened and closed, and a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411, the "mahjong" represented by the decoration of the back-up middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies. Since the score of the "point stick" can be changed, the player's expectation for the game can be increased by the score of the "point stick".

[Movable production unit in front of the back]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 244 to 251. FIG. 244 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 244 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 245 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled except for the back lower front decorative body unit, and FIG. 246 disassembles the back lower front movable effect unit other than the back lower front decorative body unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 248 disassembles the back lower front decorative unit of the back lower front movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 249 is a front view schematically showing the decorative body unit elevating mechanism in the lower back front movable effect unit. FIG. 250 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the state of the decorative body unit elevating mechanism when the lower back front decorative body unit is raised, and FIG. 250 (b) is an enlarged portion of the unit elevating pin in (a). (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). FIG. 251 (a) is a front view showing the lower back front movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state in which the back lower front first decorative body of the back lower front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b).

The lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is an elevating unit that is attached to the front surface of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 and the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 that are provided with predetermined decorations and is attached to the front surface of the back lower front movable effect unit 3100. The 3502, the lower left decorative unit 3503 attached to the front of the left end of the elevating unit 3502, and the lower middle decorative unit 3504 attached to the left from the center of the elevating unit 3502 in the left-right direction of the front view. The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 attached to the front of the elevating unit 3502 from the left side to the lower side of the back lower middle decoration unit 3504, and the back lower front relay board 3506 attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit 3502. It has.

As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is a plate-shaped extending left and right and has different decorations on both sides. The body 3510 and the first decorative body 3510 under the back are rotatably attached to the upper side extending to the left and right, and are attached to the elevating unit 3502 so as to be able to move up and down. It is provided with a second decorative body 3520.

The back bottom front first decoration body 3510 of the back bottom front decoration unit 3501 is a shallow box-shaped transparent body in which the front view shape is a quadrangle extending long to the left and right and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side and the rear side is open. It is attached to the rear surface of the first table decorative member 3511 having light and a predetermined decoration is formed on the rear surface of the first table decorative member 3511, and has a shallow box shape with the front side open and has translucency. The first back decorative member 3512, the lower back front first decorative substrate 3513 mounted between the first back decorative member 3512 and the first front decorative member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both sides, and the first One back decoration member 3512 has two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 protruding diagonally upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the left and right ends of the front view to the left and right, and the first back decoration. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 which protrudes from the right side surface of the member 3512 to the right in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 in the lower back front second decorative body 3520 described later. And a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3516 projecting rearward from the right side of the front view of the first back decoration member 3512.

In the lower back front first decorative body 3510, of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in the front view is attached slightly to the left of the right end in the front view of the first back decorative member 3512. ing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" tiles lined up on the left and right.

The back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger on the left and right and upper and lower than the back lower front first decorative body 3510, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side so that the rear side is formed. A shallow, open, box-shaped, translucent second decorative member 3521, and a lower front second decorative substrate 3522, which is attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Front view of the flat plate-shaped substrate cover 3523 attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, which covers the rear of the lower front second decorative substrate 3522, and the upper side extending to the left and right of the second decorative member 3521. It protrudes diagonally upward and forward so as to be coaxial with the axis extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends to the left and right, and has a cylindrical shape for hinge-rotatably attaching the first hinge portion 3514 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. The right end side is inserted from the left side into the second hinge part 3524 on the right side of the front view of the two second hinge parts 3524 and the two second hinge parts 3524, and the left end side is the front surface of the front lower front first decorative body 3510. A columnar hinge shaft 3525 inserted into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side of the view from the right side, and a rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the front view of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 on the left side of the front view. A hinge retainer 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the first hinge portion 3514 is provided.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 has a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 attached to the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 when viewed from the front and the right side is open, and a rotation shaft penetrating the gear base 3527. A spur gear-shaped spur gear attached to the rotating shafts of the lower back front first drive motor 3528 attached to the left side surface of the gear base 3527 so as to project to the right and the lower back front first drive motor 3528. The first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530 that meshes with the first drive gear 3529 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, and the transmission first gear 3530 that meshes with the transmission first gear 3530 and rotates to the gear base 3527. In the front view left side of the transmission second gear 3531 which is possibly attached, the first elevating gear 3532 which is meshed with the transmission second gear 3531 and is rotatably attached to the gear base 3527, and the gear base 3527. A slit that rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532, penetrates in the left-right direction, extends on the axis passing through the center of rotation, and slidably inserts the decorative elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. The decorative elevating arm 3533 having 3533a, and the gear base 3527 so as to cover the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, and the first elevating gear 3532 on the right side of the front view. It is provided with a flat gear cover 3534 which is closed on the open right end side and is attached to the gear base 3527.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in front view, and is a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535 capable of detecting the detection piece 3516 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. , A sensor cover 3536 attached to the front left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 so as to cover the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535, and a slider attachment extending downward from the lower right end of the second decorative member 3521 in the front view. A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 that protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the right end in the rear view at the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523 are provided.

In the lower back front decorative unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative elevating pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525, 3526a, the lower front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, and the transmission first A decorative body elevating mechanism in which a gear 3530, a transmission second gear 3531, a first elevating gear 3532, and a decorative body elevating arm 3533 move the lower back front first decorative body 3510 by hinge rotation with respect to an axis extending to the left and right. It constitutes 3501A.

Further, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is formed at the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a long hole-shaped elevating slit 3540 that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. , Prepared. As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the elevating slit 3540 is formed at the same height at both ends extending to the left and right, and is a portion of the upper side extending to the left and right that is closer to the right from the left end in the front view. It has a lock protrusion 3540a protruding downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed so that the left side of the front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the leftmost semicircular arc of the elevating slit 3540, and the right side of the front view is the elevating slit. It is formed in a straight line extending diagonally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of the 3540 toward the left end of the portion extending horizontally to the left. The lower side extending to the left and right of the elevating slit 3540 is formed in a shape that imitates the upper side so as to form a substantially constant distance from the upper side.

The elevating unit 3502 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is located between the flat plate-shaped unit base 3550 attached to the front surface of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 and the lower back front decorative unit 3501. The rotation shaft protrudes between the base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 and the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551 with a gap capable of accommodating a part below the front first decorative body 3510. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotating shaft of the lower back front second drive motor 3552, which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, and A second transmission gear 3554 that meshes with the second drive gear 3553 and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and an arcuate second elevating gear 3555a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3554. A flat plate-shaped main body 3555b that is approximately half a circle concentric with the arc of the second elevating gear 3555a, a shaft hole 3555c that penetrates through the center of the main body 3555b and is rotatably attached by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551, and A unit elevating arm 3555 having an arm portion 3555d extending from the main body portion 3555b in a direction away from the second elevating gear 3555a, and a front lower back decoration attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d in the unit elevating arm 3555. A columnar unit elevating pin 3556a slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the body unit 3501 and extending from the front end of the unit elevating pin 3556a to the shaft hole 3555c side along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555. A flat plate-shaped connecting piece 3556b, and an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c that protrudes rearward from the tip of the connecting piece 3556b and has a rear end attached to the front surface of the main body 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555. It has.

The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 when viewed from the front. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3553a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached to the unit base 3550 so as to rotate about a position near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed so that the distance from the shaft hole 3555c to the tip of the arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 is attached to the unit elevating detection sensor 3557 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 and can detect the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553, and is attached to the right end of the front view on the front surface of the unit base 3550. A slide base 3558 that extends vertically, a rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 that extends vertically and is slidably attached to the front side of the slide base 3558, and a rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 that is slidably attached to the front side of the intermediate slider 3559. The front surface of the cage is provided with a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 that is attached to the slider mounting portion 3537 of the lower back front decorative unit 3501.

In this elevating unit 3502, the lower front second drive motor 3552, the second drive gear 3553, the second transmission gear 3554, the unit elevating arm 3555, the arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556a), the slide base 3558, and the intermediate slider 3559. , And the mounting slider 3560 constitutes a decorative unit elevating mechanism 3502A that elevates and elevates the lower back front decorative unit 3501.

Further, the elevating unit 3502 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 on the base end side, penetrates back and forth and extends toward the tip side, and the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 is inserted. A guide bush that is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3651a of the guide arm 3651 and the guide arm 3561 that has the guide slit 3651a, and the guide boss 3538 of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 is inserted. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm retainer rotatably supporting the rear surface of the guide arm 3651 on the base end side and attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550. It includes an assist spring 3565 in which both ends are attached to the arm retainer 3564 and the spring base 3563, respectively, and the ahem retainer 3564 and the spring base 3563 are urged in a direction approaching each other. The guide arm 3651 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at a position closer to the right in the upper left of the front view, and the tip side extends to the right.

The back left lower decoration unit 3503 of the back lower front movable production unit 3500 is attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the unit base 3550, and a three-dimensional decoration imitating the "mahjong" "tile" is formed on the front. It is provided with a back left lower decorative body 3560 having the above, and a back left lower decorative board 3651 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 behind the back left lower decorative body 3560 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The lower left back decorative unit 3503 can illuminate the lower left back decorative body 3560 by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left back decorative substrate 3651. The lower left decorative unit 3503 is located behind the side unit 2300 when assembled on the game board 5, and the vicinity of the side unit 2300 in the game area 5a can be light-emitting and decorated.

The under-back middle decoration unit 3504 of the under-back front movable production unit 3500 is attached to the part on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the front view on the front surface of the base cover 3551, and the decoration of the characters "Dokun" is formed. It is provided with a back lower middle decorative body 3570 having a property, and a back lower middle decorative board 3571 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the back lower middle decorative body 3570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back lower middle decoration unit 3504 can make the back lower middle decoration body 3570 emit light by appropriately emitting the LED of the back lower middle decoration substrate 3571. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the side unit lower 2200 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a in the state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit lower 2200 downward and discharge them. The back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 is a transparent flat passage member 3580 which is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has an open front surface, and a transparent flat plate shape which closes the open front surface of the passage member 3580. It includes a cover 3581 and a side rear decorative substrate 3582 that is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Inside the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of 2200 under the side unit is installed. Further, the back left lower ball guidance unit 3505 is located behind the side unit lower 2200 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the LED of the side rear decorative board 3582 is appropriately emitted to light the side unit lower 2200. It can be decorated with light emission.

The back bottom front relay board 3506 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 includes a back bottom front first decorative board 3513, a back bottom front second decorative board 3522, a back bottom front first drive motor 3528, and a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535. The lower back front second drive motor 3552, the unit elevating detection sensor 3557, the lower left decorative board 3651, the lower back middle decorative board 3571, the side rear decorative board 3582, and the effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is relaying the connection.

Subsequently, the operation of the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 251 (a) and the like, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 has the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 located at the lower end and the back lower front decorative unit 3501 in a normal state. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is positioned in front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 by rotating the hinge so as to descend. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 249, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 of the elevating unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555c, and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d and back. The unit elevating pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower front decorative unit 3501 is located near the right end of the front view in the elevating slit 3540. Further, the guide arm 3651 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state in which the tip thereof extends substantially horizontally toward the right side in the front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3651a of the guide arm 3651. The guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end of the front view in the guide slit 3651a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevating detection sensor 3557.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body elevating arm 3553 in the back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 extends downward from the center of rotation. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510, which is inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3553, is located at the end of the slit 3533a on the side close to the center of rotation. There is. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520.

In this normal state, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the front-view main liquid crystal display device 1600 and behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

Under normal conditions, the lower back front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502 rotates the unit elevating arm 3555 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the second drive gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554. Then, the unit elevating pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves in the ascending direction about the shaft hole 3555c. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a pushes the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, and the lower back front decorative unit 3501 rises. Since the right end portion of the front lower back decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the mounting slider 3560, the rear lower front decorative unit 3501 rises straight without tilting.

As the lower back front decorative unit 3501 rises, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted in the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) in the elevating slit 3540 to the left in the front view. Then, when the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left side of the front view from the lowermost protruding portion of the lock protrusion 3540a protruding downward in the elevating slit 3540, the drive of the lower back front second drive motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the ascending end by the drive unit 3502 (decorative unit elevating mechanism 3502A) (first ascending position). ) (See FIG. 251 (b)).

In this state, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center (shaft hole 3555c) of the unit elevating arm 3555. Due to the weight of the front decorative unit 3501, a rotational moment that causes the unit elevating arm 3555 to rotate clockwise in the front view acts on the tip of the arm portion 3555d. Then, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), on the left side surface of the lock projection 3540a on the upper side of the elevating slit 3540 to which the unit elevating pin 3556a is in contact, the portion on the right side of the abutting portion is Since it has invaded the inside of the boundary line L (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the turning range of the unit elevating pin 3556a, the invading part is required to revolve so that the lock protrusion 3540a moves downward. The lock protrusion 3540a (lower back front decorative unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the lower back front decorative unit 3501 so that The rotational moment acting on the elevating pin 3556a is canceled, and the unit elevating arm 3555 is maintained (locked) at the ascending end without rotating in the front-view clockwise direction.

When the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative unit 3501 is viewed from the front of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is in a state of being located in the frame, and the decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side.

Subsequently, with the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 positioned at the rising end, the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530 are driven by the back lower front first drive motor 3528 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520. When the decorative body elevating arm 3533 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first elevating gear 3532, the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 enters the slit 3533a. The first hinge portion 3514 and the first hinge portion 3514 so that the decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the inserted lower back front first decorative body 3510 is pressed forward and the lower side of the lower back lower front first decorative body 3510 moves forward and upward. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged around the second hinge portion 3524.

Then, when the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the rotation of the back lower front first drive motor 3528 is stopped, and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is back lower front second. It is in a state of being located above the decorative body 3520 (elevated position or open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510, which was initially facing forward, is in a state of facing backward, and instead, the back lower front second decorative body 3520 facing rearward. The second back decorative member 3512 facing the second decorative member 3521 is located above the second decorative member 3521 and whose front surface is substantially on the same surface as the second decorative member 3521 and faces forward. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the characters "Wa") (FIG. 251 (FIG. 251). c)).

In the state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is rotated to open the hinge, the center accessory 2500 is viewed from the front in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. A substantially lower half of the inside of the frame (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 261).

In this way, the lower back front movable effect unit 3500 maintains the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 in a state of being stopped at the position of the rising end even when the lower back front second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the lower back front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. Further, since the unit elevating pin 3556a revolving in the ascending direction is locked in the middle, when the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is locked at the ascending end position, the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is locked. There is no unnatural movement such as lowering, and the movement of the back lower front decorative unit 3501 can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501, as an operation of raising the back lower front first decorative body 3510, the hinge is rotated with respect to the axis extending to the left and right to raise the back, so that the sliding is linear. Since the part of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 that can be seen from the player side changes from moment to moment, it can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. By rotating the hinge of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 to open it, the first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520, which cannot be seen in a normal state, The second decorative member 3521 of the above can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[Direction on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 252 to 261. FIG. 252 shows a state in which the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back are rotated together in a normal position in the movable effect unit after the back of the back unit so that the second decorative surface faces the front. It is a front view of the game board shown. In FIG. 253, the back lower rear movable effect unit, the back lower rear first decorative body and the back lower rear second decorative body are closed, and the first decorative surface of the back lower rear first decorative body is turned to the front. In the state, slide and move it to approximately the center in the left-right direction in the game area, and slide the back-up left first decorative body and the back-up left second decorative body of the back-up left movable production unit to approximately the center in the left-right direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the moved state. FIG. 254 shows the second of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body by rotating the hinge rotation of the lower back first decorative body of the lower back movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 253. While turning the decorative surface to the front, open the back upper left second decorative body by hinge-rotating the back upper left movable production unit to open the back upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back upper left second decorative body first. (Ii) It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative member facing the front. FIG. 255 shows the second of each of the lower back first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body by rotating the hinge rotation of the lower back first decorative body of the lower back movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 253. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the decorative surface faces the front.

FIG. 256 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position at the right end of the front view. FIG. 257 shows a front view counterclockwise so as to move the back top middle decoration unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit in the back unit to the position of the descending end and to extend the back upper middle decoration unit diagonally downward to the left in the front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of being rotated in the clockwise direction. FIG. 258 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 257 and slid to the position of the half-opened intermediate open state. FIG. 259 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies are further separated from the state of FIG. 258 and slid to a position in the fully open state. FIG. 260 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 261 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower back lower front first decorative body is hinged and raised above the lower back lower front second decorative body from the state of FIG. 260.

In a normal state, the game board 5 of the present embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. 201 and the like. , Can be clearly seen from the player side (front). In this normal state, the hinge of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the rotatable back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are closed, and the back lower rear first decorative body 3120 is closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of the 3110 is directed forward so that it can be seen from the player side, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

Further, in a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are hinged to rotate the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 is located in front of the fixed decorative member 3211. In the folded state, it is located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050, which is the left end of the front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions. The front side is invisible from the player side by the back left middle decoration unit 3050.

Further, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 which is the left end of the front view with respect to the left and right slide directions. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, in a normal state, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A part of the front view center accessory 2500 is visible forward through the frame.

Further, in a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In the state of being folded so as to descend to the side, the descending end below the front view from the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that the lower back front decorative unit 3501 does not face forward from the frame of the center accessory 2500. Is located in.

The game board 5 is after the back of the back unit 3000 according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect). ..

Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 is viewed in a plan view by the back lower rear second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. Rotate it clockwise so that the second decorative surface 3122, which was facing backwards, faces the front (see FIG. 252). At this time, the lower back first decorative body 3110, which is closed and located in front of the lower back second decorative body 3120, is pushed by the lower back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the front view, and are attached to the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By blocking a part of the displayed production image, the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom can be made to stand out, and the "heavenly luck" applied to the second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back bottom. The decoration of "" can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can be made to think that there is something good and the expectation for the game can be raised.

Further, as an effect (movable effect) using the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3150 of the slide unit 3150 is the third. The drive motor 3155 slides and moves the rotary drive unit 3130 to the position at the left end of the front view while keeping the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 closed, and the rotary drive unit 3130. The rear lower rear first drive motor 3134 slightly rotates the lower rear first decorative body 3110 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view so that the first decorative surface 3111 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the back-up left movable production unit 3200, the back-up left first decorative body 3210 and the back-up left second decorative body 3220 are back-up left first by the back-up left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. With the first decorative member 3221 facing the front while being closed with respect to the decorative body 3210, the first decorative member 3221 is slid and moved to the position of the right end in the front view together with the second decorative body 3220 on the back upper left (see FIG. 253).

In the state shown in FIG. 253, the axis extending up and down for hinge rotation of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, and the back upper left. The vertical axis for hinge-rotating the back-up left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back-up left first decorative body 3210 of the movable production unit 3200 is located coaxially with the left and right of the game area 5a. It is almost the same as the center of the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a state where the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom and the second decorative body 3220 on the back top left are diagonally arranged within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. It is located in front of. As a result, the player can be surprised by the movement of the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom to the center side and the appearance of the second decorative body 3220 on the back top left.

Then, in a state where the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (state in FIG. 253), the rotation drive unit 3130 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100. The lower back first decorative body 3110 folded by the lower back first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in a plan view so as to open forward from the lower back second decorative body 3120, and the lower back The rear lower rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120 so that the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the back upper left is the back upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the movable production unit 3200. The back upper left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, and the back upper left first. The second decorative body 3220 on the back top and left is arranged on the right side of the decorative body 3210, and the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 are directed to the front (see FIG. 254).

In the state of FIG. 254, the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is lined up on the left and right sides of the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear movable effect unit 3120, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. The back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state of being united vertically in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It covers the front of the display screen. Further, the second decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front and the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 and the back lower rear second decorative body 3120, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. The characters "Jakusei" written vertically are written on the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, respectively. It will be visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body will appear in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), which will have a great impact on the player and give a chance such as a "big hit game". It is possible to strongly suggest the arrival of the game, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

By the way, in the above description, the effect of opening the back lower rear first decorative body 3110 of the back lower rear movable unit 3100 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 at the same time has been described. As shown in 255, only the first decorative body 3110 after the back bottom of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. As a result, the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are first opened by hinge rotation, and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front. Then, the word "holy" will be visible first. At this time, since the cutout decoration 3170 such as "one" is applied to the upper side of the character "holy", the decoration that is a set for the player to complete the cutout decoration 3170 on this upper side. It is possible to recognize that there is (cut-out decoration 3260), and the player is asked whether or not the decoration that is the set appears (whether or not the second decorative body 3220 on the back top and left opens by hinge rotation). It is possible to make the player feel excited and to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid to the appearance position on the right side of the front view by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decoration 3320 located directly behind the back left fixed decoration 3310 is to the right of the back left fixed decoration 3310 in the front view within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located at and can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 256). In this state, if a predetermined effect image is displayed in the area corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the rear, the player can be reminded. It is possible to give the illusion that the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. Further, as shown in the figure, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 in the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100, so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 is movable on the back left. When the decorative body 3320 appears, the back left is movable with the illusion that another liquid crystal display device has appeared on the left side so as to be paired with the first decorative body 3110 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114) after the back bottom on the right side. The effect images displayed on the decorative body 3320 and the first decorative body 3110 after the underside can be greatly enjoyed.

Further, as an effect using the back-up middle movable production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back-up middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up middle second drive motor 3443 of the back-up middle drive unit 3440. The back-up middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the tip of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3460 is driven by the back-up middle third drive motor 3436. Rotate the 3410 to the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is located substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end side raised. (Fig. 257). As a result, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410, which was located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, descends to the center position while rotating, and the movement causes the player to move the back-up middle decoration. Expectations for the game that can draw attention to the unit 3410 and make me think that there may be something good by moving the decoration unit 3410 on the back of the back in a form reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong". You can enhance the feeling.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257, the back-up middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned at the descending end and extends diagonally, and is closed by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 of the back-up middle decoration unit 3410. The pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in the directions away from each other to be in the intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 258, the central decorative portion 3412a and the four central horizontal decorative portions 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are formed between the pair of the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since it is in a state of facing forward, it is possible to remind the player of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong", and it makes me think that the possibility of "big hit game" has increased, and I expect it. The feeling can be further enhanced.

Further, from the state of FIG. 258, when the pair of back-up middle first decorative bodies 3411 are further slid in the directions away from each other by the back-up middle first drive motor 3420 to be in the fully open state, as shown in FIG. 259, the pair The central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward from between the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. It is possible to remind the player of the "Mahjong" "Mahjong", and to be convinced that the lottery first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit". It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, as an effect using the back lower front movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged in front of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 and is in a folded state. Then, the lower back front second drive motor 3552 of the elevating unit 3502 raises the lower back front decorative unit 3501 from the position of the lower end to the position of the ascending end. When the lower back front decorative unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative unit 3501 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in front view, and the game is played. The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be clearly seen from the person side (see FIG. 260). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below to cover the lower part of the front surface of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the player can be made to suggest the arrival of an opportunity, which gives a feeling of expectation for the game. It can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first table decoration member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" "tiles" arranged side by side. By raising the table decoration member 3511 so that it can be visually recognized, it is possible to entertain the player with the illusion that his tiles are lined up.

Then, in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised to the position of the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, the lower back front first drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body elevating mechanism 3501A) is used. When the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged with respect to the axis extending to the left and right so as to rise and is positioned above the lower back front second decorative body 3520, the lower back front which was previously invisible The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the first decorative body 3510 are arranged one above the other. In this state, in front view, substantially the lower half of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the back lower front second decorative body 3520. The decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration of the character "Wa") (Fig. 261). See). As a result, the first table decoration member 3511, which is decorated with multiple "mahjong tiles" lined up side by side, hinges around the axis extending to the left and right, and the character "Wa" means "Agari". Because the decoration of the above appears, it is possible to convince the player that the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", and the expectation for the occurrence of the "big hit game" makes it interesting. Can be enhanced.

[Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a liquid crystal display on the upper plate based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The MPU, the main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, the general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and detects the game ball received in the first major winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower prize opening sensor 2557, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid are used. A drive signal is output to the 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol storage indicator of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port. , The drive signal is output to the second special symbol storage display, the normal symbol display, the normal symbol storage display, the game status display, the round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball frequently enters. The detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. It may be transmitted to the control unit 1511. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[Payout control board]
Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blades 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830 to indicate that the payout blades 839 are difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is notified. Is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number " When "5" is displayed, it is notified that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is "full" (specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and a number is displayed. When "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Is displayed to notify that the player is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 332 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is input to 334 and displayed.

[Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launching device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 262, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and colors provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition to this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal 921 for bass of the main body frame 4 and a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side is used. By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[Production display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, control data (display command) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is various types of screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer is used. This is a method of outputting the retained drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various characters on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And the sub-scan which repeats the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 201, 207, 212, 262 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game released from the central guide portion 2531. The ball has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. Be released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the normal lottery result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is performed in the ordinary lottery to determine whether the "ordinary hit" is "first ordinary hit", "second ordinary hit", or "third ordinary hit". Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening / closing control that makes it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example). Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times that the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During the execution of the time reduction control described later, the control that normally shortens the fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. The maximum number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored on the main control board 1310 is four, and even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the first special lottery after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (probability variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) The time reduction control period (number of time reductions: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated, and the result of the second special lottery is drawn. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery drawn, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). The results of the second special lottery, which is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004, include "missing", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", and so on. There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the jackpot game, it is normal ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probability variation state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , Eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is repeated for 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is for 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / close pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot". (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first large winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted in the second prize opening 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the game balls will be accepted. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) For ~ 0.6 seconds), a device may be provided to perform a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed. For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or the second prize opening. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005) The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will surely be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned multiple types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state (the state in which both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are performed. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested). When a new game ball is accepted in the opening 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the result of the second special lottery are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired on the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being held. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then the display is stopped in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start winning prize occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). It should be noted that the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 263 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers or RAM as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been created. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the RAMs of various registers and the main control MPU.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is saved in the RAM of the main control MPU. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , Execute the recovery process to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special symbol) used for lottery processing for a display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. Random numbers, second special random numbers), variable random numbers used in the lottery process for the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), corresponding to the fluctuation display of the above special symbols Reach in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (a state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or left, middle, and The reach random number used in the lottery process to determine whether or not to display all the decorative symbols on the right in a synchronized manner so that they are the same symbol, and if it is determined to be a jackpot based on the above special random number, a jackpot will be awarded. The symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers) used in the lottery process for determining the type, and the lottery process related to the winning of the hit that triggers the operation of the second starting door member 2549. It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as ordinary random numbers.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different random numbers. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

FIG. 263 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the first winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the first Detection signals from various switches such as the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 and the general winning opening sensor 3015 are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated in the random number counter. A counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag, first) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU. (Ii) The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second start door member 2549 as the process of step S15. .. In this normal symbol process process as well, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is subjected to the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting door member 2549 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game except for some big hits. Is configured to execute (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the normal fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit occurs, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is extended, and the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened is increased to realize such a time saving state.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (16R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18. ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S19, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the large winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, etc. are in the ON state, the above payout control is performed so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the board 951. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834, and pays out the prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of holds as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 2104, as shown in FIG. 264. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) The first start port passing process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2551 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot control for controlling the jackpot game is performed. The process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R probability variation jackpot", "8R normal jackpot", and "8R probability variation jackpot". Based on this, the opening and closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, and the opening and closing control of the second big winning opening 2006 is performed based on the aspect suggesting "10R probability variation big hit". Further, based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the opening and closing control of the first prize opening 2005 is performed to "4R". The second big prize opening based on the mode suggesting "probability change big hit", "5R probability change big hit", "6R probability change big hit", "7R probability change big hit", "8R probability change big hit", and "16R probability change big hit". The opening and closing of 2006 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the change display of the first special symbol is stopped is the mode suggesting "10R probability variation jackpot", and the change of the second special symbol The result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the display is stopped suggests "4R probability variation jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "7R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", and "16R probability variation jackpot". When the jackpot game based on the mode is ended, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot". When the jackpot game based on the above is ended, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in a state other than the normal state suggests "2R probability variation jackpot". When the big hit game based on the fact that it has become a big hit is finished, the time saving flag is set to execute the time saving control (control of the time saving state) until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the big hit game based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is the mode suggesting "8R normal big hit", after the big hit game By setting "72" in the fluctuation count counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) and setting the time saving flag, the special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first) after the big hit game (Ii) The time reduction control (control of the time reduction state) is executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) reaches 72 times. In addition, when the jackpot game based on the result of the lottery processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is the mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the second special Depending on the lottery result, one of "18", "36", "54", and "72" is set in the fluctuation number counter and the time saving flag is set to set the special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first) after the big hit game. (Ii) The time saving control (control of the time saving state) is executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) reaches the number corresponding to the result of the second special lottery out of 18, 36, 54, and 72 times. In addition, a high probability flag is set when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 7R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot) is completed. By doing so, the probability improvement control (control of the high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high-probability time-saving state if both the high-probability flag and the time-saving flag are set, and the high-probability non-time-saving state if only the high-probability flag is set without the time-saving flag set. Control, if only the time saving flag is set without setting the high probability flag, control to the low probability time saving state (so-called time saving state), and if neither the high probability flag nor the time saving flag is set, the low probability Control to a non-time saving state (so-called normal state).

On the other hand, if the big hit executing flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit executing flag is set. If it is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is based on the mode suggesting "small hit". The opening and closing of the first prize opening 2005 is controlled.

If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is ". On condition that it is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is held. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is applied. The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 2104 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 265. In the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S41, a counter value by a first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to newly put the start of variable display of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S44, each random number thus acquired is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Store in.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the start of variable display of the first special symbol is not suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, the main control MPU hits or small hits the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. If it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed or the mode of the game effect to be executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. After executing the effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information such as the type (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2551 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S33, as shown in FIG. 266. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to put the start of variable display of the second special symbol into a new pending state. The processes of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S54, each random number thus acquired is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Store in.

However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the start of variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, By comparing with variable random numbers, whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, reach as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The effect is executed, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

In the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If so, the high-probability jackpot judgment value is compared with the first special random number to identify whether or not it will be a jackpot, and if the high-probability flag is not set, the low-probability jackpot judgment value and the first By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in the high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)), which will be described later, and is the same as the jackpot determination value to be compared with the first special random number. The low-probability jackpot determination value (3937-3946), which is a numerical value, is set in the low-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)), which will be described later, and is the jackpot determination value to be compared with the first special random number. It is the same random number value. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not the game is a big hit, and the content of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and this game. By specifying the type of fluctuation pattern that indicates the period (variation time) during which the effect is executed, either "big hit 1 to 12", which is a big hit, or "missing" or "reach 1 to 4", which is not a big hit, is used as pre-judgment information. It can be classified as a crab. In this example, as shown in FIG. 268 (B), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the weak SP reach fluctuation pattern, and the strong other than the specific one are used according to the percentage of jackpots (expected jackpot value, also called jackpot reliability). There are multiple types of fluctuation patterns, SP reach fluctuation pattern and specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern (big hit expected value out of order fluctuation pattern <normal reach fluctuation pattern <weak SP reach fluctuation pattern <strong SP reach fluctuation pattern other than specific <Specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). Further, the ratio of the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process in step S82 and the second variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process) and executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which will be described later. Is inversely proportional to the expected jackpot value (outlier fluctuation pattern> normal reach fluctuation pattern> weak SP reach fluctuation pattern> non-specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern> specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern is executed at a relatively high frequency, while the specific strong SP reach fluctuation pattern is rarely executed.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting port passing process, the same disorder is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. By comparing the small hit judgment value set in the numerical value with the first special random number, it is also specified whether or not the small hit is obtained. These high-probability or low-probability small hit determination values (3800-3812) are set in the high-probability or low-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)), which will be described later, and are the first special random numbers. It is a random number value that is the same as the small hit judgment value to be compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not a small hit will occur, and to "big hit 9 to 12" in which the small hit is included as the pre-judgment information. Can be categorized.

Further, in the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second starting port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is set, it is judged whether or not it will be a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value By comparing with the second special random number, it is judged whether or not it becomes a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3857-3946) is set in the high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)), which will be described later, and is the same as the jackpot determination value to be compared with the second special random number. The low-probability jackpot determination value (3937-3946), which is a numerical value, is set in the low-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 272 (A)), which will be described later, and is the jackpot determination value to be compared with the second special random number. It is the same random number value. Therefore, by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot is set as the pre-judgment information "big hit 1 to 12", not the big hit. It can be classified into either "out of place" or "reach 1 to 4".

In the present embodiment, the effect pre-determination process executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is not executed in the time saving state (time saving time) when the time saving control is executed. There is. On the other hand, in the effect pre-determination process executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the time saving control is not executed in the non-time saving state (non-time saving time). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the non-time saving state, only the effect pre-determination process based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is executed, and the time saving state is controlled. In this case, only the effect pre-determination process based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is executed.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that the first special random number and the pre-judgment table will be a big hit, a judgment value indicating which big hit will be made. When the type of big hit is specified by comparing with the first symbol random number and the fact that it is a big hit is specified by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, a judgment indicating which big hit is to be made. The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that the jackpot of the specific 1 (2R probability variation jackpot) is obtained by matching with the first special random number is set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later. It is set to the same random number value as the judgment value (0-16) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 among the judgment values compared with one symbol random number, and by matching with the first special random number, it is specified 6 (8R probability variation big hit). ) Or the judgment value indicating that it is a big hit of non-specific 2 (8R normal big hit) is among the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and compared with the first symbol random number. It is set to the same random number value as the judgment value (17-154, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 6 or non-specific 2, and when it matches with the first special random number, it is a big hit of specific 7 (10R probability variation big hit). The judgment value indicating that is set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later, and is a judgment value indicating that the specific 7 is a big hit among the judgment values to be compared with the first symbol random number (see FIG. 272 (C)). It has the same random number value as 155-159).

Similarly, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that the second special random number and the pre-judgment table will be a big hit, it is determined which big hit is to be made. When the type of jackpot is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number, and when it is specified that the jackpot will be a jackpot by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, which jackpot will be used is shown. The type of jackpot is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value indicating that the jackpot is a specific 1 (2R probability variation jackpot) or a non-specific 1 (2R normal jackpot) by matching with the second special random number is a symbol determination table (FIG. 272 (FIG. 272), which will be described later. C) Set to) and the same random number value as the judgment value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it is a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 among the judgment values to be compared with the second symbol random number. By matching with the second special random number, specific 2 (4R probability variation jackpot), specific 3 (5R probability variation jackpot), specific 4 (6R probability variation jackpot), specific 5 (7R probability variation jackpot), specific 6 (8R probability variation jackpot) The judgment value indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is the jackpot of specific 2 to specific 6 among the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 272 (C)) described later and compared with the second symbol random number. The random number value is the same as the judgment value (20-55) indicating the above, and the judgment value indicating that the big hit of the specific 8 (16R probability variation big hit) is obtained by matching with the second special random number is the symbol determination table (described later). (See FIG. 272 (C)), the random number value is the same as the judgment value (56-159) indicating that the specific 8 is a big hit among the judgment values to be compared with the second symbol random number.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be performed, a plurality of types of reach effects are produced by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. Identify which of the reach effects will be executed to win the jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the jackpots of the specific 7 and the specific 8 is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super reach effect (hereinafter, also referred to as weak SP reach) with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is a judgment to be compared with the variable random number. Of the values, the random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, and a specific of the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter, this is also referred to as strong SP reach). The judgment value (30-216) indicating that the super reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is executed is the jackpot expectation degree other than the specific super reach effect among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that a high super reach effect is executed, and the judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high expectation of big hit is Among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random numbers, the random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed.

Further, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the big hit of the specific 2 to 6 or the non-specific 2 is a determination indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (5-29), which is the same random number as the value and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the above is executed, and the judgment value (30-216) indicating that the super reach effect other than the specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects having a high expectation of big hit is a variable random number. Among the compared judgment values, the random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is specified. The judgment value (217-240) indicating that the super reach effect of is executed is the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random numbers. There is.

Further, the determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the jackpot of specific 1 or non-specific 1 is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The judgment value (90-189), which is the same random number and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is the judgment value to be compared with the variable random number and executes the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation. The random number value is the same as the judgment value indicating that the jackpot is to be performed, and the judgment value (190-216) indicating that the super reach effect other than the specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects with high jackpot expectation is compared with the variable random number. It is a random number value that is the same as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than a specific super reach effect is executed, and a specific super among the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation. The determination value (217-240) indicating that the reach effect is executed is the same random number value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers.

Therefore, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number with the pre-judgment table, the type of jackpot is accurately specified and pre-judgment is performed. As information, from "big hit 1" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from normal reach, "big hit 2" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from weak SP reach, and strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "Big hit 3" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8, "Big hit 4" which is a big hit of specific 7 or specific 8 from a specific strong SP reach, and special 2-6 or non-specific 2 big hit from normal reach Included "Big Hit 5", Specific 2-6 from Weak SP Reach or "Big Hit 6" including Non-Specific 2 Big Hit, Specific 2-6 or Non-Specific 2 from Strong SP Reach other than Specific Strong SP Reach "Big hit 7" including the big hit of, "Big hit 8" including the big hit of specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 from the specific strong SP reach, "Big hit 8" including the big hit of the specific 1 or non-specific 1 from the normal reach 9 ”,“ Big hit 10 ”which is a big hit of specific 1 or non-specific 1 from a weak SP reach,“ Big hit 11 ”which is a big hit of a specific 1 or non-specific 1 from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, It can be classified into either a specific 1 from a specific strong SP reach or a "big hit 12" which is a big hit of a non-specific 1.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when it is specified that the deviation occurs, the reach is displayed when the high-probability flag indicating that the control of the high-probability state is being executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of probability change indicating that the reach is to be performed and the reach random number, it is specified whether or not to display the reach, and the control of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is executed without the high probability flag being set. When only the time saving flag indicating that the item is set is set, the reach is specified by comparing the reach judgment value at the time saving time indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number, and it is specified whether or not to display the reach, and it is high. When the probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, the reach is displayed by comparing the reach judgment value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number. Specify whether to display or not. The reach judgment value (0) at the time of the probability change is set to the reach judgment table at the time of the probability change (see FIG. 272 (B)) described later and is set to the same random number value as the reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number, and the time is shortened. The time reach judgment value (0-5) is set to the reach judgment table for time reduction (see FIG. 272 (B)), which will be described later, and is set to the same random number value as the reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to the reach determination table (see FIG. 272 (B)) at the normal time, which will be described later, and is set to the same random number value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. .. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the big hit is not obtained, and in advance. The determination information can be classified into either "off" that does not display the reach (executes the reach effect) or "reach 1 to 4" that displays the reach (executes the reach effect).

The reach judgment value (0-5) at the time of shortening the time and the reach judgment value (0-6) at the normal time include the same judgment value (0) as the reach judgment value (0) at the time of probability change. , When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether to display the reach (execute the reach effect) in any of the game states of the probability change time, the time reduction time, and the normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is possible to determine whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in any of the game states of the probability change time, the time reduction time, and the normal time. Can be identified.

Further, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the variable random number are set. By comparing, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0-163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and among the determination values to be compared with the variation random number, the normal reach effect. The judgment value (164-222), which is the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the above is executed and indicates that the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, is a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) described later. ) Is set to the same random number value as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with low jackpot expectation is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number, and is specified among the super reach effects with high jackpot expectation. The judgment value (223-235) indicating that the super reach effect other than the above is executed is set in the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and is a specific super reach among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. A random number value that is the same as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the effect is executed, and a determination indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation. The value (236-240) is the same as the judgment value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the judgment values set in the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and compared with the fluctuation random number. It is a random number value. Therefore, by comparing the variable random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and the normal reach effect is executed as the pre-judgment information. "Reach 2" that executes low super reach production, "Reach 3" that executes super reach production with high jackpot expectation (other than specific super reach production), super reach production with high jackpot expectation (specific super reach production) ) Can be classified into any of "reach 4". Then, by comparing the reach random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, the pre-determination information can be classified into any of "reach 1" to "reach 4".

As described above, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A), the acquired random numbers (special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number). As a result of comparison with (variable random numbers), whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 As shown in FIG. 268 (B), "missing", "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" are specified as pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed. , "Reach 1" to "Reach 4".

Then, in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit or a small hit, The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed, etc.) and the type of the acquired special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number). And the number of holds (value of the hold number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number, and the pre-judgment command corresponding to the set. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the number of reserved first special symbols are obtained. (Value of the first special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to (step S62). Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start port (first start port 2002, second start) in which the start winning is generated occurs. Either one of the mouths 2004), in addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the start door, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit or a small hit, and a big hit. If it becomes a big hit, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is input. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the variation display according to the start winning prize is started.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU stores the first reserved storage area for storing the pre-determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second storage area for storing the pre-determination information regarding the variation display of the second special symbol. A hold storage area is provided. Further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each have 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved items, and the peripheral control MPU first receives the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Stores in order from the (first) storage area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. The variable pattern command (the first variable pattern command that notifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol) that stores the variable pattern command that notifies the start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) When the variation display start notification (second variation pattern command) is received, the first storage area (if the first variation pattern command is received, the first storage area of the first hold storage area) is stored according to the received variation pattern command. Area, if the second variation pattern command is received, the pre-judgment information stored in the second storage area (first storage area) is discarded and the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area (N = 2-4) is discarded. If the first variation pattern command is received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the first hold storage area, and if the second variation pattern command is received, it is stored in the Nth storage area of the second hold storage area). The pre-determined information is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area (the pre-determined information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). Whether to start the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol can be specified by the variation pattern command (whether it is the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command). ), And if it is specified to start the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the pre-judgment information stored in the first hold storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified to start the variation display of the second special symbol based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the pre-determination information stored in the second hold storage area is shifted. As a result, the pre-judgment information of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is memorized so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information. Become so.

In this example, the random numbers are the same as the jackpot determination value in the pre-judgment table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later, but the random numbers are not limited to this. For example, the jackpot judgment value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, or a part or all of the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table is different from the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table. It may be configured to include a random value of a number, and the degree of possibility of becoming a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

Specifically, a part of the deviation judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value and the big hit judgment value can be discriminated as a high-probability random number group, and the high-probability random number group can be discriminated. The ratio of the jackpot determination value to the deviation determination value, which can be determined as, is set higher than the proportion of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and a means with a high probability random number determination, and random number acquisition. Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) are classified into either the above-mentioned loss judgment value or the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value, and this is not executed for the above-mentioned jackpot judgment. By judging whether or not the winning random number used for the same judgment belongs to the above-mentioned high-probability random number group in which the jackpot judgment value and the losing judgment value are mixed, the holding state is maintained. Each determination process is provided with a pseudo-probability advance determination means that enables advance determination of the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning, and the above-mentioned pseudo-probability advance determination means relates to the jackpot winning. The degree of expectation may be determined in advance.

By providing a means with a high-probability random number determination in which a jackpot judgment value and a loss judgment value are mixed in this way, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment, which is still in a pending state, may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure that eliminates the above, the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the above-mentioned jackpot winning according to the mixing ratio of the jackpot determination value and the loss determination value in the high-probability random number determination means is the same. The advance judgment becomes feasible. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the advance determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. In some cases, the expectation for winning a big hit when the judgment process based on a random number value (a value belonging to a low-probability random number group having a pair relationship with the high-probability random number group) that is not the special hit judgment value determined in advance is digested. It will be determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected degree of jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

According to the preceding judgment method for such a high-probability random number group, when a specific judgment process is put on hold, the jackpot judgment is maintained in an unexecuted state (holding state). , The expectation level (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display according to the hold digestion is performed. Will be done.

FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the above and the table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 263).

FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 270, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not the variable display start of the first special symbol is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display start of the first special symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the suspension of the variable display start is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 272 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 272 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 272 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state has a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at the time of low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, as in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment table, 10 kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 13 kinds of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the small hit determination value indicating that the hit was won and the 3924 types of first special random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are out of the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been done, and there is no chance of winning a small hit. In this low-probability jackpot determination table, as in the pre-judgment table, 10 types of second special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 3937 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that.

Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 90 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability are similar to the above-mentioned preliminary determination table. Matches the big hit judgment value, matches the small hit judgment value indicating that 19 kinds of first special random numbers have won the small hit, and 3838 kinds of first special random numbers match the missed judgment value. One special random number is associated with each other. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state). ) And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been done, and there is no chance of winning a small hit. In this high-probability jackpot determination table, 90 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low-probability jackpot determination table are generated in the same manner as the above-mentioned preliminary determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won and the outlier determination value indicating that the 3857 types of second special random numbers are out of the above.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S115). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S116), the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. If it is determined to be a small hit as a result of comparison with a random number (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set and the process is terminated (step S118). As a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, if it is determined to be out of order, the reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 272 (B) are determined. Compare with the reach random number read in step S119 (step S119).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 272 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state)). Reach judgment table for time and use when the game state is time saving (low probability time saving state) Used when the game state is normal time (normal state: low probability non-time saving state) It is equipped with a normal reach judgment table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, as in the above-mentioned preliminary determination table, the reach determination value indicates that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 238 types of reach random numbers do not reach. The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with.

Further, in the reach determination table at the time of shortening the time, similarly to the above-mentioned preliminary determination table, the reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers as the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values and the reach determination values indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the time saving time (low probability time saving state) than in the probability change time (high probability state).

Further, in the reach judgment table at the normal time, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers as the reach random numbers set in the reach judgment table at the time of probability change and the time reduction are reached, as in the above-mentioned preliminary judgment table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the probability change time (high probability state) and the time reduction time (low probability time reduction state).

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is out of reach as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the variation Sets the reach flag indicating that is the reach, and ends the process (step S120b).

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 273, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 272 (C). (Step S122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 272 (C), in the symbol determination table, as in the case of the preliminary determination table, each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variation jackpot, specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot, specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot, specific 3 4 6R probability variation jackpot, specific 5 7R probability variation jackpot, specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot, specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot, non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot, non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot) and symbol random numbers (first symbol) Random numbers, second symbol random numbers) are stored in an associated form. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number, the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. 1. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the 2R big hit game is executed, and the probability improvement control is executed from the end of the 2R big hit game to the next big hit. If the gaming state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), the time saving control is executed until the next big hit. Big hit 2. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 4R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 4R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot that executes both 3. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 5R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 5R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 5R probability variation jackpot of specific 3 4. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 6R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 6R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 6R probability variation jackpot of specific 4 5. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 7R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 7R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 7R probability variation jackpot of specific 5 6. If it is the result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, the 8R big hit game is executed, and from the end of the 8R big hit game to the next big hit. If the probability improvement control is executed and the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state), the time reduction control is performed until the next big hit, and if it is the result of the second special lottery. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 8R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 8R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 8R probability variation jackpot of specific 6 7. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 10R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 10R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 10R probability variation jackpot of specific 7 8. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball can enter, and the 16R big hit game is executed. From the end of the 16R big hit game to the next big hit, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed. Execute both 16R probability variation jackpot of specific 8 9. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the 2R big hit game is executed, and the probability improvement control is not executed from the end of the 2R big hit game until the next big hit. Therefore, if the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state), the fluctuation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed a predetermined number of times after the end of the 2R jackpot game (first special symbol and second special symbol). 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, 72 times) Execute time saving control until it is executed Non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot 10. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in a manner in which a game ball can enter, and the 8R big hit game is executed, and the probability improvement control is not executed from the end of the 8R big hit game until the next big hit. Therefore, if the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state), the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R jackpot game. It is determined to be one of the 10 types of jackpots of the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpots that execute the time saving control until the time is reduced.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of jackpot and the determination ratio are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1; the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6; the 10R probability variation jackpot of the specific 7; While the distribution of the judgment value is set for the 8R normal jackpot of the specific 2, the 2R probability variable jackpot of the specific 1 and the 4R probability variable jackpot of the specific 2 are specified in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. Judgment value distribution is set for 5R probability variation jackpot of 3, 6R probability variation jackpot of specific 4, 7R probability variation jackpot of specific 5, 8R probability variation jackpot of specific 6, 16R probability variation jackpot of specific 8, and 2R normal jackpot of non-specific 1. Has been done.

Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled or a big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, a big hit game (a game ball can be entered). (Limited to those controlled to open and close according to the mode), a so-called right-handed game is performed in which the game ball is driven to the right of the front view from the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the center accessory 2500. Further, in the right-handed game area 2540 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, no obstacle nail is planted in front of the game panel 1100. Then, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, when the game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is hit. The winning opening 2006 is sure to win a prize. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing control of the second big winning opening 2006 is performed, the game ball hit into the right-handed game area 2540 is not wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c)). You can digest the big hit game in a short time.

On the other hand, between the right-handed game area 2540 and the first prize opening 2005, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, so that the game ball is an obstacle. By contacting the nail, various movements are given to the game ball so that it flows down. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, even if the game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is won. However, the game balls that have not won the first major winning opening 2005 are discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. As described above, in the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and closed in the present embodiment, the game ball is more efficient than the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. The second big winning opening 2006 will be won, and the big hit game can be digested in a short time.

Further, in this example, in one round of opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005, the condition of changing the first prize opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state and the opening / closing control of the second prize opening 2006 The conditions for changing the second prize opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round are different. As described above, the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are changed to the closed state about 30 seconds after being controlled to the open state, but even before that lapse. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, the game is changed to the closed state. Then, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, the first big winning opening 2005 is changed to the closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have won the first big winning opening 2005. In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the second big winning opening 2006 is changed to the closed state based on the fact that 10 game balls are won in the second big winning opening 2006. In this way, in the big hit game that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005, only seven game balls can be won in the first big winning opening 2005, so only seven prize balls are won per round. On the other hand, in the big hit game that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006, a maximum of 10 game balls can be won in the second big winning opening 2006, and a prize ball for 10 prizes can be obtained per round. In the big hit game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened and closed, more prize balls can be expected to be obtained than in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 is determined, the 2R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and when the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined. If it is decided to be a symbol and it is decided to be a 10R probability variation jackpot of specific 7, it is decided to be a 10R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to be an 8R normal jackpot of non-specific 2, it is 8R normal of the first special symbol Decide on a big hit design. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. The small hit symbol is determined as the mode (step S125), and if the small hit flag is not set, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S126).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S127, any one of these lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) is instructed (stop symbol of the first special symbol). )) Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set. After that, as the process of step S128, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). The peripheral control MPU displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU sets a specific 7 10R probability variation jackpot among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If specified, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are specific odd symbols (for example, "7")) is determined, and if the 16R probability variation jackpot of specific 8 is specified, the 16R probability variation is determined. The jackpot symbol (a combination in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are specific odd symbols (for example, "7")) is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game production), the symbol is determined. The determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of all the specific odd-numbered symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is a 10R probability variation jackpot of the specific 7 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the first special lottery. Among the big hits caused by each of the result and the second special lottery result, the number of rounds is the largest, and the acquisition of the 10R big hit game that makes it easy to win the game ball to the second big winning opening 2006 has been confirmed. It can be determined.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 4R probability variation jackpot of the specific 2 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. When the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7") is determined and the 5R probability variation jackpot of specific 3 is specified among the jackpots. Is determined to be a 5R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". It is common with the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol). When a jackpot is specified, the 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of odd-numbered identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". Common to the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol and the 5R probability variation jackpot symbol). When the 7R probability variation jackpot of the specific 5 is specified among the jackpots, the 7R probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of odd and identical decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7". 4R probability variation. If the jackpot symbol is decided as the 5R probability variation jackpot symbol and the 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is specified based on the second special lottery result among the jackpots, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol ("1" , "3", "5", "7" odd number of identical decorative symbols. 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, and 7R probability variation jackpot symbol) When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the odd number of the same decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7" as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, the decorative symbols are stopped. It is not possible to distinguish any of the specific 2 4R probability variation jackpot, the specific 3 5R probability variation jackpot, the specific 4 6R probability variation jackpot, the specific 5 7R probability variation jackpot, and the specific 6 8R probability variation jackpot from the design, but the second big hit. It can be determined that the winning opening 2006 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game for controlling the opening and closing.

Further, the peripheral control MPU is specified based on the first special lottery result of the jackpot from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. When the 8R probability variation jackpot is specified, it is decided to be the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of the same even number of decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6"), and among the jackpots, the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot When is specified, it is determined to be an 8R normal jackpot symbol (a combination of even-numbered identical decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6". It is common with the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol), and is specified from the variable pattern command. When the variation time elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of even numbers of the same decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6" as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is specified from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 6 It is not possible to discriminate between the 8R probability variation jackpot and the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot, and it is determined whether or not to control the first jackpot 2005 to a high probability state after the jackpot game that controls opening and closing is completed. Can't.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot of the specific 1 among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. 2R probability variation big hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols among the out-of-order symbols (bare stitches). Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of "357") is determined, and when a small hit is specified, It is determined to be a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols among the missed symbols (bare stitch). It is common with the 2R probability variation big hit symbol), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (end of the game effect). At the time), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this way, when the combination of the decorative symbols of "357" as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, it is either a 2R probability variable big hit or a small hit of the specific 1 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Is not determined, and even after the end of the 2R jackpot game (2R jackpot game in a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter) using the first big winning opening 2005, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in a high probability state. Since it is difficult to determine whether or not the game is produced, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end of these jackpot games.

Further, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. If the design (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same, but the left and right decorative symbols are the same) is determined and the deviation is specified, the missing symbol (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same, but the left and right decorations) is not accompanied by reach. The symbols are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 274. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step). S142) If the small hit flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. If (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S146), and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set. That is, in the case of a normal deviation (a deviation without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes the content of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol after the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is started. It also includes information indicating the fluctuation time until the fluctuation display of (in this case, the first special symbol) is stopped. By receiving the variation pattern command set in step S149, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 starts the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changes in the content of the game effect and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Changes in special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after starting the display The fluctuation time until the display is stopped is specified. Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control can be performed by the first special symbol display (variation display of the first special symbol in) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variation display of decorative symbols in) for the fluctuation time according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Will be done.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the above fluctuation. It is stored in a form associated with each random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, as in the above-mentioned pre-judgment table, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. It is set to determine. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers match the judgment value (0-163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low jackpot expectation. Consistent with the judgment value (164-222) indicating that the above is executed, and the judgment value (223-240) indicating that 18 kinds of variable random numbers execute one of the super reach effects having a high expectation of big hit. As described above, the above-mentioned variable random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, then, as the process of step S151, the variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) after the big hit game. It is determined whether or not the counter value is "0". As described above, in this example, when the result of the second special lottery is a non-specific 1 2R normal jackpot and the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, a special symbol (first) after the end of the 2R jackpot game. The time is controlled until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times), and the first special lottery result is non-specified 2 8R normal. If it is a big hit and the time saving control is executed at the time of winning, the time saving control is performed until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 72 times after the end of the 8R jackpot game. To do. Therefore, when the 2R normal jackpot of non-specific 1 is terminated in the jackpot control process, the number of times (18 times, 36 times, 54 times, or 72 times) according to the result of the second special lottery is set in the fluctuation number counter. Then, when the non-specific 2 8R normal jackpot is terminated, "72" times are set in the fluctuation number counter. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game. Then, if this counter value is not "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation count counter is not executed after the big hit game, the fluctuation count counter is counted down (1 subtraction) (step S152). , It is further determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is "0" (step S153). As a result, if the counter value is "0", that is, if the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that is set (step S154). ..

When the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is determined to be "0" in the process of step S151, that is, the fluctuation of the number of times already set in the fluctuation counter after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. When the display is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation count counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, that is, the fluctuation count counter is still set after the big hit game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. If the variable display of the number of times is not executed, the process proceeds to step S155 at that time. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is terminated. In addition, when the time saving control is executed from the end of the big hit game caused by the big hits of the specific 1 to the specific 8 until the next big hit, "0" is set in the fluctuation number counter in the big hit control process, while By setting the time saving flag, the time saving control is continued until the next big hit.

FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 275, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 277, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executed the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter when the end flag was set, that is, after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2. Occasionally (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and the time saving flag is reset if the time saving flag is set (step S185). ). As a result, the control of the low probability non-time saving state (normal state) is executed after the fluctuation display of the number of times set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2. ..

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a jackpot running flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set, the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and the time saving flag is reset if the time saving flag is set. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S190), this process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is a type of jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 7R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot. , 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot). In step S187, depending on the type of jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 7R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot) Big hit start command (2R probability change big hit start command, 4R probability change big hit start command, 5R probability change big hit start command, 6R probability change big hit start command, 7R probability change big hit start command, 8R probability change big hit start command, 10R probability change big hit start command, 16R probability change big hit start command Set the start command, 2R normal jackpot start command, 8R normal jackpot start command). As a result, the production of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game (step S192). The waiting time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating (step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and in step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the production of the small hit game instructed by the small hit start command is the main liquid crystal. It is executed by a display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker 921, and the like.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 277, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady state process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S503), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady processing, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady-state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)). The control process related to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is serialized for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5. Door side for transmitting from the serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 and outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided on the door frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door. Door-side drive light emission data composed of drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is used for the liquid crystal control unit. It executes processing such as transmitting from the serial I / O port to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC. In the random number update process of step S606, the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a notice of a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) used for the lottery process related to the specific notice effect described later). The process of updating the value of the random number counter or the like that generates the judgment random number) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady-state processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady-state process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the advance notice determination process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). As shown in FIG. 279, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), the hold corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the received pre-determination command is held. Predetermined information is stored in the storage area (step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the preliminary determination command, the first reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol and the second reserved storage area. It is provided with a second reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding variable display of special symbols, and further, the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area are 1 to 4-4 corresponding to the number of reserved items, respectively. It has one storage area. If the received pre-judgment command indicates pre-judgment information related to the variation display of the first special symbol, the peripheral control MPU will pre-determine the storage area according to the number of holds indicated by the pre-judgment command in the first reserved storage area. If the information is stored and the received pre-judgment command indicates the pre-judgment information related to the variation display of the second special symbol, the pre-judgment storage area in the second reserved storage area corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the pre-judgment command is stored. Stores judgment information.

Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the specific advance notice effect described later is being executed (step S303), and whether or not the number of holds indicated by the received prior determination command is "4" (step S304). , If the specific advance notice effect is not being executed and the number of holds indicated by the pre-judgment command is "4", the hold storage area (variable display of the first special symbol) storing the pre-judgment information indicated by the received pre-judgment command. The number of reservations "1" to "3" among the first reserved storage area if it indicates the preliminary determination information regarding the above, and the second reserved storage area if it indicates the preliminary determination information regarding the variation display of the second special symbol). In the storage area corresponding to, any of the jackpot 1 to jackpot 12 and the reach 1 to reach 4 set as the preliminary judgment information in the pre-judgment information other than the loss, specifically, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 268 (A). It is determined whether or not the pre-determination information is stored (step S305).

If the pre-judgment information other than the outlier is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds "1" to "3" among the reserved storage areas storing the pre-judgment information indicated by the pre-judgment command received in step S305. (YES in step S305), the process of steps S306 to S309, that is, the process of ending the process without executing the lottery process of whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect. In the present embodiment, as a specific advance notice effect, a series of stories is set to a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (three times in this example, but may be two times, or two variable displays. It may be possible to provide a specific advance notice effect to be executed separately and a specific advance notice effect to be executed separately for three variable displays), which is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the variable display. The decorative pattern is divided into multiple predetermined variable displays (3 times in this example) and executed (a story completed in 3 episodes is displayed one episode for each variable display of the decorative symbol). To run). In addition, in each of the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol for executing the specific advance notice effect, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the end (for example, the upper left end) of the main liquid crystal display device 1600). After displaying a part of a series of stories (one of a series of stories executed in three times), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this case, if the variable display that executes the specific advance notice effect includes a large hit, a small hit, or a variable display that becomes a reach, the big hit game or the small hit game is started in the middle of a series of stories. I can't execute the whole series of stories. In addition, while it is not executed when it becomes a big hit or a small hit, if it is executed when it becomes a reach, it will always be missed if it becomes a reach during the execution of the specific advance notice effect. Even if it is realized and the reach production is executed, there is no expectation for a big hit. Therefore, in this example, when a start-up prize occurs, the number of times that the change display that is out of reach without reaching is predetermined as the change display for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied other than the generated start-up prize ( Only when it is memorized (three times in this example), the lottery process of whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect is executed.

If the pre-judgment information other than the outlier is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds "1" to "3" among the reserved storage areas storing the pre-judgment information indicated by the pre-judgment command received in step S305. (NO in step S305), the notice judgment table according to the advance judgment information is selected (step S306), and the notice judgment in the numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) predetermined in the random number update process (step S606) described above is performed. One notice determination random number is acquired from the random number counter that updates the random number, and the acquired advance notice determination random number is compared with the advance notice determination table selected in step S306 (step S307).

In the present embodiment, the notice judgment table to be compared with the notice judgment random number is provided for each of the above-mentioned advance judgment information (missing, big hit 1 to big hit 12, reach 1 to reach 4), and hit (big hit, big hit, Within the pre-judgment information of the same type of small hits (in this example, big hits 1 to 4 are the same type of big hits (specific 7 and 8), and big hits 5 to 8 are the same type of big hits (specific 2 to 6, non-specific). 2), and in the jackpots 9 to 12 of the same type (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hits), the jackpot expectation of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the jackpot expectation is high). The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect increases in proportion to the specific strong SP reach ≥ the non-specific strong SP reach> the weak SP reach> the normal reach).

In addition, in the notice judgment table selected when the pre-judgment information is not a hit and indicates that the reach is reached, the jackpot expectation of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the high hit expectation is specified. The judgment value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect increases in proportion to the order of strong SP reach ≥ non-specific strong SP reach> weak SP reach> normal reach). On the other hand, in the advance notice determination table selected when it indicates that the advance determination information is out of order, the determination value is assigned so that the determination not to execute the specific advance notice effect is made regardless of the acquired advance notice determination random number.

In this way, the variation display after the specific advance notice effect is executed (in this example, when it is determined that the specific advance notice effect is to be executed, the variation display based on the hold that caused the determination is started three times. In the case of executing the specific notice effect over the variable display and executing the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect for the fourth time), the minimum reach effect is executed even if it is not a small hit or a big hit. , It is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of a big hit when a specific notice effect is executed. In addition, since the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect increases in proportion to the jackpot expectation of the reach effect that is executed even when the pre-judgment information is not out of order, it is executed in the variable display after the specific advance notice effect is executed. In addition to paying attention to the type of reach effect, it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of a big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed.

In addition, when compared for each group of pre-judgment information summarized for each type of hit, the degree of advantage for the player (in this example, the high degree of advantage for the player is the jackpot 1 summarized by the specific 7 and 8 jackpots). ~ 4> Specific 2-6, Big hits collected by non-specific 2 big hits 5-8> Specific 1, non-specific 1 big hits, then big hits collected by small hits 9 to 12) The judgment value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect is high. Then, since the reach 1 to 4 summarized by the reach that is out of the way has a lower degree of advantage to the player than the pre-judgment information that is a hit, the ratio of executing the specific advance notice effect is lower than that of the big hit 1 to 12. Judgment value is set in. As a result, when the specific notice effect is executed, a jackpot that is more advantageous for the player, specifically, when the specific notice effect is executed regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 10R probability variation big hit is expected. If the specific advance notice effect is executed for the second special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 16R probability variation jackpot can be increased.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above series of stories is completed by executing the specific advance notice effect over a plurality of predetermined variable displays (three times in this example) of the decorative pattern. It is something that makes you. However, in the determination of whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect, the specific advance notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number of times less than the predetermined number of times of advance notice (once or twice in this example). It is also possible to make a decision (so-called notice of disappointment). If it is decided to execute this Gase notice, the specific notice production will end without completing the series of stories, so we have expectations for the big hit with the variable display after the specific notice production is executed. Can't. Therefore, the player will play while hoping that the specific advance notice effect will be executed over a predetermined number of variable displays. In addition, when the specific advance notice effect is executed, the specific advance notice effect may be restarted when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started again after ending once in the middle of a series of stories. As a result, even if the Gase notice is executed, it is possible to expect the resumption of the specific notice effect.

If the effect control MPU determines that the specific advance notice effect is to be executed as a result of comparing the advance notice determination random number with the selected advance notice determination table (YES in step S308), the specific advance notice effect is being executed or the advance notice effect is being executed. The notice flag indicating that the above is set is set, and the number of determined specific notice effects is set in the notice counter to end the process (step S309). The notice flag is referred to in the determination of whether or not to execute the specific notice effect in step S303 described above and the variable effect start process described later, and if the notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU performs the specific notice effect. If it is determined that the process is being executed and the warning flag is set in the variation effect start process described later, the process data for executing the specific advance effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the specific advance notice effect is executed. Also, if the number of executions of the specific advance notice effect is determined to be once, "1" is set in the advance notice counter, and if it is determined to be two times, "2" is set in the advance notice counter, and it is determined to be three times. If so, set "3" to the notice counter. As a result, the specific advance notice effect is executed over the variable display of the number of executions of the specific advance notice effect set in the advance notice counter in step S309.

FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. 1. Fluctuation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed by the above command analysis process (first variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second variation indicating the variation pattern of the second special symbol After performing a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. based on the pattern command), the variable effect start process (step S711) of changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the process during the variable effect. )
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time and changes. The variable effect in-process (step S712) of changing the above-mentioned effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable end process according to the elapse of the variable time according to the pattern.
3. 3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result is performed based on the reception of the symbol stop command instructing the variation display stop of the special symbol, and if it is out of the range, the above effect process flag is set to a value according to the variation effect start process. If it is a big hit, it is changed to a value according to the big hit effect process, and if it is a small hit, it is changed to a value according to the small hit effect process (step S713).
4. Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is processed to execute the display control during the jackpot game, and the above effect process flag is set when the jackpot game is finished. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to change the value according to the variation effect start process
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is processed to execute the display control during the small hit game, and when the small hit game is finished, the above is performed. Small hit effect process (step S715) that changes the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.

By the above processing, the main liquid crystal display is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). The device 1600 will execute the variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the variation effect start process (step S711). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variation effect start process is performed, as shown in FIG. 281, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 first receives a variation pattern command (first variation). It is determined whether or not the pattern command or the second variation pattern command) has been received (step S801). Then, if the variation pattern command is received, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU receives the first variation pattern command, it is set in step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310. Based on the judgment result notification command, the 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol, the 8R normal jackpot symbol, the small hit symbol, or the outlier symbol is determined, and the second variation pattern command is received. If so, the above-mentioned 2R probability variation jackpot symbol and 4R probability variation are based on the judgment result notification command set by the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown) and transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310. The jackpot symbol, 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, 6R probability variation jackpot symbol, 7R probability variation jackpot symbol, 8R probability variation jackpot symbol, 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, 2R normal jackpot symbol, and missing symbol are determined.

If the result of the variation display of the received variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) is incorrect, the received variation pattern command reaches (in this case, the left decorative pattern and the right). When indicating that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are set as the same symbol as the detached symbol. Only the middle decorative symbol is determined to be a combination of symbols different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol (the out-of-reach symbol).

When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the advance notice flag set in the above-mentioned advance notice determination process and indicating that the specific advance notice effect is being executed is set (step S803). If the warning flag is not set, the process data corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is selected (step S806), and the display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

On the other hand, if the notice flag indicating that the specific notice effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times the specific notice effect is executed this time out of the multiple (three times in this example) variation display for executing the specific notice effect. The process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command was selected from the plurality of types of process data corresponding to (step S804), the value of the warning counter was subtracted by 1 (step S805), and the selected process data was selected. The display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The above-mentioned advance notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of a plurality of fluctuation displays for executing the specific advance notice effect, and is set according to the determined number of times the specific advance notice effect is executed when it is determined to execute the specific advance notice effect. It has become like.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when at least the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) starts to be displayed in a variable manner without reaching, in other words, at least the special lottery result (at least the special lottery result ( If the start condition of the variable display that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are out of reach is satisfied, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied is still satisfied. Hold shortening control is executed to shorten the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display more than usual according to the number of fluctuation displays that have not been performed, that is, the number of holds. Specifically, in this example, as the out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern without reach, the out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "13 seconds", the out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "8 seconds", and the fluctuation time of "4 seconds" The main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 has an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, and holds the first special symbol when the start condition of the variation display in which the first special lottery result is out of reach without reach is satisfied. If the number is "1" or "2", the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) determines the out-of-variation variation pattern with the variation time "13 seconds", and the number of reserved first special symbols is "3". If there is, it is determined to be an out-of-order fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "8 seconds", and if the number of reserved first special symbols is "4", it is determined to be an out-of-range fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "4 seconds". Further, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 has the number of reserved second special symbols set to "1" or "1" when the start condition of the variable display in which the second special lottery result is out of reach is satisfied. If it is "2", it is determined by the second fluctuation pattern setting process (not shown) that the fluctuation time is "13 seconds", and if the number of reserved second special symbols is "3", the fluctuation time is "8 seconds". It is determined to be a fluctuation pattern, and if the number of reserved second special symbols is "4", it is determined to be an out-of-order fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "4 seconds".

Further, as described above, in each of the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol that executes the specific advance notice effect, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol is reduced to reduce the decorative symbol and the end portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the upper left end portion) ) Is displayed, and then the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed after displaying a part of the series of stories (one of the series of stories executed in three times). Therefore, when the period of the story to be displayed in one variable display out of the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol that executes a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect is fixed, the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed. The above-mentioned hold shortening control can be performed by shortening the period of the story displayed in one variable display and not being able to display all the stories because the variable time is shorter than the period of the story displayed in the variable display of the times. Even if it is executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed after the story to be displayed in one variable display is finished by making the fluctuation time not shorter than the period of the story displayed in one variable display. There is a problem that a wasteful period occurs and the player gets bored.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, each of the variable display of the decorative symbols that executes a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect is displayed in one variable display so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control. It has multiple types of process data with different story durations. That is, among the variation display of the decorative symbol multiple times (three times in this example) for executing a series of stories as the specific advance notice effect, the variation time is "8 seconds" as the story to be displayed in the first variation display. It is equipped with process data corresponding to "4 seconds" and process data corresponding to "4 seconds", and corresponds to process data corresponding to the fluctuation time "13 seconds" and "8 seconds" as a story to be displayed in the second fluctuation display of the number of notices. The process data corresponding to the fluctuation time "13 seconds" and the process corresponding to the "8 seconds" are provided as the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time "13 seconds" and the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time "13 seconds" as the story to be displayed in the fluctuation display of the third time. It has data and process data corresponding to "4 seconds". In step S804, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of advance notices. In the above example, the number of holds is always 3 or more when the first change display is started among the multiple change displays of the specific advance notice effect, and the hold shortening control is executed to "4 seconds". Or, although it is shown that it has only the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of "8 seconds", "4 seconds" and "8 seconds" are used as the first fluctuation display among the multiple fluctuation displays of the specific advance notice effect. Not only the process data corresponding to one fluctuation time but also the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" may be provided. That is, when the specific advance notice effect can be executed even when the number of holds is 3 or less in step S304 of the advance notice determination process, the first variation display out of the plurality of variation displays of the specific advance notice effect. In this case, the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" may be determined because the number of holds is 2 or less and the hold shortening control is not executed and the fluctuation time is determined to be "13 seconds". You may select the process data corresponding to the above and execute the first variation display out of the multiple variation displays of the specific advance notice effect, or the start condition of the variation display other than the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied. When the variation shortening control is executed only when the number of variation displays for which is not satisfied is "4", when the first variation display of the multiple variation displays of the specific advance notice effect is started. The number of holds is 3 or less. The above hold shortening control may not be executed and the fluctuation time may be determined to be "13 seconds". In this case, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of "13 seconds" is selected. Then, the first variation display out of the plurality of variation displays of the specific advance notice effect may be executed.

In addition, although the same story is displayed in multiple types of process data corresponding to the same number of notices, the production content (video and explanation) can be simplified or more according to the period of the fluctuation time. By making details, the fluctuation time and the production period are matched. In addition, not only when process data corresponding to the same fluctuation time is selected by the number of consecutive notices, but also when process data corresponding to different fluctuation times are selected, each story is smoothly connected and the game is played. Each process data is structured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the person. As a result, a series of stories can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, the peripheral control MPU corresponds to the received fluctuation pattern command, and discards the pre-judgment information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage areas for storing the pre-judgment information in step S302 of the advance notice determination process. The pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area and stored in the hold storage area. The pre-determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first variation pattern command is received, the pre-judgment information stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area is discarded and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is used. The stored pre-judgment information is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area, and if the second variation pattern command is received, the first storage area of the second reserved storage area is received. The pre-judgment information stored in is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area. Let me.

Then, the peripheral control MPU ends this process when the above-mentioned effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process during the variable effect (step S712) (step S813).

FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the variation effect end process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variation effect end process is performed, as shown in FIG. 282, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs the variation effect start process (step S711). The stop symbol determined in step S802 of the above is confirmed and displayed (a state in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are completely stopped and displayed) (step S851).

Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the jackpot start command notifying the start of the jackpot game from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S852). This process ends when the above-mentioned effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the jackpot effect process (step S714) (step S853).

Further, if the small hit start command for notifying the start of the small hit game is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit effect processing (step S715). This process ends when the above-mentioned effect control process flag is updated so as to be performed (step S855).

Further, when neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), if the above notice flag is set (step). S856) Whether or not the advance notice counter is "0", that is, whether or not all of the variable display of the multiple times (three times in this example) for executing the specific advance notice effect is executed (the remaining number of times of the specific advance notice effect is "0" After determining (step S857) and resetting the notice flag if all of the variable display of multiple times (three times in this example) for executing the specific notice effect is executed (step S858). This process ends when the above-mentioned effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variable effect start process (step S711) (step S859).

[Summary of specific notice production]
As described above, in the present embodiment, as a specific advance notice effect, a series of stories is displayed as a main liquid crystal display device corresponding to a plurality of (three times in this example) variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is divided into a plurality of times (three times in this example) of variable display of the decorative pattern executed in 1600. However, the period for executing a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect is not fixed, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-mentioned hold shortening control. In the present embodiment, even if the period for executing a series of stories as a specific advance notice effect is changed (shortened) by the hold shortening control, these series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It has become like. That is, in a series of stories executed as a specific advance notice effect, the same story can be displayed for each of a plurality of variable times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control with the same number of advance notices. The process data is configured in the above, and the fluctuation time and the production time are matched by simplifying the production content or making it more detailed according to the period of the fluctuation time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when the number of advance notices is the third (in this example, the final variation display of the specific advance notice effect), the number of holds for which the variation time is 4 seconds is one or two. The explanation that "experts attack such A" is displayed as letters on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but when the number of holdings with a fluctuation time of 13 seconds is 4, "the talent will bloom. The explanation "Who's experts will attack at A" is displayed as characters on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the longer fluctuation time provides a more detailed explanation. Further, in addition to the explanation in such characters, the number of holdings having a fluctuation time of 13 seconds is larger than the case of one or two holdings having a fluctuation time of 4 seconds. The image is displayed. In this way, the longer the fluctuation time, the more detailed the production content, so that the player can obtain a lot of information. In addition, we have explained that the longer the fluctuation time, the more detailed the production content, but depending on the production that is added as the fluctuation time becomes longer, it suggests the degree of expectation for the hold that caused the execution of the specific advance notice production. You may try to do. For example, by preparing a plurality of character colors (for example, white, blue, and red) of "flowering talent" in FIG. 283, the specific advance notice effect itself can be seen with expectation.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the specific advance notice effect is executed based on the start winning prize for the first starting port 2002, the variation display of the second special symbol starts when the starting winning prize for the second starting port 2004 occurs. It is not possible to match the period of the story executed by one variation display out of the multiple variation display of the decorative symbol executed as the specific advance notice effect and the variation time, or as a specific advance notice effect. There is a possibility that it is not possible to execute the variable display that caused the specific advance notice effect to be executed as the variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories over a plurality of variable displays. Therefore, in this example, when the specific advance notice effect is executed based on the start winning of the first start port 2002, it is before the variable display according to the number of executions of the specific advance notice effect is executed. However, when a start prize is generated for the second start port 2004, the specific advance notice effect is terminated. Specifically, although not shown, when the notice flag is set in step S803 of the variation effect start process, the notice flag is set due to the start winning prize to the first start port 2002. The variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 when it is determined whether or not the command is set due to the start winning of the first starting port 2002 is related to the second special symbol ( If it is the second variation pattern command), the specific advance notice effect is terminated before the variation display according to the determined number of executions is executed by resetting the advance notice flag and proceeding to step S806. On the other hand, when the specific advance notice effect based on the start prize for the second start port 2004 is executed in step S803, the specific notice based on the start prize for the first start port 2002 is executed in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, if the variation pattern command determined to have been received in step S801 is related to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific advance notice effect is continued. To step S804.

In this way, the player is given a sense of discomfort by surely matching the period of the story executed by one variable display out of the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol executed as the specific advance notice effect and the variable time. In addition to suppressing this, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the specific notice effect to be executed as the variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories over multiple variable displays as the specific notice effect. There is. In addition, in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning prize in the second starting port 2004, the specific notice effect is produced only in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting prize in the first starting port 2002 without executing the specific advance notice effect. May be made possible. That is, if the pre-determination command received in step S301 of the advance notice determination process is based on the occurrence of a start winning prize for the second start port 2004, the process of steps S302 to S309, that is, the specific advance notice effect is executed. By terminating the process without executing the lottery process of whether or not, the specific advance notice effect may not be executed based on the occurrence of the start winning prize in the second start port 2004.

Further, in the above example, when the specific advance notice effect is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning prize to the first start port 2002, it is before the variable display according to the number of executions of the specific advance notice effect is executed. However, it is shown that the specific advance notice effect is terminated when the start prize for the second start port 2004 occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on, for example, the start prize for the second start port 2004. When starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific advance notice effect is temporarily interrupted, and the specific advance notice effect is restarted based on the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the start winning prize at the second starting port 2004. May be good. Further, in this case, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like is displayed to the effect that the specific advance notice effect is interrupted (“preliminary notice effect is suspended”) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the start winning prize at the second start port 2004. You may try to do it. In addition, even if the specific advance notice effect is temporarily interrupted when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is started, the second special based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 If the lottery result is a big hit, it may end without restarting the specific advance notice effect.

Further, as described above, as a specific advance notice effect, in the present embodiment, a story completed in three episodes is executed so that one episode is displayed for each variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By executing all three episodes of the specific notice effect, it is possible to expect the variable display to be executed next, so that the player pays attention to what story is being executed. .. Therefore, in this example, when the specific advance notice effect is being executed, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 is set to display the number of the story being executed (for example, "Episode 3"). ..

In the above-described embodiment, as a specific advance notice effect, a series of stories is divided into a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to a plurality of variable displays of special symbols. However, even in the multiple variation display (so-called pseudo continuous variation) of the decorative symbol executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the one variation display of the special symbol, a series of stories is given as a specific advance notice effect. The decorative symbol may be divided into a plurality of variable displays and executed.

Further, in this example, the specific advance notice effect can be executed only when the number of reservations is "4", which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in step S304 of the advance notice determination process. However, even if the number of holds is not the maximum value, the specific notice effect may be executed. In this case, the number of times the specific notice effect is executed is determined so as not to exceed the number of holds. You may. For example, if a start prize is generated for the first start port 2002 when the number of reserved first special symbols is "2", the number of executions of the specific advance notice effect is "2" excluding the variable display based on the start prize that occurred this time. The number of times may be determined so as not to exceed "times". Further, the probability of being determined to execute the specific notice effect may be changed according to the number of holds. For example, if the number of holds is the maximum value, the specific notice effect is executed as compared with the case where the number of holds is not the maximum value. Then, the probability of being determined may be increased.

Further, as described above, the series of stories as the specific advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays that are out of reach without reaching. This non-reach variation display is usually the most commonly performed variation pattern and is one in which the player has the least expectation of a jackpot. In this example, by executing the specific advance notice effect over the variable display without reach, the expectation for the big hit is expected even when the variable display that the player cannot have the most expectation for the big hit is executed. Can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the specific advance notice effect is executed, it is always out of the variable display in which the series of stories is executed, and in the variable display immediately after the completion of this series of stories (the variable display that caused the execution of the specific advance notice effect). It is more likely to be a big hit. That is, it is possible to make the player guess that the result of the variable display will be out of order in the three variable displays in which the series of stories is executed as the specific advance notice effect, and the variable display immediately after the completion of the series of stories (specification). It is possible to expect the occurrence of a big hit for the variable display (variable display executed immediately after the advance notice production is finished), while it is possible to suppress an excessive expectation for the occurrence of the big hit in the three variable displays for executing a series of stories.

In addition, in the variable display immediately after executing the series of stories as the specific advance notice effect (the variable display that caused the execution of the specific advance notice effect), the effect related to the series of stories executed as the specific advance notice effect is executed. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the specific notice effect to be executed in conjunction with the multiple variable displays that execute the specific notice effect, and the cause of executing the specific notice effect from the start of execution of a series of stories. It is possible to gradually raise the player's expectation for a big hit by executing a related effect for a long period of time until the variable display becomes.

The story executed by one variable display out of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol that executes a series of stories as the specific advance notice effect is changed by the number of reservations when the variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to impart new playability such as adjusting the driving of the game ball aiming at the change in the number of holds in order to see all the stories that are different for each number of holds. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery for whether or not to make a big hit is executed based on the start winning prize for the first starting port 2002 and the starting winning prize for the second starting port 2004. Therefore, the larger the number of start winnings to the first starting port 2002 and the starting winnings to the second starting port 2004, the more advantageous the player. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a game is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as a specific advance notice effect for the player whose advantage is reduced by stopping the driving of the game ball when the specific advance notice effect is executed. Since the privilege of playing pachinko is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's emotions due to the decrease in the degree of advantage and gradually raise the expectation for the big hit.

(7th Embodiment)
[Monochrome notice production]
A modified example of the sixth embodiment described above will be described below as a seventh embodiment. First, in the seventh embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the reservation is displayed until the number of reservations based on the predetermination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exhausted. Each time it is executed, a monochrome notice effect is executed to see if the notice effect that appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes from color to monochrome (black and white), and the final hold is exhausted. Before that, if the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the final hold is executed. Occasionally, the effect of entering a black-and-white mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed. This monochrome advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing a monochrome advance notice execution process executed on the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 285 is an area occupancy pattern determination table used for determining an area occupancy pattern in executing the monochrome advance notice effect. FIG. 286 is an example showing an area in which the advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. 287 and 288 are production examples when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process executed in the effect control process (step S602), first, until the number of holds based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exhausted. In the meantime, it is decided whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect over the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol), and if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice effect, the result of the monochrome advance notice effect. Controls to determine whether or not to enter the black-and-white mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (the start condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Step S1300). When it is determined in step S1300 that the pre-determination command has been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether or not the monochrome advance notice execution flag described later is set (step S1301). Then, when it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (YES), all the fluctuation patterns of the already held portion are "normal" except for the hold based on the new prize. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is “variation” (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1300 that the hold number command has not been transmitted from the main control board 1310 (NO), or if it is determined in step S1301 that the monochrome advance notice execution flag has not been set (NO), The process proceeds to step S1308.

It should be noted that, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the winning is based on the winning. Preliminary judgment information on hold (whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect will be performed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is possible to specify whether to execute or the mode type of the game effect to be executed), and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-judgment command, until the hold based on the winning is exhausted. The pre-determination information specified from the pre-determination command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when it is specified that the pre-judgment information is classified as "out of place", the variation pattern executed on hold does not form a reach as a variation display of the decorative pattern (executes the reach effect). (Without doing), it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" that is set to stop and display the lost symbol, and as pre-judgment information, "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to " When it is specified that it is classified into any of "reach 4", the variation pattern executed in the hold forms a reach as a variation display of the decorative symbol, and then the reach effect is executed, and the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol) It can be specified that the variation pattern of the "reach variation" is set to stop and display the "big hit 1" to "big hit 12") or the lost symbol ("reach 1" to "reach 4"). Then, in step S1302, by specifying the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, all the fluctuation patterns already reserved are "normal fluctuations". It is designed to determine whether it is a fluctuation pattern of.

Further, when it is determined in step S1302 that all the fluctuation patterns of the already held portion are the fluctuation patterns of "normal fluctuation" except for the hold based on the new prize (YES), the preliminary determination is made. A monochrome advance notice determination table (not shown) to be used for determining whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect until the number of holds based on the command is exhausted is selected (step S1303). Then, the selected monochrome advance notice determination table is compared with the monochrome advance notice determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and it is determined whether or not to execute the monochrome advance notice effect (step S1304). Specifically, if the monochrome advance notice determination random number matches the determination value set in the monochrome advance notice determination table, it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed (YES in step S1304), and if they do not match, it is determined. , It is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is not executed (NO in step S1304). In the monochrome notice judgment table, the monochrome notice effect is produced according to whether the fluctuation pattern for holding based on the new prize is the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" or the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation". In the case of the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the probability of determining that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed is higher than in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". Is set to. However, in the monochrome notice judgment table, whether or not to execute the monochrome notice effect depending on whether the lottery result for the hold based on the new prize is a big hit (or a small hit) or a loss. It may be set so that the determination is made so that the probability of determining that the monochrome advance notice effect is executed is higher in the case of a big hit (or a small hit) than in the case of a loss.

Further, when it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed (YES), one of a plurality of types of area occupancy patterns is used as a table according to the number of holds specified from the pre-determination command. The area occupancy pattern determination table (FIG. 285) used for determination is selected (step S1305). In this area occupancy pattern, each time the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is executed during the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect appears in any area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is set whether or not to change the notice effect that has been made to appear from color to monochrome (black and white). Then, the area occupancy pattern determination table selected in response to the hold number command is compared with the area occupancy pattern determination random number read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the type of the area occupancy pattern is determined (step S1306). When it is determined that the monochrome advance notice effect is to be executed, a monochrome advance notice execution flag indicating that the monochrome advance notice effect is being executed is set and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1307).

On the other hand, except for the hold based on the new prize in step S1302, any of the fluctuation patterns for the amount already held is not the "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (the "reach fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is included. If it is determined (NO), or if it is determined in step S1304 that the monochrome advance notice effect is not executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1308 without executing the monochrome advance notice effect. As described above, except for the hold based on the new prize in step S1302, only when it is determined that all the fluctuation patterns of the already held portion are the fluctuation patterns of "normal fluctuation", the monochrome advance notice effect is produced. By making it possible to execute, even the reach is not formed in the variation display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern of "normal variation", and it is not possible to raise the expectation of a big hit, but such "normal variation" By executing the monochrome advance notice effect for the fluctuation pattern of "", there is a possibility of entering the black-and-white mode described later, and it is possible to raise the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode, and the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" is repeated. It is possible to eliminate the boringness caused by being struck.

The area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and is an area of any one of a plurality of types of area occupancy patterns as a table according to the number of holds specified from the predetermination command. It is a table used to determine the occupancy pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (A), as an area occupancy pattern determination table to be used when a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 1, the area occupancy patterns 1 to 1 As shown in FIG. 285 (B), as an area occupancy pattern determination table to be used when a table in which 4 is set is provided and a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 2. FIG. 285 (C) is a table for determining the area occupancy pattern to be used when a table in which the area occupancy patterns 1 to 18 are set is provided and a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 3. As shown in the above, a table in which the area occupancy patterns 1 to 39 are set is provided.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed every time the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is executed during the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. It is set in which area of the area the notice effect is to appear, and whether or not to change the appearing notice effect from color to monochrome (black and white). Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), a notice effect is provided in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 while one hold already held is exhausted. In the area occupancy pattern determination table set to appear and shown in FIG. 285 (B), each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is notified while the two holds already held are exhausted. The effect is set to appear stepwise, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed while the three already held holds are exhausted. The notice effect is set to appear in each area in stages.

In addition, when deciding the area occupancy pattern, about the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect (the hold that decided to execute the monochrome notice effect when the hold is added based on a new prize) The area occupancy pattern that can be determined from the area occupancy pattern determination table differs depending on whether the fluctuation pattern of is a "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern or a "reach fluctuation" fluctuation pattern. It has become. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A), when the variation pattern is "normal variation", one of the area occupancy patterns 1 and 2 is determined, and the variation of "reach variation". When it is a pattern, any one of the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4 is determined. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), when the variation pattern is "normal variation", one of the area occupancy patterns 1 to 10 is determined, and the variation pattern is "reach variation". In this case, any of the area occupancy patterns 11 to 18 is determined. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), when the variation pattern is "normal variation", one of the area occupancy patterns 1 to 22 is determined, and the variation pattern is "reach variation". In this case, any of the area occupancy patterns 23 to 39 is determined.

As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern, the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is not exhausted. In addition, although the notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a specific effect is given to a part or all of the notice effect that has appeared (in this example, a point is given to the notice effect). By preventing the effect of stick sticking) from being executed and not changing part or all of the notice effect that appeared from color to monochrome (black and white), part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome. I try not to be occupied by the notice production of. In other words, by executing the black-and-white advance notice production, it is expected that the black-and-white mode will be entered, but the black-and-white mode is not actually entered.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the main is before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is exhausted. A notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick sticks to the notice effect) is executed for all of the notice effects that have appeared. Taking this as an opportunity, by changing all of the notice effects that have appeared from color to monochrome (black and white), the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome notice effects, and black and white. I am trying to enter the mode. In other words, by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when entering the black-and-white mode, a reach is always formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern, and the reach effect is executed, so that the expectation of a big hit can be raised. It has become. Further, when a specific effect is executed for all of the notice effects appearing in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is always a monochrome notice effect. Since it is occupied by and always enters the black-and-white mode, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a specific effect is executed when a notice effect appears. On the other hand, when the black-and-white advance notice effect is executed, the black-and-white mode is not entered, and the reach is not formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern that is not in the black-and-white mode (without executing the reach effect). It is not possible to raise expectations for a big hit. That is, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the expectation for a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and when the black-and-white mode is not entered, the expectation for a big hit (big hit expectation) is low. It can be said that it is a state that suggests. Further, in the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect is gradually appearing in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but by changing the notice effect to appear from color to monochrome (black and white). , The monochrome advance notice effect gradually occupies the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the wider the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the more the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 becomes. Since it approaches the state of being occupied by the monochrome preview effect, it is possible to raise the expectation of entering the monochrome mode. Further, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the more the notice effect appears in a wider area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the more the notice effect that appears is displayed in color. By changing to monochrome (black and white), it becomes possible for the monochrome advance notice effect to occupy the wide area, and when the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the wide area, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 Since the entire display area of is approaching the state of being occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, it is possible to raise the expectation of entering the monochrome mode.

In addition, the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table is displayed on the main liquid crystal display when some of the reservations that have already been held are exhausted, except for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect. There is an area occupancy pattern that is set so that the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the device 1600. Specifically, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupancy patterns 1, 2, 11, 12, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), the area occupancy patterns 1 to 10. , 23 to 30, even if it is decided to execute the monochrome advance notice effect, the advance notice effect may appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the first hold already held is exhausted. It is set so that the advance notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when the hold that has already been held from the next time onward is exhausted. Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (B), the area occupancy patterns 3 and 4, and in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), the area occupancy patterns 3, 4, 17 to 22 have already been obtained. Before the last hold held is exhausted, a notice effect appears in each area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the last hold already held is exhausted. , The notice effect is set not to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As a result, it becomes difficult to know when the monochrome advance notice effect will start and when it will end for the hold that has already been put on hold, so it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the monochrome advance notice effect will always be executed. You can do it.

By the way, in the area occupancy pattern, the area in which the notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 286. As shown in FIG. 286, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is divided into four equal parts, the upper part of the display area is the area A, the left side of the display area is the area B, the lower part of the display area is the area C, and the display area. The right side of is set to the area D. In the present embodiment, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is equally divided, but it does not have to be equally divided, and a part or all of the areas where the notice effect appears are set to overlap each other. You may be.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the hold from the next time onward that has already been held is exhausted. At that time, a new advance notice effect is set to appear in an area different from a part of the area where the advance notice effect has already appeared. Then, until the advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new advance notice effect is set to appear stepwise in the area not occupied by the advance notice effect. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), in the area occupancy pattern 31, after the advance notice effect appears in the area C, when the second hold already held is exhausted, the area The notice effect appears in the area D different from C, and when the third hold already held is exhausted, the notice effect appears in the areas A and B different from the areas C and D. I am trying to do it. As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, since a new notice effect appears in an area different from the area occupied by the notice effect, it is easy to recognize the new notice effect, and a plurality of the new notice effects are easily recognized. Even if various types of notice effects appear at the same time, it is difficult for players to overlook any of the notice effects. Further, until the advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a new advance notice effect can be gradually appeared in the area not occupied by the advance notice effect. As long as there is an area not occupied by the notice effect, whether or not a new notice effect will appear (a specific effect for the notice effect that has appeared (in this example, a dot stick is pierced for the notice effect). By changing the notice effect that appeared from color to monochrome (black and white) with the execution of the effect), the area where the notice effect appeared is occupied by the monochrome notice effect). It is designed to attract attention.

In addition, in the area occupancy pattern set in the area occupancy pattern determination table, after the advance notice effect appears in a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the hold from the next time onward that has already been held is exhausted. At that time, the advance notice effect may be set to appear so as to include a part of the area where the advance notice effect has already appeared. For example, in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (C), in the area occupancy patterns 37 to 39, after the advance notice effect appears in any of the areas B, C, and D, the third area is already reserved. When the hold is exhausted, the advance notice effect appears on the entire screen of the display area so that the areas B, C, and D are included.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the specific effect (this example) is given to the full screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect does not appear. In, an area occupancy pattern (for example, an area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)) in which a point bar is pierced into the entire screen (background image) is set. .. In such an area occupancy pattern, the advance notice effect does not appear for the areas A, B, C, and D, and the background image is displayed in the entire display area. On the other hand, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a dot stick sticks into the background image), the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by the monochrome background image. ing. Then, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome background image, the black and white mode is entered as in the case where the monochrome background image is occupied. For this reason, if the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, it is not possible to raise the expectation that it will be a big hit, but there is a possibility that the specific effect will be executed. , You can raise the expectation of entering the black and white mode. Further, when a notice effect appears in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a specific effect is executed for the notice effect that appears (for example, the area in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)). Compared to the occupancy pattern 4), the notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the specific effect is executed for the full screen (background image) in which the notice effect does not appear. As an opportunity, when the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by a monochrome background image (for example, the area occupancy pattern 3 in the area occupancy pattern determination table shown in FIG. 285 (A)) is executed. The probability is low, but the probability of a big hit after entering the black and white mode is high. That is, in the case of a big hit, the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the full screen (background image) in which the advance notice effect does not appear is compared with the case of the loss. Therefore, the probability of determining the area occupancy pattern in which the specific effect is executed is high. Therefore, even if the advance notice effect does not appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, there is a probability that it will be a big hit when the specific effect is executed (when the black and white mode is entered). It is possible to maintain high and big hit expectations.

Further, in the area occupancy pattern determination table, the area occupancy pattern in which the advance notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the area occupancy shown in FIG. 285 (A)). The area occupancy pattern 4) in the pattern determination table is included. In the area occupancy pattern in which the notice effect appears in each of the areas A, B, C, and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one or more notice effects appear in the areas A, B, C, and D. However, even though it is a variable display of the decorative pattern once, by executing a specific effect (in this example, an effect in which a point stick sticks to the advance notice effect) for all of the notice effects that have appeared. The entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be occupied by a monochrome advance notice effect. When one notice effect appears for the areas A, B, C, D (full screen) of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the areas A, B, C of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , D (full screen) has a higher probability of being a big hit after entering the black and white mode than when multiple notice effects appear, further increasing the expectation of being a big hit when entering the black and white mode. Can be done.

Next, in the monochrome advance notice effect execution process, step S1306 is performed every time the start condition for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is satisfied until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted. The type of advance notice effect to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 determined as the area occupancy pattern of the monochrome advance notice effect is determined, and the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome. When it is occupied by the advance notice effect, the control is performed to enter the black and white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the establishment of the start condition regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) (step S1308). When it is determined in step S1308 that the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 (YES), it is determined whether or not the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set (step S1309). If the fluctuation start command is not transmitted from the main control board 1310 in step S1308 (NO), or if the monochrome advance notice execution flag is not set in step S1309 (NO), the monochrome advance notice execution process ends.

Further, when the monochrome advance notice execution flag is set in step S1309 (YES), the fluctuation from the main control board 1310 is based on the fact that the start condition for the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is satisfied. By transmitting the start command, it is determined whether or not the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted (step S1310). If it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is before the digestion (NO), the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupancy pattern determined in step S1306. Of the display areas, the area corresponding to the remaining number of holds until the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is determined as the area where the notice effect appears, and the type of the notice effect to appear in that area is A notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) used to determine the set advance notice effect pattern is selected. In this notice effect pattern, a single or a plurality of types of notice effect are set so that the area determined as the area occupancy pattern can be occupied. Then, the advance notice effect pattern determination table is selected based on the area determined as the area occupancy pattern and the type of the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, and the selected advance notice effect pattern determination table is selected. And the random number for determining the advance notice effect pattern read from the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 are compared with each other to determine the type of advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) for occupying the area determined as the area occupancy pattern (step S1311). Here, before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted, the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, so that the decoration is performed based on the fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation". The variable display of the symbol is executed, and during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the type of the advance notice effect determined in step S1311 appears in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. (Step S1312).

The notice effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, and the advance notice effect pattern in which the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area is set as a table corresponding to the area determined as the area occupancy pattern. It is a table used to determine. Specifically, as a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area A in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area A is set. Is provided, and as a notice effect pattern determination table to be used when the notice effect appears in the area B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set is provided. As a notice effect pattern determination table to be used when the notice effect appears in the area C in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area C is set is provided. As a notice effect pattern determination table used when the notice effect appears in the area D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a table in which the notice effect capable of occupying the area D is set is provided. ing.

Further, when the advance notice effect appears over a plurality of areas such as the area A and the area B in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the advance notice effect that can occupy both the area A and the area B can be occupied. A notice effect pattern determination table is provided in which a combination of a notice effect capable of occupying the area A and a notice effect capable of occupying the area B is set. That is, the advance notice effect at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect may occupy the area determined as the area occupancy pattern, and may be a advance notice effect appearing over a plurality of areas or a combination of a plurality of advance notice effects. There may be.

Here, the notice effect that can be made to appear in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the time of executing the monochrome notice effect is similarly the main liquid crystal display other than at the time of executing the monochrome notice effect. It is possible to make it appear in a part or all of the display area of the device 1600. In this way, it is decided whether to execute each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not the hit is a big hit and whether or not to execute the reach effect, except when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, depending on the type of notice production, there are a notice production with high expectation that will be a big hit and a notice production with low expectation that will be a big hit, and when a notice production with high expectation that will be a big hit appears, a big hit You will be able to raise your expectations.

Then, at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the advance notice with low expectation that becomes a big hit other than when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed I try to decide the production with high probability. As a result, even if a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit appears except when the monochrome notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit cannot be raised, but a notice effect with a low expectation of a big hit appears. Later, when the notice effect that appeared changed from color to monochrome (black and white), it can be determined that it is being executed as part of the monochrome notice effect, not just the advance notice effect, and it is expected to be a big hit. Even if a low notice effect appears, it will be possible to raise the expectation that the monochrome notice effect will be executed.

Further, at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is changed. Depending on whether it is a fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation" or a fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the probability of determining a notice production with a high expectation that will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice production is executed is different. I have to. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the "reach fluctuation" fluctuation pattern, the monochrome advance notice effect is executed more than when it is the "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern. We try to determine with a high probability a highly expected notice production that will be a big hit other than the time. As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of "reach fluctuation", the black-and-white mode is entered, so that the expectation is a big hit. After the appearance of a high notice effect, when the notice effect that has appeared changes from color to monochrome (black and white), the probability of entering the black and white mode increases as a result of the monochrome advance effect, and the expectation of entering the black and white mode is high. You will be able to increase it.

Further, at the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the variation pattern regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is ". Among the fluctuation patterns of "reach fluctuation", monochrome depending on whether it is a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit or a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with a low expectation of a big hit. The probability of determining a notice production with a high degree of expectation that will be a big hit other than when the notice effect is executed is different. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice production is the fluctuation pattern of the “reach fluctuation” that executes the highly expected reach production that is a big hit (for example,). As pre-judgment information, "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "reach 4", "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit 7", "big hit 8", "big hit 11", When it is specified that it is classified into any of "big hit 12", "reach 3", and "reach 4"), when it is a fluctuation pattern that executes a reach effect with a low expectation of becoming a big hit ( For example, as pre-judgment information, "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", "reach 1" to "reach 4", "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5", "big hit 6", "big hit 9" , "Big hit 10", "Reach 1", "Reach 2"), the expectation that it will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice production is executed is higher. The notice production is decided with high probability. For this reason, when the high-expected advance notice effect that becomes a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white) and enters the black-and-white mode, the high-expected advance notice effect that becomes a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white). The probability of executing a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit during execution of the black-and-white mode is higher than when the black-and-white mode is entered due to the change, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased.

At the time of executing the monochrome advance notice effect, when determining the type of the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311, the lottery result regarding the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is a big hit. It may be decided according to whether it is a big hit or a loss, and depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss, a notice production with a high expectation that it will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice production is executed The probability of determining is different. Specifically, when the lottery result for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome notice effect is a big hit, the notice effect with a high expectation that it will be a big hit other than when the monochrome notice effect is executed is higher than when it is lost. May be determined with a high probability. Even in such a case, if the high-expected advance notice effect that becomes a big hit changes from color to monochrome (black-and-white) and enters the black-and-white mode, the high-expected advance notice effect that becomes a big hit changes from color to monochrome. By changing to (black and white), the probability of a big hit during execution of the black and white mode is higher than when the black and white mode is entered, and the expectation of a big hit can be increased.

Further, when the monochrome advance notice effect is executed, the step-up advance notice effect can be used as the advance notice effect to appear in the area determined as the area occupancy pattern in step S1311. The step-up notice effect is to provide an effect image corresponding to each of the multiple stages, and from the first stage of the multiple stages based on the fluctuation pattern of whether or not it will be a big hit and whether or not to execute the reach effect. This is an effect in which the effect images corresponding to a predetermined stage appear in sequence. Further, in the step-up notice effect, the higher the predetermined stage is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Then, among the plurality of stages, each of the effect image corresponding to the first stage, the effect image corresponding to the second stage, the effect image corresponding to the third stage, and the effect image corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed on the main liquid crystal display, for example. Of the display area of the device 1600, the area A, the area B, the area C, and the area D are made to appear, and as the step-up notice effect stage progresses, the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the notice effect. I am trying to increase the area.

When the above step-up notice effect is used, the effect image corresponding to the first stage, the effect image corresponding to the second stage, the effect image corresponding to the third stage, and the fourth stage are supported among the plurality of stages. For example, each of the produced image is made to appear in the area A, the area A, B, the area A, B, C, and the area A, B, C, D in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and step up. When the stage of the advance notice effect progresses, the area occupied by the advance notice effect increases in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by displaying the effect image in an area larger than the area before the stage progresses. It may be. Further, when the first stage of the step-up notice effect is started, the effect image appears in the area A in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the second stage is performed, the area A to the area B are displayed. When the effect image is enlarged and progressed to the third stage, the effect image is enlarged from the areas A and B to the area C, and when the effect image is advanced to the fourth stage, the effect image is expanded to the areas A, B, C and D. By enlarging the area in which the effect image of the advance notice effect is displayed when the stage of the step advance notice effect is advanced, the area occupied by the advance notice effect in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is increased. You may try to do it. Further, when the area occupied by the advance notice effect does not increase in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 even though the step-up advance notice effect stage has progressed, the step is increased by increasing the probability of a big hit. It is possible to pay attention not only to whether or not the stage of the advance notice production progresses, but also whether or not the area occupied by the advance notice effect increases.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1310 that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted (YES), the main is before the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted. When the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the effect of entering the black and white mode in which the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is monochrome is executed, while the effect is executed. If part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is not occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect (it was a mess of the monochrome advance notice effect), the main liquid crystal display device does not enter the black and white mode. The background image in the display area of 1600 is set to color, and the effect of maintaining the background image in the normal state is executed (step S1313). Further, when it is determined that the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is exhausted, the monochrome advance notice execution flag is reset and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S1314).

As described above, when the black-and-white mode is entered at the time of the hold digestion that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set to monochrome and the black-and-white mode is entered. If not, the background image in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is set as the color as in the background image in the normal state (other than the black-and-white mode), and the number of colors of the background image is different. In this way, when the black-and-white mode is entered by executing the monochrome advance notice effect, a reach is always formed as a variable display of the decorative pattern in the black-and-white mode, and the reach effect is executed, which is a big hit. Although expectations can be raised, the background image becomes monochrome and the number of colors in the background image is smaller than in normal times, which gives the player an impression different from normal times, which is a big hit. Expectations can be raised in combination with expectations. In addition, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the background image becomes monochrome, whereas on the front of the background image, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or after the black-and-white mode is entered, as in the normal case. By displaying the images of the notice effect that can be used in color, the images related to the lottery results can be made to stand out in comparison with the background image. That is, when the black-and-white mode is entered, the images related to the lottery results can be easily recognized by the player, so that the decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, and when the image of the advance notice effect appears, the image of the advance notice effect can be displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to draw more attention to the player than usual. On the other hand, when the black-and-white mode is not entered, the reach is not formed as the variable display of the decorative pattern (without executing the reach effect), and the expectation of becoming a big hit cannot be raised. For this reason, if the black-and-white mode is not entered, the variable display of the decorative pattern cannot be expected, and since the probability that the image of the advance notice effect appears is low, the advance notice effect cannot be expected, but the background image is Since it becomes color and the number of colors of the background image is larger than that in the black and white mode, it is possible to give a lively impression to the player even if the image of the notice production does not appear, and there is no expectation that it will be a big hit. It can be mitigated.

A specific example of the monochrome advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. In FIGS. 287 and 288, the fluctuation pattern of the hold (hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) added based on the new prize when the number of holds is 2, is the fluctuation pattern of “reach fluctuation”. (Classified into any of "big hit 1" to "big hit 12" and "reach 1" to "reach 4" as pre-judgment information), and the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold shown in FIG. 285 (B) is displayed. The case where the area occupancy pattern 15 is determined is shown. In the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold, while the first hold already held is exhausted, a notice effect is given to areas A and B of the display areas of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is set to appear, and while the second hold that has already been held is exhausted, the notice effect is set to appear in areas C and D of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. There is.

First, as shown in FIG. 287 (A), when a hold is added based on a new prize when the number of holds is 2, the first hold already held is exhausted. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 287 (B), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold. A notice production that straddles A and B appears. Specifically, as a preliminary announcement effect that straddles areas A and B, a person playing mahjong throws away the mahjong tiles and shouts "How about this!". At this time, during the execution of the advance notice effect straddling the areas A and B, as shown in FIG. 287 (C), the effect (specific effect) in which the mahjong stick sticks into the appearing advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As a result, the monochrome advance notice effect continues to occupy the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. 287 (D), the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol of "153"). With regard to the variable display of the decorative pattern, by maintaining the hue of the color, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see.

Next, before the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 287 (E), the characters "black and white chance!" Are displayed in the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is displayed in a small and lightly shaded manner, and mahjong dots appear on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the advance notice effect that straddles the areas A and B is mere. It is possible to recognize that the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect has started, not the advance notice effect (notice effect other than the monochrome advance notice effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (F), the next hold (the second hold that has already been held when the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is added) is digested. In the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, the mahjong dots appearing on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are scattered outside the display area. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 287 (G), the area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is based on the area occupancy pattern 15 of the area occupancy pattern determination table at 2 o'clock on hold. A notice production that straddles C and D appears. Specifically, as a preliminary announcement effect that straddles areas C and D, an effect that a person playing mahjong shouts "I can win!" While looking at the mahjong tiles is executed. At this time, during the execution of the advance notice effect straddling the areas C and D, as shown in FIG. 287 (H), the effect (specific effect) in which the mahjong stick sticks into the appearing advance notice effect is executed. By doing so, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). As described above, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, not only the areas A and B but also the areas C and D are occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, so that the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is occupied. The area will be occupied by the monochrome preview effect. In addition, in the case of the black-and-white advance notice effect, the point stick does not stick to the advance notice effect appearing across the areas C and D, and a part of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is used. Is not occupied by the monochrome preview effect, so it does not enter the monochrome mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (I), the characters "black and white mode standby" are displayed in the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that the black and white mode is entered as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect. It can be recognized that this is foretold. Then, as shown in FIG. 288 (J), in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol (in this example, the symbol “153”). After that, before the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 288 (K), the characters "monochrome mode entry" are displayed in the substantially center of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. By displaying in a large and darkened mode, it is possible to clearly recognize that the black-and-white mode will be entered as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect in the next variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (L), when the next hold (hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect) is digested, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It will start again. At this time, in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the background image becomes monochrome by entering the black-and-white mode, giving an impression different from the color which is the background image in the normal time other than the black-and-white mode. It is fueling the expectations of others. Then, when the black-and-white mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 288 (M), the fluctuation pattern for the hold that triggered the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect is the fluctuation pattern of the “reach fluctuation”. Since a reach (in this example, the symbol "7") is formed as a variable display of the decorative symbol and then the reach effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit can be raised. If the lottery result is a big hit, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol (in this example, the middle symbol of "7"), and if the lottery result is a loss, the variation of the decorative symbol. The display will be stopped at a lost symbol (in this example, a medium symbol other than "7").

Before and after the mahjong stick sticks into the notice effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the appearing notice effect is changed from color to monochrome (black and white). ), And there is no change in the image itself such as the character depicted as a preview effect. The data that specifies the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the data that specifies the color arrangement of the depiction are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, but in the execution of the monochrome advance notice effect, Data for designating the coordinate position of the depiction in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be commonly used, and it is possible to prevent the amount of data stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 from increasing.

In addition, when a mahjong dot stick sticks into a notice effect appearing in a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the area is occupied by the monochrome notice effect, the main The ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be shown. For example, when the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the areas A and B of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 (may be the display area of the main liquid crystal display area 1600). By displaying "50%" as the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect, the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect and the ratio of the remaining area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect. Can be clearly recognized. Further, when displaying the ratio of the area occupied by the monochrome advance notice effect in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, the monochrome advance notice effect occupies a part or all of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It may be displayed in advance before the display, and in such a case, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can also be noticed, and the player can take the process until the monochrome advance notice effect occupies. Can be visually recognized with peace of mind.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the variable display of the decorative symbol that has entered the black-and-white mode as a result of the monochrome advance notice effect is the target of the black-and-white mode, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol that has entered the black-and-white mode is completed. , Black-and-white mode is also terminated, but not only the variable display of the decorative symbol that entered the black-and-white mode, but also the black-and-white mode is continued over the variable display of the decorative symbol multiple times after entering the black-and-white mode. You may. For example, even if the hold is interrupted, the black-and-white mode may be continued until the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner a plurality of times. In this way, when the black-and-white mode is continued over the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times after entering the black-and-white mode, even if a big hit is not obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol that has entered the black-and-white mode. By continuing the black-and-white mode even in the variable display of decorative patterns from the next time onward, it is possible to maintain the expectation of a big hit.

In the above explanation, when the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the monochrome mode is entered from the start of the next variable display of the decorative symbol. Not limited. For example, the monochrome advance notice effect is executed in the variable display of a single or multiple decorative symbols, and the monochrome advance notice effect occupies the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, that is, the monochrome advance notice effect. Monochrome by entering the black-and-white mode within the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of occupancy, and forming a reach (performing the reach effect) within the variable display of the decorative symbol when entering the black-and-white mode. It is possible to raise the expectation that it will be a big hit even for the variable display of the decorative pattern at the time when the notice effect of is occupied. Further, for example, among the advance notice effects that can be made to appear in the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the expectation of a big hit (big hit expectation) is high, and the entire area of the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 ( When a specific high-expectation notice effect displayed on the full screen) appears and a mahjong dot stick sticks to the specific high-expectation notice effect, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed. By occupying the black-and-white mode by being occupied by the black-and-white advance notice effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of entering the black-and-white mode even when the hold is not stored.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Is.

For example, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

In addition, not limited to those that preferentially execute the variable display of the second special symbol, a maximum of eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are put on hold are displayed in the order in which the hold occurs. The present invention is also applicable to a gaming machine of the type that starts (digests the hold) at (the order in which the starting prizes are generated in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004).

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 First start port 2101a Always winning port 2101b Special winning port 2102 Second starting port 2111 Movable piece 2301 LCD gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board 4100 Main control board

Claims (1)

After the start condition is satisfied, a lottery means to draw a lot based on the start condition is satisfied, and
A display control means that starts fluctuation control of the display means based on the establishment of the start condition and derives and displays a display result according to the lottery result.
A specific state giving means that gives a specific state that can give a game value to a player when the displayed result is a specific result, and
The Grant advantageous particularly advantageous conditions in a different player starts at the specific state of the fluctuation control based on the establishment of the starting conditions winning a special result lottery by the lottery unit, wherein from the start of the variation control special result display results continuously applied the special advantage until determined in accordance with, comprising a beneficial and applying means, to terminate the application of the special favorable state when the display result is determined in accordance with the special results,
Wherein in a state where Ri by the advantageous application means the particularly advantageous state is granted, depending on the particular results of the kind elected by the lottery, second being different from the first embodiment displays a first aspect the display Any one of a plurality of mode displays is performed, including the mode display of .
The particularly advantageous condition being the applied Ri by the advantageous application means, gaming value and is capable enjoyed are made different depending Uchikata of the player,
At the start of the variation control based on the establishment of the start condition in which the special result is won in the lottery by the lottery means, the special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player different from the specific state is given, and from the start of the variation control. and the advantageous grant means that the special result displays the results to continue the grant of or in front Symbol particularly advantageous state to determine in accordance with, to end the special result the grant of special advantageous state and the display result is determined in accordance with the, The lottery means for executing the lottery is controlled by the main control means among the main control means for controlling the progress of the game and the sub-control means for controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control means.
Game value the player is capable enjoyed by the advantageous application means by Ri the particularly advantageous state is applied to Rukoto is greater than gaming value the specific state is capable enjoyed if granted A game machine characterized by that.

Images